specifications - Struct

Transkrypt

NATHAN PHILLIPS SQUARE REVITALIZATION
PHASE THREE
REVITALIZATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 1 · DIVISIONS 1 TO 14
PLANT ARCHITECT INC. | PERKINS + WILL
ARCHITECTS IN JOINT VENTURE
BIKE STORAGE FACILITY · ISSUED FOR TENDER · 27 JUNE 2014
Project No. 0701-BS
Revised and re-issued
Tender June 27, 2014
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Architectural
Volume 1
Page 00001-1
No. of Pages
INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION
00000
00001
00005
00007
Project Title / Cover
Table of Contents
Consultants
Seals
1
3
2
2
DIVISION 1
01001
01352
01355
01359
01611
01710
General Requirements
General LEED Requirements (Enermodal Feb 7, 2014)
Waste Management and Disposal (Enermodal Feb 7, 2014)
Indoor Air Quality Management (Enermodal Feb 7, 2014)
LEED Product Requirements (Enermodal Feb 7, 2014)
Commissioning (Enermodal Feb 7, 2014)
27
3
8
22
11
9
DIVISION 2
02050
02060
02370
02513
02583
Demolition and Preparation for New Work
Structural Alterations (Blackwell May 23, 2014)
Erosion and Sedimentation Control (Enermodal Feb 7, 2014)
Asphaltic Concrete Paving
Exterior Concrete
7
2
9
6
6
Cast-in-place Concrete (Blackwell May 23, 2014)
Sandblasting
8
2
DIVISION 3
03300
03353
DIVISION 4
04200
Masonry
12
Structural Steel (Blackwell May 23, 2014)
Miscellaneous Metals (inc lockers)
Steel Stairs, Handrails, Guards & Railings
11
11
8
Rough Carpentry
Installation of Doors and Finish Hardware
6
4
DIVISION 5
05120
05500
05510
DIVISION 6
06100
06210
Project No. 0701-BS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Architectural
Volume 1
Page 00001-2
No. of Pages
DIVISION 7
07131
07180
07860
07900
Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing
Thin Deck Coating (for curbs and other)
Firestopping and Smoke Seals
Sealants
6
4
4
6
Hollow Metal Doors, Frames, Panels and Screens
Finish Hardware (Assa Abbloy June 27, 2014)
Miscellaneous Glass and Glazing
7
16
4
Detectable Warning Surface
Concrete Floor Sealing
Painting and Finishing
4
2
12
Exterior Signage
6
DIVISION 8
08100
08710
08800
DIVISION 9
09365
09756
09900
DIVISION 10
10430
VOLUMES ISSUED SEPARATELY AND NOT INCLUDED HERE
VOLUME 2 – MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL DIVISIONS
Mechanical Divisions
Crossey Eng dated May 23, 2014
318
Electrical Divisions
Crossey Eng dated June 27, 2014
442
VOLUME 3 - REPORTS AND SCHEDULES
See Volume 3 Table of Contents
Project No. 0701-BS
1.1
SECTION 00005
CONSULTANTS
Architects
Perkins + Will Architects
(previously Shore Tilbe Irwin & Partners)
672 Dupont Street, Suite 500
Toronto, Ontario M6G 1Z6
Tel: 416-971-6060
Fax. 416-971-6765
Contact: Vis Sankrithi
Plant Architect Inc.
101 Spadina Avenue, Suite 208
Toronto, Ontario M5V 2K2
Tel: 416-979-2012
Fax. 416-979-1283
Contact: Lisa Dietrich
1.2
Structural Consultant
Blackwell
19 Duncan Street, Suite 405
Toronto, Ontario M5H 3H1
Tel: 416-593-5300
Fax: 416-593-4840
Contact: Kenny Cryer
1.3
Mechanical Consultant
Crossey Engineering Ltd.
2255 Sheppard Avenue East, Suite E331
Toronto, Ontario. M2J 4Y1
Tel: 416-497-3111
Fax. 416-497-7210
Contact: David Sinclair
1.4
Electrical Consultant
Tel: 416-497-3111
Fax: 416-497-7210
Contact: Leo Lee
Page 00005 - 1
Project No. 0701-BS
1.5
SECTION 00005
CONSULTANTS
Civil Consultant
MMM Group Ltd.
701 Rossland Road East, Suite 201
Whitby, Ontario. L1N 8Y9
Grading: Stephen Wiley
Tel: 905-668-3022 Ext. 1614
Storm Water Management: Amie Therrien
Tel: 905-882-1100 Ext. 3024
1.6
Environmental Consultant
Enermodel Engineering Ltd.
650 Riverbend Drive
Kitchener, Ontario N2K 3S2
Tel: 519-743-8777
Fax: 416-260-3028
Contact: Mike Edwards
1.7
Code Consultant
Randal Brown & Associates
6 Lansing Square
North York, Ontario. M2J 1T5
Tel: 416-492-5886 Ext. 239
Fax: 416-492-1258
Contact: David Vickers
* * *
END OF SECTION
Page 00005 - 2
Project No. 0701-3
SECTION 00007
SEALS
Architects of Record
Perkins + Will Architects
(formerly Shore Tilbe Irwin & Partners)
672 Dupont Street, Suite 500
Toronto, Ontario M6G 1Z6
Tel: 416-971-6060
Fax. 416-971-6765
Contact: Linda Neumayer
Andrew Frontini
Plant Architect Inc.
101 Spadina Avenue, Suite 208
Toronto, Ontario M5V 2K2
Tel: 416-979-2012
Fax. 416-979-1283
Contact: Lisa Rapoport
Landscape Consultant
Hoerr Schaudt Landscape Architects
850 West Jackson Boulevard, Suite 800
Chicago, Illinois 60607 USA
Tel: 312-492-6501
Fax: 312-492-7101
Contact: Jon Brooke
Structural Consultant
Blackwell Bowick
19 Duncan Street, Suite 405
Toronto, Ontario M5H 3H1
Tel: 416-593-5300
Fax: 416-593-4840
Contact: Christian Bellini
Page 00007 - 1
Project No. 0701-3
SECTION 00007
SEALS
Mechanical Consultants
Tel: 416-497-3111
Fax. 416-497-7210
Contact: Andrew Pratt
Electrical Consultants
Tel: 416-497-3111
Fax: 416-497-7210
Contact: Adam Ryk
Civil Consultants
MMM Group Ltd.
701 Rossland Road East, Suite 201
Whitby, Ontario. L1N 8Y9
Grading: Stephen Wiley
Tel: 905-668-3022 Ext. 1614
Storm Water Management: Amie Therrien
Tel: 905-882-1100 Ext. 3024
* * *
END OF SECTION
Page 00007 - 2
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 01001
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 01001 - 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Subdivision of Work
1.1.1
The Specifications have generally been divided into trade divisions, and the trade divisions
into sections for the purpose of ready reference, but a section may consist of more than one
Subcontractor or supplier.
1.1.2
The responsibility for determining which Subcontractor or Supplier provided labour,
materials, products, equipment and services to complete the work rests solely with the
Contractor.
1.2
Trade Contractors
1.2.1
All Trade Contractors must be approved by the Owner and the Contractor. The Owner
may reject a Trade Contractor for any reason.
1.3
Discrepancies and/or Omissions
1.3.1
If the Contractor finds discrepancies in, or omissions from the Drawings, Specifications or
other Contract Documents or has any doubt as to the meaning or intent of any part thereof
the Consultant shall be notified at once. The Contractor will send written instructions or
explanations. Neither the Owner nor the Consultant will be responsible for oral
instructions.
1.4
Acceptance of Existing Condition
1.4.1
Commencement of Work means acceptance of existing condition
1.5
Noise, Access, Events and Property Constraints
1.5.1
All Event dates listed in this section are to be verified with the City of Toronto at the start
of the project.
1.5.2
The Noise Bylaw (Chapter 591, City of Toronto Municipal Code) permits operation of
construction equipment ONLY during Monday to Friday 7:00 a.m. to 7:00 p.m., Saturdays
9:00 a.m. to 7:00 p.m., and no construction noise on Sundays and statutory holidays
(amending by-law 505-2006).
1.5.3
Continuous public access to the Square must be maintained at all times throughout
construction. Contractor to provide a schedule for temporary alternate routing of public
access routes throughout construction for the Owner and Architect’s review.
1.5.4
Continuous public access to the Square must be maintained throughout events that host
extremely large numbers of people, including but not limited to the following events:
Project No. 0701-BS
.1
SECTION 01001
Page 01001 - 2
Nuit Blanche (7pm to 7am)
2014 – Oct 4 & 5 (Project build to commence as early as Sep 23/14)
2015 – Oct 3 & 4 (Project build to commence as early as Sep 23/15)
.2
.3
Cavalcade of Lights (6pm to 11pm)
2014 – Nov. 29
(Project build to commence as early as Nov 20/14)
2015 – Nov. 28
(Project build to commence as early as Nov 20/15)
New Years Eve (all day)
2014 – Dec. 17 to Jan 7
2015 – Dec 16 to Jan 6th
1.5.5
The Owner may notify the Contractor, providing 2-weeks notice, of events on the site
during which construction may need to stop or be limited. This notice may result in
construction schedule extension at no cost to the Owner.
1.5.6
Ensure that construction does not result in closures / blockages along Queen Street. Queen
Street serves as emergency access for the site and the only events access for the site.
1.5.7
Vehicles are not permitted onto the square during events activation and during the setup
periods prior and after the events. Events by Toronto Special Events include the following:
.1
Doors Open (10am to 6pm)
2014 – May 24 & 25
2015 – May 23 & 24
.2
Fresh Wednesdays (noon to 2pm)
2014 – Weekly from July 9 to Aug. 27
2015 – N/A
.3
Tasty Thursdays (noon to 2pm)
2014 – Weekly from July 10 to Aug 28
2015 – N/A
.4
Nuit Blanche (7pm to 7am)
2014 – Oct 4 & 5
Project build to commence as early as Sep 23/14
2015 – Oct 3 & 4
Project build to commence as early as Sep 23/15
Project No. 0701-BS
.5
SECTION 01001
Page 01001 - 3
Cavalcade of Lights (6pm to 11pm)
2014 – Nov. 29
Project build to commence as early as Nov 20/14
2015 – Nov 28
Project build to commence as early as Nov 19/15
.6
PanAm / ParaPan Games (all day)
2015 – Jul 9/15 – Aug 15/15
Project build to commence as early as Jul 2/15
.7
Khalsa Day (all day)
2014 – April 27
2015 – April 26
.8
Toronto Jazz Festival (all day)
2014 – June 18 – July3
2015 – tbc
.9
IRIE Music Festival (all day)
2014 – August 1 -5
.10
Canada's Walk of Fame (all day)
2014 sep 18 -21
2015 tbc
.11
Scotia Bank Toronto Waterfront Marathon (all day)
2014 – Oct 18 -19
2015 – Oct 17 -18
.12
New Years Eve (all day)
2014 – Dec 17 – Jan 7
2015 – Dec 16 – Jan 6
1.6
Examination of Existing Conditions
1.6.1
Be fully informed of site conditions and all matters affecting the site and work to be done
thereon at the place of building. Ensure that construction proceeds without
misunderstanding of site conditions as a result of neglect in the examination of existing
conditions.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 01001
Page 01001 - 4
1.6.2
Each trade shall inform the Contractor of defects in the Work on which further execution of
work depends.
1.6.3
Verify dimensions of prepared work before fabrication of that work which is dependant on
the prepared work.
1.7
Public Utilities and Services
1.7.1
The location of the utilities as shown on the Contract Drawings are approximate only and
the Owner does not warrant the completeness or correctness of the information shown.
The Contractor shall verify the completeness and correctness of utilities information in the
field, by contacting utility companies, and shall exercise the necessary care in Work
operations, to take such other precautions as may be necessary to safeguard the utilities
from damages and to repair any utilities damaged during Work at no cost to the Owner.
The Contractor shall notify any discrepancy of utility information to the Contractor forth
with.
1.7.2
The Contractor shall request and obtain locates from all utility providers prior to any
excavation. All excavations near the vicinity of any underground utilities shall be
conducted in accordance with the policy/standards of the utility provider.
1.8
Building Dimensions and Coordination
1.8.1
Ensure that all necessary job dimensions are taken and all Subcontractors are coordinated
for the proper execution of the work. Assume complete responsibility for the accuracy and
completeness of such dimensions, and for coordination.
1.8.2
Verify that all work, as it proceeds, is executed in accordance with dimensions and
positions indicated which maintain levels and clearances to adjacent work, as set out by
requirements of the drawings, and ensure that work installed in error is rectified before
construction resumes.
1.8.3
Check and verify all dimensions referring to the work and the interfacing of all services.
Verify with the Subcontractor concerned all dimensions, when pertaining to the work of
other Subcontractors. Be responsible to see that Subcontractors for various Subcontractors
cooperate for the proper performance of the Work.
1.8.4
Avoid scaling directly from the drawings. If there is ambiguity or lack of information,
immediately inform the Contractor and Consultant. Be responsible for any change through
the disregarding of this clause.
1.8.5
All details and measurements of any work which is to fit or to conform with work installed
shall be taken at the building.
1.8.6
Advise Contractor and Consultant of discrepancies and if there are omissions on drawings,
particularly those which affect aesthetics, or which interfere with services, equipment or
surfaces. DO NOT PROCEED without direction from the Consultant.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 01001
Page 01001 - 5
1.8.7
Ensure that each Subcontractor communicates requirements for site conditions and surfaces
necessary for the execution of the Subcontractor's work, and that he provides setting
drawings, templates and all other information necessary for the location and installation of
material, holes, sleeves, insets, anchors, accessories, fastenings, connections and access
panels. Inform other Subcontractors whose work is affected by these requirements and
preparatory work.
1.8.8
Prepare interference drawings and submit to the Consultant for review. Revise drawings
based on Consultants comments and to properly coordinate the work.
1.9
Labels and Nameplates
1.9.1
Do not install permanent or permanently-attached labels, trademarks, and nameplates in
visible locations on materials and components, unless required for operating instructions or
by Jurisdictional Authorities.
1.10
Use of Premises Before Substantial Performance
1.10.1
The Owner shall have the right to enter and occupy the building, in whole or in part, for the
purpose of placing fittings and equipment, or for other use, before completion of the
Contract if, in the opinion of the Contractor, such entry and occupancy does not prevent or
interfere with the Contractor in the performance of the Contract. Such entry shall in no way
be considered as an acceptance of the Work in whole, or in part, nor shall it imply
acknowledgement that terms of the Agreement are fulfilled.
1.11
Lines, Levels, and Building Location
1.11.1
The Contractor shall establish all necessary lines and levels, and erect substantial batter
boards and maintain their accurate position.
1.12
Regulatory Requirements
1.12.1
Minimum Standard: Unless reference is made in the Contract Documents to other
standards, all work shall conform to or exceed the minimum applicable standards of The
2006 Ontario Building Code, and/or the governing Jurisdictional Authorities.
1.12.2
Laws and Regulations: Comply with all applicable statutes, laws, by-laws, regulations,
ordinances and orders whether Federal, Provincial, Municipal or otherwise, at any time in
effect during the duration of this Contract, and all rules and requirements of the Police and
Fire departments, or other governmental authorities, and all C.S.A. approvals, where
required.
1.13
Specification Reference to Standards and Codes
1.13.1
Where reference is made to published standards and codes, such references shall be
considered to refer to the latest edition (revision) approved by the organization issuing that
publication, which is current at the date of this Specification.
1.14
Temporary Works
Project No. 0701-BS
1.14.1
1.14.3
.1
Provide protection for existing finishes, newly finished and partially finished
building finishes and equipment.
.2
Each trade shall provide necessary screens and covers as required.
.3
Be responsible for all damage up to the take-over by the Owner.
Field Offices
1.14.6
Provide and maintain site offices in locations as approved by the Contractor and
the Owner.
Temporary Utilities
.1
1.14.5
Shall be provided by the Contractor.
Temporary Protection
.1
1.14.4
Page 01001 - 6
Temporary Hoarding and Enclosures
.1
1.14.2
SECTION 01001
Refer to Instructions to Bidders.
Temporary Ladders, Stairs and Scaffolds
.1
Each trade shall be responsible for providing their own ladders, stairs and scaffolds
in accordance with the Occupational Health and Safety Act.
.2
Construct and maintain scaffolding in a rigid, secure and safe manner, independent
of walls and in such a manner as to interfere as little as possible with other trades.
.3
When not in use, move scaffolding as necessary to permit other work to proceed.
.4
Remove scaffolding promptly when no longer required.
Elevators:
.1
Existing Carpark 36 elevators may not be used by construction personnel.
1.15
Sleeving
1.15.1
Assess requirements for sleeving the structural elements for passing of pipes, conduits and
other mechanical or electrical components, and include all work required for approved
interfacing between the structure, all mechanical and electrical work, and other components
of the work.
1.16
Life and Fire Safety
1.16.1
Enforce all requirements established by Jurisdictional Authorities and Underwriters for life
safety, fire prevention, and fire protection.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 01001
Page 01001 - 7
1.17
Drainage
1.17.1
Ensure that positive drainage is provided to roof, floor, slabs, paving and site drains and
catch basins, as set in their final positions, and at all other locations to prevent water
infiltration into the buildings. Provide constant slopes for drained surfaces to drains and
drainage courses.
1.17.2
Verify the extent of each area served by a drain, or drainage course, to eliminate possible
undrained surfaces. Coordinate the work of involved Subcontractors before each of their
work proceeds.
1.17.3
If water is found to be ponding on roof areas (24 hours or more) due to improperly placed
drains, install additional drains to alleviate water ponding at no cost to the Owner. If extra
drains are required coordinate the location of rainwater leaders with the Consultant. Note:
Controlled flow drainage is required for this project.
1.18
Windload For Exterior Application
1.18.1
Design and install framing, hangers, fasteners, supports, and all accessories required to
complete the work to withstand local windloads and/or uplifts. All members shall be of
sizes and strength to carry all loads imposed and provide stiffness required.
1.19
Imperial/International System of Units
1.19.1
Where measurements are indicated in both Imperial and International System of Units (SI),
the SI System of Units will apply.
1.20
Smoking Restrictions
1.20.1
Smoking will not be permitted anywhere in the building. Any smoking shall take place
outside the premises.
1.21
Posters, Photos, Calendars, and Pin-ups
1.21.1
"Sunshine Girls" or similar material will not be allowed on site.
1.22
Cutting and Restoration
1.22.1
While every effort has been made to show or note the extent of the work both on the
drawings and specifications, the Contractor must realize the complexities involved in a
project of this size and type.
1.22.2
Typically the Contractor shall restore any and all existing surfaces disturbed by new
construction operations whether or not such restoration is noted on drawings. "Restore" is
defined herein as the provision of all work necessary for bringing a disturbed area,
material, surface, assembly or system to its original finished condition or better.
1.22.3
It is therefore imperative that Contractor evaluates the drawings and specifications and
visits the site to conduct a pre-tender survey of existing conditions upon which new work
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 01001
Page 01001 - 8
will be dependent. No additional cost will be entertained by the Owner on account of the
Contractor's failure to comply with the foregoing.
1.22.4
1.22.5
Execute cutting and remedial work required to:
.1
Make several parts fit properly.
.2
Uncover work to provide for installation of ill-timed work.
.3
Remove and replace defective work.
.4
Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents.
.5
Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing and mockups.
.6
Install specified work in existing construction.
In addition to Contract requirements, upon written instructions of Consultant:
.1
Uncover work to provide for Consultant's observation of covered work.
.2
Remove samples of installed materials for testing.
.3
Remove work to provide for alteration of existing work.
1.22.6
Do not endanger any work by cutting or altering work or any part of it.
1.22.7
Do not cut or alter work of another Contractor without written consent of the Contractor.
1.22.8
Prior to cutting, boring, or sleeving load-bearing members, or items which affect structural
safety of the project, or work of another Contractor, submit written notice to Contractor
requesting consent to proceed with cutting, including information as to size, location,
timing, Subcontractor and tools to be used.
1.22.9
Prior to cutting and remedial work done on instruction of Contractor or Consultant submit
cost estimate. Do not proceed with cutting and remedial work until proposed extra costs are
approved in writing.
1.22.10 Should conditions of work or schedule indicate change of materials or methods, submit
written recommendation to Contractor and Consultant including conditions indicating
change, recommendations for alternative methods or materials, and submittals as required
for substitutions.
1.22.11 Submit written notice to Contractor and Consultant designating time work will be
uncovered, to provide for observation.
1.22.12 All electrical and mechanical equipment and wiring which must be built into or interfaced
with the building components, or pass through structure, walls, floors, etc., shall have their
installation preplanned cooperatively with the respective Subcontractors involved. The
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 01001
Page 01001 - 9
resultant need for cutting and patching shall, therefore, be reduced to an absolute
minimum.
1.22.13 Subcontractors requiring cuts, holes, or sleeves for his work shall locate them.
1.22.14 Inspect existing conditions of work, including elements subject to movement or damage,
during cutting and patching and excavating and backfilling.
1.22.15 After uncovering work, inspect conditions affecting installation of new work.
1.22.16 Provide shoring, bracing, and support as required to maintain structural integrity of project.
1.22.17 Provide protection for other portions of the project.
1.22.18 Provide protection from the elements.
1.22.19 Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide finished installation to comply with
specified tolerances and finishes.
1.22.20 Execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other work, and
will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs and new work.
1.22.21 Employ appropriate Subcontractors with skilled labour to perform cutting and patching of
exposed surfaces.
1.22.22 Cut materials using proper equipment and methods. Pneumatic or impact tools are not
allowed without prior approval of the Consultant.
1.22.23 Properly fit work to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations through surfaces.
1.22.24 At penetration of fire-rated ceilings, walls or floor constructions, completely seal voids
with fire rated materials, to the full thickness of the construction element.
1.22.25 Make cuts with clean, true, smooth edges. Fit unit to tolerances established by best
standard practice for applicable work. Make patches invisible in final assembly.
1.22.26 Tightly fit all construction to pipes, ducts, and conduits which pass through construction, to
completely prevent the passage of air.
1.22.27 Restore work which has been cut or removed. Install new products to provide completed
work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.22.28 Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish.
1.23
.1
Continuous surfaces: to nearest intersections.
.2
Assembly: entire refinishing.
Project Meetings for Progress of Work
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 01001
Page 01001 - 10
1.23.1
Contractor will conduct progress meetings in accordance with the schedule and/or
decisions made at Preconstruction meeting.
1.23.2
Include in the agenda the following:
.1
Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting.
.2
Review of Work progress since previous meeting.
.3
Field observations, problems, conflicts.
.4
Problems which impede construction schedule.
.5
Review of off-site fabrication delivery schedules.
.6
Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule.
.7
Revisions to construction schedule.
.8
Progress during succeeding work period.
.9
Review submittal schedules: expedite as required.
.10
Maintenance of quality standards.
.11
Pending changes and substitutions.
.12
Review proposed changes for effect on construction schedule and on completion
date.
.13
Other business.
1.24
Submittals Prior to Construction
1.24.1
Submit the following prior to commencement of construction:
.1
Products List
.1
Within thirty days after date of Contract, submit to Contractor and
Consultant one reproducible transparency of complete list of all products
which are proposed for installation.
.2
Tabulate list by each specification section.
.3
For products specified under reference standards, include with listing of
each product:
.1 Name and address of manufacturer.
.2 Trade name.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 01001
Page 01001 - 11
.3 Model or catalogue designation.
.4
Manufacturer's data:
.1 Performance and test data.
.2 Reference standards.
.5
Material safety data sheets.
.2
Controlled Hazardous Materials list: The Contractor shall provide a list of all
controlled hazardous materials or products containing hazardous materials, all
physical agents or devices or equipment producing or omitting physical agent and
any substance, compound, product or physical agent that is deemed to be or
contans a designated substance in accordance with the Workplace Hazardous
Materials Information System (WHMIS) as defined under the Occupational Health
and Safety Act and shall provide appropriate Material Health and Safety Data
Sheets for these substances used for the performance of the required Work, all
prior to the performance of said Work.
.3
Safety plan / Rescue plan: The Contractor shall have a clearly defined safety
plan/rescue plan for its Workers involved in hazardous activities. This plan shall
include, but not be limited to, procedures for entering a confined space on the
Work site.
.4
Demolition Dust Control Plan: Submit demolition dust control plan for consultant
review and approval. The Demolition Dust Control Plan should identify measures
that will be taken to control dust during demolition, related soil excavation or
during soil remediation/excavation activities and should include the following as
applicable:
.1
The daily, or more frequently if required, wetting of all soft and hard
surfaces and any excavation face on the site, with the addition of approved
dust repressant, if required.
.2
The designation of truck loading points to avoid trucks tracking
potentially contaminated demolition debris off the site. Such loading
points should be on a gravel base to minimize tracking of the soil onto the
sidewalk and the street. If the loading point becomes contaminated it
should be cleaned and replaced.
.3
All trucks and vans leaving the site should be cleaned of all loose soil and
dust from demolition debris including the washing of tires and sweeping
or washing of exteriors and tailgates by a designated labourer. A daily log
of each truck leaving the site should be kept noting when the truck was
cleaned and by whom.
.4
Tarping all trucks leaving the site which have been loaded with
indigenous soil or demolition debris.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 01001
Page 01001 - 12
.5
An air monitoring program, if necessary, as determined through
consultation with the Environmental Protection Offices of the City of
Toronto.
.6
Supervision of the dust control measures by a qualified environmental
consultant if necessary, as determined by consultation with the
Environmental Protection Offices of the City of Toronto.
.5
Submittals for Concrete Formwork (refer to Section 03100 Concrete Formwork)
.6
Steel Framework, Anchors and Brackets not in Contact with Stone: Certificate of
Compliance. (refer to Section 04400 Building Stone)
.7
Submittals for Structural Steel: Refer to section 05120 Structural Steel, item 1.6
SUBMITTALS
1.25
Submittals During Progress of Construction
1.25.1
Submit the following during the course of construction:
.1
Construction Schedule updates.
.2
Report on any damage, on conditions or problems arising out of receipt of Owner's
equipment on site.
.3
Samples
.1
Submit samples where specified in each applicable trade section of the
Specifications. Unless specified otherwise make samples of adequate size
to represent the material intended for use on this project.
.2
Where the degrees of marking or colour cannot be adequately shown in a
single sample, submit a range of samples to show the extremes of colour
and marking. Identify samples with project number, date, and name of
Contractor. Materials used in building shall correspond to approved
samples for quality, colour, texture, finish, and thickness.
.3
Submit two samples of each item required unless specified otherwise.
.4
Progress records and testing and inspection reports.
.5
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings as specified herein and in accordance with
Mechanical and Electrical Divisions of the Specifications.
.6
Workplace Safety and Insurance Board (WSIB): The Contractor shall submit to
the Contractor, prior to the issuance of the Contractor's last payment, and at any
other time when requested to do so, a statement from the Workers' Safety
Insurance Board that all of the assessments the Contractor or any Sub Contractor is
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 01001
Page 01001 - 13
liable to pay under the Worker's Safety Insurance Board Act or successor
legislation have been paid.
1.26
Submittals When Project is Substantially Performed
1.26.1
Manufacturer’s Data Book and Shop Drawings
1.26.2
.1
Provide the Contractor with shop drawings and Manufacturer's Data Books at the
completion of the Work.
.2
Shop drawings shall consist of two complete sets of final "REVIEWED" and
"Reviewed with Comments" shop drawings, on which corrections have been
recorded of changes made during fabrication and installation of unforeseen
conditions. Do not include drawings which were noted "REVISE AND
RESUBMIT".
.3
The Manufacturer's Data Book shall consist of two copies of soft, black, vinylcovered loose leaf binders, to accommodate 8-½" x 11" sheets. Binders shall
match in all dimensions. A title sheet labelled "Manufacturer's Data Book" with
project name, date and list of contents shall precede data. Organize required
material into applicable sections of work. Each section shall be marked by labelled
tabs protected with celluloid covers fastened to hard paper dividers.
.4
The Manufacturer's Data Book shall contain:
.1
Equipment and operating instructions on all operable equipment and on
all mechanical and electrical equipment, plumbing fixtures, and
architectural hardware. Notes shall be typed. Drawings shall be neatly
drafted and inked, or white-printed. Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for
additional requirements.
.2
Maintenance instructions.
.3
Original brochures on all equipment.
.4
Parts lists on all equipment including a list of suppliers.
.5
All additional material used in the project beyond that indicated by
brochures listed under the various sections, showing manufacturers and
sources of supply.
.6
Names, addresses and telephone numbers of the designer(s) and major
contractor(s) who worked on the building.
.7
Commissioning data such as air and water flows and regulating valve
positions.
Record Drawings:
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 01001
Page 01001 - 14
.1
Maintain, as the work progresses, until project duration, 1 set of project Record
Drawings. The full size drawings shall be in white prints while the 8-1/2" x 11"
detail drawing sheets shall be in photocopies.
.2
Contractor shall return the marked up hard copies and provide as-built drawings
digitally produced (CADD) on a computer. Transfer all as-built information to
CD's using CD ROM of tender documents provided by the Consultant. ACAD
2009 shall be the acceptable data file platform. Diskettes shall be formatted in
Autocad maintaining the layering standard used on the tendering drawings. Each
CD shall be clearly labelled with the project name, drawing number (s), Contractor
and/or Subcontractor names and the date submitted. Record accurately on the
Record Drawings, all changes to the Contract Documents as constructed, such as
Consultant/Engineer-originated changes, Contractor/Subcontractor-originated
changes, Site Instructions, Supplementary Instructions, Addenda, instructions by
correspondence and Jurisdictional Authority approvals. Carefully record location
of concealed elements as required for future maintenance, alteration work, and
building additions. Delete information made obsolete by changes, and accurately
draw or duplicate instructions and indicate all changes listed herein. Refer to
Mechanical and Electrical Specification Divisions for additional requirements.
.3
Clearly mark each of the project Record Drawings "Project Record Copy".
Maintain in good condition. Make the File Copy available at all times for
inspection or use by the Consultant.
.4
Keep the File Record Drawings current and do not record irrelevant information.
Do not permanently conceal any work until the required information has been
recorded.
.5
Submit to the Consultant, the record drawings and 1 bound photocopy of the
Drawing Detail Sheets with the application for Substantial Performance of the
project.
1.26.3
Record Specifications: Submit updated Specifications with the application for Substantial
Performance of the project. Specifications shall incorporate all changes listed in .2 herein.
A copy of the modification(s) shall be electronically cut and pasted on the revised page
where space permits, or a copy of the revision bound into and superimposed on the revised
page.
1.26.4
Affidavits
1.26.5
.1
Submit to the Contractor and Consultant affidavits which are specified in other
Sections of the Specifications.
.2
Submit affidavits in duplicate, and signed by a responsible officer of the certifying
company.
Laboratory and Inspection Reports: Submit to the Contractor and Consultant, in accordance
with the technical Sections of the Specifications.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 01001
Page 01001 - 15
1.26.6
Extended Warranties: Provide the extended warranties specified. These extended
warranties shall commence immediately after the expiration of the standard one-year
warranty included in the Contract. The Contractor shall submit them on a standard Form of
Warranty.
1.26.7
Extra Materials: Provide the Owner with extra materials for future maintenance use, as
specified in the technical Sections of the Specifications. Place in storage location as
directed by Owner.
1.26.8
Engineer's Certification: Where the documents require the seal of a registered Professional
Engineer engaged by the Contractor, the Engineer(s) in question shall be responsible for
providing certification as required by the Ontario Building Code or as required by the
specifications, stating that the construction it designed is in conformity with that design.
Submit one copy of the applicable certification to the Contractor and Consultant before
Substantial Performance.
1.27
Construction Schedule
1.27.1
Submit construction schedule for work of this Contract in accordance with the
requirements of the Construction Manager.
1.27.2
Each trade Contractor shall provide construction schedule for their entire Work. Revise
schedule when it cannot readily be related to the actual stage of construction or when
requested by the Contractor.
1.28
Shop and Interference Drawings
1.28.1
Where specified or where deemed to be required by the Contractor and Consultant, submit
shop drawings to the Contractor in the following manner:
1.28.2
Submit 4 prints of each structural, mechanical and electrical and 3 prints of architectural
shop drawings with title block appearing at lower right-hand corner. Shop drawings shall
be submitted electronically whenever possible and uploaded to the project ftp Site.
1.28.3
The use of photographed Consultant's drawings for shop drawing purposes is not
acceptable.
1.28.4
Prior to submission to the Consultant the Contractor and Trade Contractor shall review all
shop drawings. By this review the Contractor and Trade Contractor represents that they
have determined and verified all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials,
catalogue numbers, and similar data, or will do so, and that they have checked and
coordinated each shop drawing with the requirements of the work and of the Contract
Documents. The Contractor and Trade Contractor's review of each shop drawing shall be
indicated by stamp, date, and signature of a responsible person. The Shop Drawing shall
clearly indicate whether it is for review or for record purposes.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 01001
Page 01001 - 16
1.28.5
The Contractor (and Subcontractor(s) where appropriate), shall mark any information
requested by the fabricator, confirm any matters in doubt, check and sign each
Subcontractor shop drawing, and make any other notations he considers necessary before
submitting to the Contractor and Consultant for review.Drawings requiring several or
extensive changes will be marked "REVISE AND RESUBMIT", otherwise one (1) white
print will be returned marked "REVIEWED" or "REVIEWED WITH COMMENTS" and
shall not be returned to the Consultant. Drawings marked "NOT REVIEWED" are either
not required, or from an unacceptable supplier, or are seriously deficient.
1.28.6
Manufacturer's catalogue cuts will be acceptable, providing they are 8½" x 11" originals,
and they indicate all choices including sizes, colours, model number, options, and other
pertinent data. Only one copy need to be submitted to the Contractor and Consultant,
except for colour sample sheets.
1.29
Shop and Interference Drawings shall include the following:
1.29.1
The name of the project.
1.29.2
Kinds of material and finishes.
1.29.3
Sections, arrangements and details which indicate complete construction, as well as all
interconnections with other work.
1.29.4
Fabrication and erection dimensions, together with quantities and/or locations.
1.29.5
Weight of individual items and equipment which will affect the preparatory work of others
and subsequent reinforcement required to support loads anticipated.
1.29.6
Assumed design loadings, all dimensions of elements and material specifications for all
load-bearing members.
1.29.7
Data verifying that superimposed loads will not affect function, appearance and safety of
work shown on shop drawings, as well as other work interconnected.
1.29.8
Proposed chases, sleeves, cuts, and holes in structural members.
1.29.9
The time that the fabricator considers necessary from the date that he receives the
Contractor's authority to proceed (and shop drawing is returned) until the fabricated work
will be delivered to the site, and for installation, if appropriate.
1.29.10 A 4½" x 3" high block for Contractor and Consultant's review stamp, and another block of
the same size for review stamp of Contractor's Engineer.
1.29.11 The review by the Consultant is for the sole purpose of ascertaining conformance with the
general design concept. The review shall not mean that the Consultant approves the detail
design inherent in the shop drawings, responsibility for which shall remain with the
Contractor submitting same, and such review shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings or of his responsibility for
meeting all requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 01001
Page 01001 - 17
dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the job site, for information that pertains
solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction and installation, and for
coordination of the work of all Subcontractors.
1.29.12 The review of this drawing and/or any notes added to it, does not constitute authorization
to proceed with any work which, in the Contractor's or Supplier's opinion, will involve
extra cost to the Owner.
1.29.13 In the event of any conflict between the Contract Documents and a shop drawing, the
Contract Documents shall govern.
1.30
Interference and Coordination Drawings
1.30.1
The Contractor shall prepare colour-coded interference drawings in order to properly
coordinate the work of all Subcontractors, such as, but not restricted to, plumbing and fire
protection, sheet metal and air conditioning, electrical and building structure.
1.30.2
Bear all costs involved for the preparation of these drawings and the changes necessitated
due to interference discovered by their preparation. Advise all Subcontractors and the
Consultant of any rerouting or relocation required.
1.30.3
If interferences are discovered advise Contractor and Consultant immediately and do not
proceed until adjustments are approved.
1.30.4
Submit copies of drawings for the Contractor and Consultant's records.
1.30.5
Provide a line item in progress draws for interference drawings.
1.31
Review by Consultant
1.31.1
Give the Contractor and Consultant at least 24 hours advance notice of shop fabrication,
field erection and other phases of the Work so as to afford him reasonable opportunity to
inspect the Work for compliance with contract requirements. Failure to meet this
requirement may be cause for the Consultant to classify the Work as defective.
1.31.2
Uncover any Work that has been designated for special tests, inspections or approvals
before such is made, have the inspections or tests satisfactorily completed and make good
such Work.
1.31.3
The Consultant may order any part of the Work to be examined if such Work is suspected
to be not in accordance with the Contract Documents. If, upon examination such Work is
found not in accordance with the Contract Documents, correct such Work and pay the cost
of examination and correction. If such Work is found in accordance with the Contract
Documents, the Owner will pay the cost of examination and replacement.
1.31.4
If the Contractor covers or permits to be covered Work that has been designated for special
tests, inspections or approvals before such is made, uncover such Work, have the
inspections or tests satisfactorily completed and make good such Work.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 01001
Page 01001 - 18
1.32
Inspection and Testing
1.32.1
Refer to the front end specifications Cash Allowance for complete Inspections and Testing.
1.32.2
Trade Sections Requiring Independent Inspection and/or Testing: It is anticipated that the
following trades will require testing, and/or inspection by an independent qualified
inspection/testing company.
.1
Sound test existing concrete parking garage ceiling within area of new facility
.2
Poured-in-place concrete
.3
Structural Steel and Steel Deck
.4
Pre-engineered Steel Stud
.5
Waterproofing
.6
Asphalt Paving
.7
Concrete Paving
.8
Concrete
.9
Masonry
.10
Insulation and Air/Vapour Barriers
.11
Firestopping
.12
Sprayed Fireproofing
.13
Flashings
.14
Windows and Curtain Wall
.15
Signage
.16
Independent Air and Water Balancing.
1.32.3
Prior to the installation of acoustic ceiling tiles and closing in of ceilings, determine an
appropriate date for a site inspection and notify the Consultant and the Owner’s
representative that the work in the ceiling space has been completed and is ready to be
reviewed.
1.32.4
This Section is to be read together with individual trade sections where more specific
requirements for inspection and testing will be identified.
1.32.5
Inspection and testing work may be performed by one or more Independent Inspection and
Testing Companies at the discretion of the Consultant.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 01001
Page 01001 - 19
1.32.6
Do not limit responsibility for ensuring that products and execution of the work meet
Contract requirements, and inspection and testing required to this end, to specified
inspection and testing.
1.32.7
Qualifications of Inspection and Testing Companies:
.1
Testing or inspection company to be approved by Owner/Consultant
.2
Inspection and testing companies to be certified by the Standards Council of
Canada.
.3
Companies engaged for inspection and testing shall provide equipment, methods
of recoding and evaluation, and knowledgeable personnel to conduct tests
precisely as specified in reference standards.
.4
If requested, submit affidavits and copies of certificates of calibration made by an
accredited calibrator to verify that testing equipment was calibrated and its
accuracy ensured within the previous twelve months.
1.33
Non-Compliance With Inspections and Tests
1.33.1
If the initial inspections and tests required to establish compliance with the Contract
Documents indicates non-compliance with the Contract Documents, subsequent testing or
reinspection occasioned by non-compliance shall be performed by the same Inspector(s)
and the cost thereof borne by the Contractor.
1.33.2
Where factual evidence exists that defective workmanship has occurred or that work has
been carried out incorporating defective materials, the Contractor and Consultant may have
tests, inspections or surveys performed, analytical calculation of structural strength made
and the like in order to help determine whether the work must be replaced. Tests,
inspections or surveys carried out under these circumstances will be made at the
Contractor's expense, regardless of their results, which may be such that, in the
Consultant's opinion, the work may be acceptable.
1.33.3
All testing shall be conducted in accordance with the requirements of the Ontario Building
Code, except where this would in the Consultant's opinion cause undue delay or give
results not representative of the rejected material in place. In this case, the tests shall be
conducted in accordance with the standards given by the Consultant.
1.33.4
Materials or workmanship which fail to meet specified requirements may be rejected by the
Consultant whenever found at any time prior to final acceptance of the work regardless of
previous inspection. If rejected, defective materials or work incorporating defective
materials or workmanship shall be promptly removed and replaced or repaired to the
satisfaction of the Consultant, at no expense to the Owner.
1.33.5
Make good other Contractor's work damaged by such removals or replacements promptly.
1.33.6
If in the opinion of the Consultant it is not expedient to correct defective Work or Work not
performed in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may deduct from the
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 01001
Page 01001 - 20
Contract Price the difference in value between the Work performed and that called for by
the Contract Documents, the amount of which shall be determined by the Consultant.
1.34
Quality Control
1.34.1
Obtaining and payment of inspections, tests, or Engineer's stamps required by Code or
Ordinances, or by a plan approval authority and made by a legally constituted authority,
shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, unless otherwise provided by the Contract
Documents.
1.34.2
Be responsible for inspection or testing performed exclusively for own quality control and
convenience, and testing, adjustment and balancing of mechanical and electrical systems,
and pay all costs associated therewith.
1.34.3
Employment of inspection/testing agencies does not relax the responsibility of the
Subcontractors to perform Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.34.4
Mock Ups
.1
Prior to proceeding with the Work, prepare mock-ups as requested in the
individual sections of the specifications and in this section. Include for Work of all
Sections required to provide mock-ups.
.2
Construct in specified locations or as selected by the Consultant.
.3
Prepare mock-ups for Contractor and Consultant's review with reasonable
promptness and in an orderly sequence, so as not to cause any delay in the Work.
.4
Failure to prepare mock-ups in ample time is not considered sufficient reason for
an extension of Contract Time and no claim for extension by reason of such
default will be allowed.
.5
Remove mock-ups at conclusion of Work or when acceptable to Consultant.
.6
Leave mock-up in place as part of finished work if approved by Owner /
Consultant.
1.34.5
Provide test results and mix designs as may be requested.
1.34.6
The cost of tests and mix designs beyond those called for in the Contract Documents or
beyond those required by the law of the Place of Work shall be appraised by the Consultant
and may be authorized as recoverable.
1.34.7
Unless more restrictive/demanding requirements are specified in other Sections, the
following construction tolerances could be accepted:
.1
"plumb and level" - 3 mm in 3 m.
.2
“square" - 10 seconds more or less than 90 degrees.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 01001
.3
"straight" - 3 mm under a 3 m long straight edge.
.4
Tolerances shall not be cumulative.
Page 01001 - 21
1.34.8
Accommodate, by means of expansion and contraction provisions, any movement in the
building envelope assemblies themselves and between the assemblies and the building
structure. Allow for expansion and contraction of components caused by ambient
temperature range, surface temperature variation of components, wind, seismic forces,
structural deflection and racking; without causing misalignment of joints, breakage of
joints and air/vapour barriers, water and air penetration through the assembly, glass
breakage, or other defects detrimental to appearance or performance.
1.34.9
Method of attachment to the structure shall take into account site peculiarities so that site
and air vibrations or normal temperature movements of the building do not loosen, weaken
and/or fracture the connection between building envelope assembly components and the
structure or between the components themselves.
1.35
Testing and Demonstration of Operable Equipment and Systems
1.35.1
Ensure that the Owner's representatives are adequately instructed in all aspects of operation
and maintenance of manual and automated systems and/or equipment, and all tests and
adjustments have been performed to ensure smooth, trouble free operation is achieved, in
compliance with Contract Documents.
1.36
Prevention of Mould, Mildew, and Moisture Damage
1.36.1
Take all precautions necessary to eliminate the possibility of mould and mildew growth,
and damage caused by moisture to cellulose containing materials and various other
materials and finishes, including but not limited to gypsum board, glass fibre and mineral
fibre insulation, lumber, carpet, paint and plywood.
1.36.2
Do not allow the installation of gypsum board or other products that would be affected by
moisture until the chance of wetting is eliminated, and the temperatures are appropriate to
control mould and mildew propagation.
1.36.3
Schedule work in such a manner that materials affected by moisture are protected as soon
as possible.
1.36.4
Immediately remove and replace any materials damaged by moisture, at no cost to the
Owner.
1.37
Contractor's Options
1.37.1
For products specified only by reference standards, select any product meeting standards,
by any manufacturer.
1.37.2
In order to establish standards of quality, the Consultant has in the detailed Specifications,
referred to certain products by name and catalogue number. Where the drawings have
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 01001
Page 01001 - 22
shown specific detailing, dimensions, ratings, characteristics and other performance criteria
the details are based on one specific manufacturer and not combinations of more than one.
1.37.3
For products specified by naming several products or manufacturer's, select any product
and manufacturer named.
1.37.4
For products specified by naming one or more products, but indicating the phrase "or
approved equivalent" after specified product, Contractor must submit request for
substitution, for any product not specifically named. The Consultant may at his discretion
reject products which in his opinion are not equivalent.
1.37.5
For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer and without the
phrase "or approved equivalent", there is no option, and no substitution will be allowed.
1.38
Occupational Health and Safety
1.38.1
The Contractor shall perform the Work in a safe manner and shall comply with all
applicable municipal, provincial, and federal legislation and any other regulation by
authorities having jurisdiction of construction projects. In the event of conflict between any
provisions on the above authorities, the most stringent provision shall apply.
1.38.2
The following requirements and conditions shall be included in all agreements with
Contractors (and sub-Contractors) engaged by or on behalf of the Contractor and Owner.
.1
Contractors acknowledge that they have read and understood the Occupational
Health and Safety Act (OHS Act) and regulations, made under that statute.
.2
The Contractor shall comply with all health and safety requirements established by
the Occupational Health and Safety Act and regulations, the Owner and any
applicable industry standards. The Contractor agrees to assume full responsibility
for the enforcement of same.
.3
The Contractor shall participate in a pre-project meeting to verify its full
understanding of the major contractual requirements and expectations in the area
of health and safety before the start of any Work.
.4
The Contractor shall allow access to the Work site on demand to representatives of
the Owner.
.5
The Owner shall take all action necessary to support the Contractor and Trade
Contractor’s health and safety efforts and to ensure that the Owner owned and
controlled environments in the vicinity of the project are free from hazards.
.6
The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that any breach or breaches of health and
safety requirements, whether by the Contractor or any of its sub-Contractors may
invalidate the Contract.
.7
The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that any damages or fines that may be
assessed against the Owner by reason of a breach or breaches of the OHS Act by
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 01001
Page 01001 - 23
the Contractor or any of its sub-Contractors shall entitle the Owner to set off the
damages so assessed against any monies that the Owner may from time to time
owe the Contractor under this Contract or any other Contract what so ever.
1.38.3
Where hazardous materials, physical agents and/or designated substances are used in the
performance of the required Work, the successful Contractor shall ensure that the
requirements of the Occupational Health and Safety Act and associated regulations are
complied with.
1.38.4
The Contractor shall follow Workplace Hazardous Materials Information Systems
(WHMIS) requirements and ensure all employees are given required training and support.
1.38.5
The Contractor agrees at all times to comply with Occupational Health and Safety
Standards in the Workplace and further agrees to adhere to Health and Safety Standards set
out in applicable statutes and regulations and to comply with written Health and Safety
Policies of the Contractor and Owner .
1.39
Products and Workmanship
1.39.1
Do not substitute materials, equipment or methods different from that shown on Drawings
and specified, without written approval of Consultant. Make application for approval of
substitution to Consultant.
1.39.2
Use only materials, components and equipment which are in production. If so requested
provide a precise model and shop drawings for viewing by Consultant.
1.39.3
Manufacture, pack, ship, deliver and store materials and equipment so that no damage
occurs to structural and functional qualities and finished appearances.
1.39.4
Ensure that materials, while transported, stored, or installed, are not exposed to an
environment which would increase their moisture content beyond the maximum specified,
or in a manner detrimental to their function or appearance, or both.
1.40
Transportation and Handling of Materials
1.40.1
Schedule early deliveries of materials to enable work to be executed without delay. Before
delivery, arrange for receiving at site.
1.40.2
Deliver packaged materials and equipment and store until use, with manufacturer's seals
and labels intact.
1.40.3
Label packaged goods to describe contents, quantities, and other information as specified.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 01001
Page 01001 - 24
1.41
Delivery, Storage and Protection of Materials
1.41.1
Schedule timely deliveries of materials to enable work to be executed without construction
delay. Store all materials until use with all manufacturer’s seals and labels intact.
1.41.2
Store materials on site or in storage sheds with secure protection against all harmful
environmental conditions. Prevent damage, adulterations, staining, and soiling of materials
while stored.
1.41.3
Store manufactured materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.41.4
All damaged materials will be rejected for use and thereupon shall be immediately
removed from site.
1.41.5
Note: DO NOT store any material on roofing or waterproofing which will cause damage to
membrane. This applies to lumber, steel, wood cases, pipes, conduits, ductwork, insulation,
concrete block or any other materials.
1.42
Anchoring Devices, and Accessories
1.42.1
In addition to requirements for fastening devices specified in the technical Sections of the
Specifications, include for all fastenings, inserts, caps, closures, anchors, and accessories
required for execution of work, and be entirely responsible for their installation.
1.42.2
Unless specified otherwise in the technical sections of the Specifications, use metal
fastenings of same material as the metal component they are anchoring, of metal which will
not set up electrolytic action which could cause damage to fastenings or components under
moist conditions. In general, use watertight, non-corrosive or hot-dipped galvanized steel
as exterior anchors with waterproof washers for windows, roofing, sheet metal, and
anchors occurring on or in an exterior wall or slab or interior wet areas such as showers,
janitors, garbage rooms or similar spaces where moisture will be present.
1.42.3
If exposed fastenings and accessories are allowed by the Documents in finished areas, use
fastenings and accessories of same texture, colour and finish as base metal on which they
occur. Keep such exposed fastenings and accessories to a minimum, spaced and laid out
evenly and neatly and cut off to make them as inconspicuous as possible, but still provide
necessary securement.
1.42.4
Install anchoring devices in such a manner as to provide positive, permanent anchorage of
unit to be anchored in position. Space anchors within limits of their capacities. Select all
anchoring devices to have a safety factor of 4 against failure for their design load. Anchors
used at exterior walls shall be selected to resist leaks and prevent water penetration
wherever possible.
1.42.5
Install fastenings of permanent type. Do not install wood plugs.
1.42.6
Fastenings which cause spelling or cracking of material to which anchorage is made are not
permitted.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 01001
Page 01001 - 25
1.42.7
The use of explosive power tools will not be permitted under any circumstances unless
equipped with a device which positively prevents free flight of the stud.
1.43
Manufacturer’s Requirements and Instructions, Workmanship and Qualifications of
Workers
1.43.1
Use competent experienced workers, thoroughly skilled in the trade in which they are
performing work.
1.43.2
Obtain and follow manufacturer's written instructions, directions and specifications prior to
performing the work, and follow them strictly. If instructions are not available, obtain
directions from the manufacturer in writing before proceeding. The proceeding of work
without this direction is the Contractor's responsibility. It is the Contractor's responsibility
to conform to Code requirements in the event that manufacturer's instructions and
directions conflict with the Ontario Building Code. Improper installation or erection of
products, due to failure in complying with manufacturer's requirements will require
removal and re-installation at no cost to Owner.
1.43.3
Be responsible for obtaining up-to-date changes in manufacturer's application procedures.
1.43.4
In the event that products specified have been discontinued advise Consultant.
1.44
Product Upgrades
1.44.1
Where upgraded or newer versions or models, of products, components and systems in this
Specification, become available during the construction, the Contractor shall provide the
Contractor and Consultant with a proposal to change to such upgraded or newer versions or
models. Such proposals shall fully identify the effect on Contract Price, schedule, and
space requirements.
1.45
Final Inspections and Close Out
1.45.1
Arrange for, conduct and document final inspections, close-out and take-over at
Completion of the Contract in accordance with procedures described in OAA/OGCA
TAKE-OVER PROCEDURES, Document No. 100.
1.45.2
Forty-five days prior to Substantial Performance, set up a meeting with Subcontractors and
Suppliers to go over their various disciplines with the Contractor. Prior to Substantial
Performance and as scheduled with the Consultant, provide instructional sessions for
HVAC and refrigeration, for plumbing and drains and for electrical. At this time, one copy
of the approved brochures and operating manuals and video recordings shall be given to
the Owner. Instructional period shall be in as many sessions as required to properly
disseminate information to Owner's technical staff.
1.46
Cleaning Requirements
1.46.1
Standards: Maintain project in accordance with the latest edition of The Occupational
Health and Safety Act.
Project No. 0701-BS
1.46.2
1.46.3
SECTION 01001
Page 01001 - 26
Hazards and Dust Control
.1
Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers, and remove from premises daily.
.2
Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions.
.3
Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances.
Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and antipollution laws:
.1
Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on project site.
.2
Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner in
storm or sanitary drains.
.3
Do not dispose of wastes into streams or waterways.
1.46.4
Obtain from each Subcontractor, instructions which designate proper methods and
materials to be use in final cleaning, and submit such instructions to Contractor.
1.46.5
Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible; do not drop or
throw materials from heights.
1.46.6
Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning
process will not fall on wet, newly-painted surfaces.
1.47
System Demonstrations
1.47.1
Demonstrate operation and maintenance of equipment and systems to Owner's personnel
two weeks prior to date of Substantial Performance.
1.47.2
When specified in individual Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized
representative to demonstrate operation of equipment and systems, instruct Owner's
personnel, and provide written report that demonstration and instructions have been
completed.
1.47.3
Submittals:
1.47.4
.1
Submit schedule of time and date for demonstration of each item of equipment and
each system two weeks prior to designated dates, for Owner's approval.
.2
Submit reports within one week after completion of demonstration, that
demonstration and instructions have been satisfactorily completed.
.3
Give time and date of each demonstration, with a list of persons present.
Prior to demonstrations ensure the following has occurred:
.1
Equipment has been inspected and put into operation.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 01001
Page 01001 - 27
.2
Testing, adjust, and balance has been performed and equipment and systems are
fully operational.
.3
Provide copies of completed operation and maintenance manuals for use in
demonstrations and instructions.
1.47.5
Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, and
maintenance of each item of equipment at agreed upon times, at the designated location.
1.47.6
Instruct personnel in all phases of operation and maintenance using operation and
maintenance manuals as the basis of instruction.
1.47.7
Review contents of manual in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.
1.47.8
Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when the need
for additional data becomes apparent during instructions.
1.47.9
The Contractor shall record all demonstrations and instructions by means of a
camcorder/digital camera. Identify each tape/digital file separately for each function. Hand
tapes/digital files to Owner with printed maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
NOT USED
* * *
END OF SECTION
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
SECTION 01352
GENERAL LEED® REQUIREMENTS
Page 01352 - 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Section includes
1.1.1
Overview of LEED requirements and procedures.
1.2
Related Sections
1.2.1
The Contractor shall assist in achieving the following LEED prerequisites and credits:
Prerequisite / Credit
Related Specification Section(s)
SSp1: Erosion & Sedimentation Control
02370 Erosion & Sedimentation Control
EAp1: Fundamental Building Systems
Commissioning
01910 Commissioning
EAc3: Best Practice Commissioning
01910 Commissioning
MRc2: Construction Waste Management
01355 Waste Management and Disposal
MRc4: Recycled Content
01611 LEED Product Requirements
MRc5: Regional Materials
MRc7: Certified Wood
EQc3: Construction Indoor Air Quality
Management Plan
01359 Indoor Air Quality Management
EQc4: Low-Emitting Materials
EQc5: Indoor Chemical & Pollutant Source
Control
1.3
Definitions
1.3.1
LEED: Leadership in Energy & Environmental Design is a voluntary, consensus-based, marketresponsive set of criteria that evaluate project performance from a whole-building perspective.
1.3.2
CaGBC: Canada Green Building Council is a broad-based inclusive coalition of representatives from
different segments of the design and building industry. The Council works to change industry standards,
develop best design practices and guidelines; advocate for green buildings, and develop educational tools
to support its members in implementing sustainable design and construction practices.
1.4
References
1.4.1
Canada Green Building Council. LEED Green Building Rating System Reference Package: For New
Construction & Major Renovations LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0, December 2004.
1.4.2
Canada Green Building Council. LEED Green Building Rating System Reference Guide Addendum:
LEED Canada for New Construction & Major Renovations Version 1.0, September 2007.
1.5
Objectives
Enermodal Engineering Ltd.
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
SECTION 01352
Page 01352 - 2
1.5.1
Construct a building that uses land, water, energy and material resources appropriately and efficiently
and provides a safe, comfortable and productive indoor environment for building occupants in
accordance with the LEED requirements.
1.5.2
To achieve certification under the LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0 Green Building Rating System (as
amended in September 2007) administered by the Canada Green Building Council by meeting the
requirements of the LEED prerequisites and credits listed in paragraph 1.2 ‘Related Sections’.
.1
No single manufacturer, fabricator, or subcontractor can fulfill the total requirements for LEED
certification for the project. LEED certification requires the cooperation and diligence of all
project participants for a successful application and acceptance for LEED certification.
.2
Failure to provide products or methods of construction contributing towards LEED
prerequisites will result in the Owner achieving a Certification less than that specified or none
at all. The Owner reserves the right to seek compensation where failure to achieve Certification
is a result of direct neglect or misrepresentation of any material or construction method.
1.6
Description of Work
1.6.1
The site superintendent (or other individual designated by the Contractor) shall be responsible for
coordinating all construction activities associated with LEED certification.
1.6.2
LEED construction activities shall include:
1.6.3
.1
Coordinating with subcontractors and ensuring the successful implementation of LEED
strategies, programs and plans
.2
Reporting construction activity progress to the Consultant as it relates to the LEED aspects of
the Project
.3
Supplying the LEED documentation and submittals outlined within this specification and
related sections to the Consultant to demonstrate that LEED requirements have been met
.4
Other duties as detailed in the related Sections listed in paragraph 1.2
The LEED requirements listed in Sections 01355, 01359, 01611, 01710 and 02370 apply to all Sections
and Work for this Project, whether specifically indicated or not.
.1
Compliance with requirements needed to obtain LEED prerequisites and credits will be used as
one criterion to evaluate requests for substitutions or alternates.
1.7
LEED Kick-Off Meeting
1.7.1
Prior to mobilization on-site, the Contractor shall hold a kick-off meeting with the Consultant to review
the LEED requirements. This meeting shall include a review of:
.1
LEED certification and performance objectives
.2
LEED requirements and procedures
.3
LEED documentation and submittals
1.8
LEED Coordination Meeting
1.8.1
Prior to start of construction, the Contractor (in conjunction with the Consultant) shall hold a
coordination meeting with the construction team to explain the LEED requirements to the SubContractors. This meeting shall include a review of:
.1
LEED certification and performance objectives
.2
LEED requirements and procedures
.3
LEED documentation and submittals
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
SECTION 01352
Page 01352 - 3
1.8.2
The Contractor shall ensure that the appropriate Sub-Contractors attend the LEED Coordination Meeting.
If Sub-Contractors are unable to attend this meeting, the Contractor shall make arrangements to host
additional LEED Coordination Meetings to suit.
1.9
Submittals
1.9.1
Photographs shall be provided as specified in the Sections listed in paragraph 1.2. All photos taken for
LEED documentation purposes shall conform to the following requirements:
.1
Resolution: High resolution digital images (1280 x 1024 or higher)
.2
Date Stamp: Standard indicating YYYY-MM-DD
1.9.2
Provide all submittals required in the Sections listed in paragraph 1.2. Submittals shall be presented to
the Consultant for approval.
1.9.3
The Consultant will complete all LEED Letter Templates required to document the successful
completion of the prerequisites and credits listed in paragraph 1.2. The Contractor shall review, sign and
submit these Templates to the Consultant as an accurate indication of the construction performance.
1.9.4
The Contractor shall ensure that all shop drawings, cut-sheets, and other product literature for all
equipment deemed necessary by the Consultant, is provided to the Consultant prior to ordering.
1.9.5
The Contractor shall ensure that all Schedules are submitted complete and on time to the Consultant
throughout the project.
1.9.6
The Owner reserves the right to withhold Progress Payments pending the submission of documentation
or completion of actions required in the Sections listed in paragraph 1.2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1.1
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
1.1
Not Used
END OF SECTION
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 01355
Feb 07, 2014
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
Page 01355 - 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
Section Includes
1.1.1
Overview of waste management and disposal requirements and procedures.
1.2
Related Sections
1.2.1
01352 General LEED® Requirements
1.3
Definitions
1.3.1
Solid Waste: Any waste material (including land-clearing debris) that is sent from the
project site to another location for disposal.
1.3.2
Land-Clearing Debris: Waste materials resulting from land-clearing that include preexisting development materials and plant matter, but do not include soil.
1.3.3
Reused Waste: Waste materials that are sent to a location off-site (e.g. another construction
project or product supplier) where they are used in their original form (i.e. without
additional processing).
1.3.4
Recycled Waste: Waste materials that are sent off-site to a recycling facility where they are
used to displace virgin materials as feedstock for manufacturing processes that create new
products.
1.3.5
Landfill Waste: Waste materials that are sent to a landfill site for disposal.
1.4
References
1.4.1
Ontario. Environmental Protection Act. Ontario Regulation 102/94: Waste Audits and
Waste Reduction Workplans.
1.4.2
Ontario. Ministry of the Environment (MOE). A Guide to Waste Audits and Reduction
Workplans for Construction and Demolition Projects as Required Under Ontario
Regulation 102/94.
1.4.3
Ontario. Environmental Protection Act. Ontario Regulation 103/94: Industrial, Commercial
and Institutional Source Separation Programs.
1.4.4
Ontario. Ministry of the Environment (MOE). A Guide to Source Separation of Recyclable
Materials for Industrial, Commercial and Institutional Sectors and Multi-Unit Residential
Buildings as Required Under Ontario Regulation 103/94.
1.4.5
Canadian Construction Association. Standard Construction Document CCA 27-1997: A
Guide on Construction Environmental Management Planning.
1.4.6
Canadian Construction Association. Standard Construction Document CCA 81-2001: A
Best Practices Guide to Solid Waste Reduction.
1.4.7
Canada. Public Works and Government Services Canada. 2002 National Construction
Renovation and Demolition Non-Hazardous Solid Waste Management Protocol.
1.4.8
Canada Green Building Council. “Materials & Resources Credit 2: Construction Waste
Management”. LEED Green Building Rating System Reference Package: For New
Construction & Major Renovations LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0, December 2004.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 01355
Feb 07, 2014
Page 01355 - 2
1.4.9
Canada Green Building Council. “Materials & Resources Credit 2: Construction Waste
Management”. LEED Green Building Rating System Reference Guide Addendum: LEED
Canada for New Construction & Major Renovations Version 1.0, September 2007.
1.5
Objectives
1.5.1
Minimize the amount of solid waste (including land-clearing debris) generated by
construction, renovation and demolition (CRD) activities.
1.5.2
Of the inevitable solid waste (including land-clearing debris) that is generated by CRD
activities, divert more than 75% from landfill (through reuse and recycling) to achieve
LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0 credits MRc2.1 and MRc2.2 “Construction Waste
Management”.
1.5.3
Comply with all applicable Environmental Protection Act of Ontario regulations relating to
construction waste management including Ontario Regulation 102/94 and Ontario
Regulation 103/94.
1.5.4
Comply with Canadian Construction Association’s “Code of Practice” outlined in Standard
Construction Document CCA 27-1997 to encourage improved waste management
practices.
1.6
Description of Work
1.6.1
The site superintendent (or other person designated by the Contractor) shall be responsible
for all aspects Waste Management and Disposal.
1.6.2
Identify, implement and document measures to achieve the waste management objectives
listed above.
1.6.3
Follow a strategy based on the 3R’s hierarchy: Reduce the generation of waste materials at
the project site, Reuse waste materials on other construction sites (when feasible) and
Recycle waste materials as feedstock for manufacturing processes that create new products.
1.6.4
Waste Management and Disposal activities shall include:
.1
Arranging waste management service agreements with waste haulers and waste
receiving facilities
.2
Supervising on-site waste management activities on a daily basis
.3
Coordinating waste management tasks with subcontractors to ensure timely and
orderly progress of the work
.4
Preparing waste management documentation and submittals to summarize all
shipments of waste materials from the project site
.5
Reporting waste management progress to the Consultant
1.7
LEED KICK-OFF MEETING
1.7.1
Prior to mobilization on-site, the Contractor shall hold a kick-off meeting with the
Consultant to review the Waste Management and Disposal requirements. This meeting
shall include a review of:
.1
Waste Management and Disposal objectives
.2
Waste Management and Disposal requirements and procedures
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 01355
Feb 07, 2014
.3
Page 01355 - 3
Waste Management and Disposal documentation and submittals
1.8
LEED Coordination Meeting
1.8.1
Prior to start of construction, the Contractor (in conjunction with the Consultant) shall hold
a coordination meeting with the construction team to explain the Waste Management and
Disposal requirements to the Sub-Contractors. This meeting shall include a review of:
.1
Waste Management and Disposal objectives
.2
Waste Management and Disposal requirements and procedures
.3
Waste Management and Disposal documentation and submittals
1.9
Submittals
1.9.1
Schedule W1 – Proposed Receiving Facilities
1.9.2
1.9.3
.1
List the proposed receiving facilities for each material identified in paragraph Part
31.1.2.1 in additional to material sent to landfill. Indicate the material(s) that will
be accepted by each facility and whether the material(s) will be reused, recycled
or sent to landfill.
.2
Submit completed schedule to the Consultant within 14 days after site
mobilization.
Schedule W2 - Waste Tracking Worksheet
.1
Obtain waybills, invoices, letters and other documentation that clearly indicates
the receiving facility, end use (reused, recycled or landfill) and quantity of waste
for each shipment of waste generated on the project site. Record each shipment
using the Waste Tracking Worksheet.
.2
Submit an up-to-date copy of the Waste Tracking Worksheet and waybills,
invoices, letters and other documentation to the Consultant on a monthly basis.
Final Waste Diversion Report
.1
Submit a final report to the Consultant (after substantial completion and prior to
demobilization) that contains the final versions of the following:
a. Waste Tracking Worksheet(s)
b. Waybills, invoices, letters and other documentation supporting each shipment
listed in the Waste Tracking Worksheet clearly indicating the types of waste,
quantities of waste, end use of waste and receiving facilities.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
1.1
Not Used
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 01355
Feb 07, 2014
Page 01355 - 4
PART 3 EXECUTION
1.1
Procedures
1.1.1
Waste Reduction
.1
Encourage suppliers and subcontractors to retrieve/retain packaging (e.g. skids,
plastic wrap, etc.) for reuse.
a. Suppliers and sub-contractors must provide a letter stating the item(s) will be
reused and documenting the quantity removed from the site.
1.1.2
.2
Prevent damage of materials due to mishandling, improper storage, and
contamination.
.3
Where possible, use prefabricated assemblies built at a central facility to avoid
waste generation at the site.
Waste Diversion
.1
Contact local salvaging/recycling facilities and arrange for recycling/reuse
services. At a minimum, the proposed facilities must recycle/reuse the following
waste materials that will be generated throughout construction:
a. Land clearing debris
b. Asphalt
c. Concrete / masonry / stone
d. Steel and other metals
e. Wood (see note below)
f.
Gypsum
g. Cardboard
h. Plastic
i.
“Blue Box” waste
Note:
Use of material as landfill cover is not considered as recycling or reuse. Material
used for this purpose will have a negative impact on the LEED Construction
Waste Management credit.
Incineration of wood waste on or off site is not considered as a waste diversion
measure. Material used for this purpose will have a negative impact on the LEED
Construction Waste Management credit. Please note that burning of clean wood
to generate district or industrial process heat and/or electricity is considered
appropriate diversion methodology from the landfill.
Recommended measures for recycling/reusing wood include encouraging
suppliers to reuse wood pallets, sending wood pallets to pallet recycling
companies and converting waste wood into landscaping mulch.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 01355
Feb 07, 2014
Page 01355 - 5
.2
Provide the Consultant with a list of the proposed receiving facilities within 14
days after site mobilization using Schedule W1 – Proposed Receiving Facilities
(as per Part 11.9.1).
.3
Designate a central Waste Collection Area onsite that is dedicated to the
separation and storage of all waste generated during construction.
.4
Provide containers in the Waste Collection Area that are sized to accommodate
the separation and storage of expected waste types and quantities. Provide
separate containers for each of the following material types:
a. Land clearing debris
b. Asphalt
c. Concrete / masonry / stone
d. Steel and other metals
e. Wood
f.
Gypsum
g. Cardboard
h. Plastic
i.
“Blue Box” waste (as per Part 31.1.2.9 )
j.
Mixed waste
k. Other types (as required by salvaging/ recycling facilities)
.5
Clearly indicate the material type being stored in each container using appropriate
signage.
.6
All subcontractors shall use the containers provided in Waste Collection Area.
.7
In the event that a sub-contractor is unable to use these containers, or wishes to
use a waste material on future projects (e.g. rubble for road base), the subcontractor must provide waybills, invoices, letters and other documentation that
clearly indicates the receiving facility, end use (reused, recycled or landfill) and
quantity of waste in each shipment.
.8
Follow the salvaging/recycling facilities’ material acceptance requirements to
ensure materials are properly sorted, grouped, and packaged for collection.
.9
Provide “Blue Box” recycling bins near the construction trailer for recycling
waste generated by site workers and visitors. Waste deposited in these bins shall
include the following, or adhere to the local recycling program:
a. Aluminum food or beverage cans
b. Glass bottles and jars for food or beverage
c. PET bottles for food or beverages
d. Steel food or beverage cans
e. Cardboard and paper products
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 01355
Feb 07, 2014
1.1.3
Page 01355 - 6
Waste Tracking
.1
Coordinate delivery of separated materials to approved salvage or recycling
facilities.
.2
Record all waste shipments using Schedule W2 - Waste Tracking Worksheet as
per Part 11.9.2.
.3
Retain waybills, invoices, letters and other documentation for inclusion in Final
Waste Diversion Report (as per Part 11.9.3).
1.2
Inspections and Maintenance
1.2.1
Conduct daily inspections of containers to check for and remedy cross-contamination.
1.2.2
Promptly transport containers to receiving facilities when containers are full.
1.2.3
Ensure the material type is clearly labeled on each container.
END OF SECTION
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 01355
Feb 07, 2014
Page 01355 - 7
SCHEDULE W1 – PROPOSED RECEIVING FACILITIES
(Submit to the Consultant within 14 days after site mobilization)
Project Name:
Completed By:
Project Location:
Company:
At a minimum, the proposed facilities must recycle/reuse the waste materials identified in paragraph
1.1.2.1 .
Proposed Receiving Facility
Material Type
Name
Wood Formwork
Wood Recycling Inc.
(Waterloo, Ontario)
Material End Use
 Recycled/Reused
 Sent to Landfill
Phone Number
519-743-8697
 Recycled/Reused
 Recycled/Reused
 Recycled/Reused
 Recycled/Reused
 Recycled/Reused
 Recycled/Reused
 Recycled/Reused
 Recycled/Reused
 Recycled/Reused
 Recycled/Reused
 Recycled/Reused
Signature of Authorized Official
Position
Date
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 01355
Feb 07, 2014
Page 01355 - 8
SCHEDULE W2 - WASTE TRACKING WORKSHEET
(Submit most recent copy to the Consultant on a monthly basis)
Project Name:
Completed By:
Project Location:
Company:
Material Type Legend
Land Clearing Debris
Steel and Other Metals
Cardboard
Mixed Waste
Asphalt
Wood
Plastic
Other (specify)
#
Shipment
Date
Material Type
Ex.
2006-09-12
Gypsum
Concrete / Masonry / Stone
Gypsum
“Blue Box” Waste
Amount of Material
(metric tonnes)
Reused or
Landfill
Recycled
4.0
0.0
Receiving
Facility Name
Waybill
Number
Acme Recycling
Inc.
05-1234
I hereby certify that the information provided is complete and correct:
Position
Date
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
Section 01359
Indoor Air Quality Management
Page 1 of 22
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.02
Overview of indoor air quality management (including product/material
selection) requirements and procedures
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
15855 Filters
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A.
Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs): Organic chemicals that produce vapors
readily at room temperature and normal atmospheric pressure (e.g. gasoline,
solvents, etc.). VOCs react with sunlight and nitrogen to form ground-level
ozone, a chemical that has detrimental effect on human health, agricultural
crops, forests, soil, groundwater and ecosystems.
B.
Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI) Green Label: a program established by the
national trade association representing the carpet and rug industry to identify
carpet products that have been tested by an independent laboratory and have
met the criteria for low VOC emissions.
C.
Urea-Formaldehyde (UF): A combination of urea and formaldehyde the readily
decomposes at room temperature. It is found in some glues/resins used to
manufacture furniture, composite woods (e.g. particle board), agrifiber
products and laminated assemblies. UF has detrimental effect on human
health and may include symptoms such as eye, nose, and throat irritation,
wheezing and coughing, fatigue, skin rash and severe allergic reaction.
D.
Agrifiber: recovered agricultural waste fiber, from sources including but not
limited to cereal straw, sugarcane bagasse, sunflower husk, walnut shells,
coconut husks and agricultural prunings, that are processed and mixed with
resins to produce products with characteristics similar to those derived from
wood fiber.
1.04
REFERENCES
A.
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association (SMACNA).
IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction. First Edition, 1995
B.
ASHRAE. ANSI/ASHRAE 52.2-1999: Method of Testing General Ventilation AirCleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size.
C.
EPA. EPA Protocol for Environmental Requirements, Testing for Indoor Air
Quality Baseline IAQ.
D.
State of California. South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD)
Rules 1168. As amended June 9, 2006.
E.
State of California. South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD)
Rules 1113. As amended January 1, 2006.
F.
Green Seal. Paints (GS-11). January 1997. May 20, 1993.
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
Section 01359
Page 2 of 22
G.
Green Seal. Anti-Corrosive Paints (GC-03). January 7, 1997.
H.
Canada Green Building Council. “Indoor Environmental Quality Credit 3:
Construction IAQ Management Plan and Credit 4: Low-Emitting Materials”.
LEED Green Building Rating System Reference Package: For New Construction
& Major Renovations LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0, December 2004.
I.
Canada Green Building Council. “Indoor Environmental Quality Credit 3:
Construction IAQ Management Plan and Credit 4: Low-Emitting Materials”.
LEED Green Building Rating System Reference Guide Addendum: LEED Canada
for New Construction & Major Renovations Version 1.0, September 2007.
1.05
OBJECTIVES
A.
Meet or exceed the recommended Design Approaches of the Sheet Metal and
Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) IAQ Guidelines for
Occupied Buildings under Construction, 1995, Chapter 3.
B.
Protect construction workers and future building occupants from indoor air
quality problems resulting from construction activities and building materials.
C.
Reduce the production and circulation of pollutants during construction.
D.
Protect equipment and absorptive materials stored and installed on-site from
moisture, dust and dirt accumulation during construction.
E.
Prepare the building for occupancy following construction and prior to
occupancy.
1.06
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The site superintendent (or other person designated by the Contractor) shall
be responsible for all aspects of LEED coordination (during construction)
related to indoor air quality management.
B.
Indoor air quality management activities shall include:
1.
Identifying, implementing and documenting measures to achieve the
indoor air quality management objectives
2.
Supervising on-site indoor air quality management activities on a daily
basis
3.
Coordinating indoor air quality management tasks with subcontractors to
ensure timely and orderly progress of the work
4.
Conducting indoor air quality management inspections and making
necessary repairs
5.
Maintaining an indoor air quality inspection log to document observations,
deficiencies and corrective actions
6.
Preparing indoor air quality management documentation and submittals as
detailed herein
7.
Selecting products/materials that meet the requirements specified herein
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
1.07
Section 01359
Page 3 of 22
8.
Providing product and material documentation and submittals to the
Consultant as detailed herein prior to ordering a product or material
9.
Reporting indoor air quality management progress to the Consultant
A.
1.08
Prior to mobilization on-site, the Contractor shall hold a kick-off meeting with
the Consultant to review indoor air quality management requirements. This
meeting shall include a review of:
1.
Indoor air quality management objectives
2.
Indoor air quality management requirements and procedures
3.
Indoor air quality management documentation and submittals
LEED COORDINATION MEETING
A.
1.09
Prior to start of construction, the Contractor (in conjunction with the
Consultant) shall hold a coordination meeting with the construction team to
explain the indoor air quality management requirements to the SubContractors. This meeting shall include a review of:
1.
Indoor air quality management objectives
2.
Indoor air quality management requirements and procedures
3.
Indoor air quality management documentation and submittals
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
Schedule Q1 - Product VOC Identification
1.
Complete schedule and collect supporting documentation (MSDSs, product
data sheets, letter from manufacturers, etc.) to document VOC emission
rates for all adhesives, sealants, paints and coatings that are applied
onsite and fall within the building weather barrier.
2.
Complete schedule to document the quantities of all adhesives, sealants,
paints and coatings that are applied onsite and fall within the building
weather barrier.
3.
Submit completed schedules and supporting product literature to the
Consultant for review at least 14 days prior to ordering.
Schedule Q2 - CRI Green Label Carpet
1.
Complete schedule and collect supporting documentation (letters from
manufacturers, product literature, etc.) for all carpet products used in the
building.
2.
Schedule Q3 - No-Added Urea-Formaldehyde
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
D.
Section 01359
Page 4 of 22
1.
manufacturers, product literature, etc.) for all composite wood and
agrifibre products used in the building.
2.
Schedule Q4 – IAQ Management Inspection Log
1.
Complete the log on a weekly basis. The log shall commence when the
building is enclosed and carry through to building turnover.
2.
The inspection log shall be completed for each weekly inspection and must
document:
a. Indoor air quality management measures implemented onsite
b. Deficiencies related to those measures and,
c. Corrective actions taken to remedy the deficiencies
E.
3.
Each deficiency must be initialed and each log signed after all corrective
measures have been completed and documented.
4.
Submit an up-to-date copy of the IAQ Management Inspection Log to the
Consultant on a monthly basis.
5.
Submit a compilation of the completed logs to the Consultant after
construction and prior to Contractor demobilization.
Schedule Q5 - Photo Documentation Checklist
1.
Provide photographs as specified in the checklist.
2.
Photographs must be taken on three different occasions during
construction to prove continuous compliance.
3.
Photographs must be accompanied by the date taken and a description of
the indoor air quality management measure depicted.
4.
Coordinate with photo requirements of General LEED Requirements 01352
1.09A
5.
Submit the completed checklist and accompanying photos to the
Consultant after construction and prior to Contractor demobilization.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
ADHESIVES AND SEALANTS
A.
All adhesives and sealants that are applied onsite and fall inside the building
weatherproofing system must have a VOC content less than the limits of the
State of California’s South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD)
Rule 1168.
1.
The VOC content limits of SCAQMD Rule 1168 are as follows:
Note: The VOC content limits listed below may be amended from time to time
by their governing bodies; Green Seal and the State of California. In the event
that the VOC limits listed in the tables below are higher than the VOC limits in
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
Section 01359
Page 5 of 22
effect at the date of application for building permit, the VOC limits in effect at
the date of application for building permit shall but used.
Architectural Adhesives
Category
VOC Limit
(grams/litre)
Indoor Carpet Adhesive
50
Carpet Pad Adhesive
50
Wood Flooring Adhesive
100
Rubber Floor Adhesive
60
Subfloor Adhesive
50
Ceramic Tile Adhesive
65
VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesive
50
Drywall and Panel Adhesive
50
Cove Base Adhesive
50
Multipurpose Construction Adhesive
70
Structural Glazing Adhesive
100
Single Ply Roof Membrane Adhesive
250
Specialty Adhesives
Category
VOC Limit
(grams/litre)
PVC Welding
510
CPVC Welding
490
ABS Welding
325
Plastic Cement Welding Adhesive
250
Adhesive Primer for Plastic
550
Contact Adhesive
80
Special Purpose Contact Adhesive
250
Adhesive for Traffic Marking Tape
150
Structural Wood Member Adhesive
140
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
Section 01359
Page 6 of 22
Substrate Specific Adhesives
VOC Limit
Category
(grams/litre)
Metal to Metal Adhesive
30
Plastic Foam Adhesive
50
Porous Material (except wood) Adhesive
50
Wood Adhesive
30
Fibreglass Adhesive
80
Sealants
Category
VOC Limit
(grams/litre)
Architectural Sealant
250
Non-membrane Roof Sealant
300
Roadway Sealant
250
Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealant
450
Other Sealant
420
Sealant Primers
Category
B.
2.02
VOC Limit
(grams/litre)
Architectural, Non-Porous Sealant Primer
250
Architectural, Porous Sealant Primer
775
Modified Bituminous Sealant Primer
500
Other Sealant Primer
750
Submit supporting documentation as per 1.09A for all adhesives and sealants
that are applied onsite and fall within the building weather barrier.
PAINTS AND COATINGS
A.
All paints and coatings that are applied onsite and fall within the building
weather barrier must have a VOC content less than the limits of Green Seal
Standards GS-11 and GC-03 and the State of California’s South Coast Air
Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113.
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
1.
Section 01359
Page 7 of 22
The VOC content limits of Green Seal Standard GS-11 are as follows:
Paints
VOC Limit
Category
(grams/litre)
Interior Coatings, Non-Flat
150
Interior Coatings, Flat
2.
50
The VOC content limits of Green Seal Standard GC-03 are as follows:
Anti-Corrosive Paints
VOC Limit
Category
(grams/litre)
Anti-Corrosive Paint, Gloss
250
Anti-Corrosive Paint, Semi-Gloss
250
Anti-Corrosive Paint, Flat
250
3.
The VOC content limits of SCAQMD Rule 1113 are as follows:
Coatings
Category
VOC Limit
(grams/litre)
Bond Breaker
350
Clear Wood Finish, Varnish
275
Clear Wood Finish, Sanding Sealer
275
Clear Wood Finish, Lacquer
275
Clear Brushing Lacquer
275
Concrete-Curing Compound
100
Dry-Fog
150
Flat Coating
100
Floor Coating
50
Graphic Arts (sign) Coating
500
Industrial Maintenance Coating
100
High Temperature Industrial Maintenance Coating
420
Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Coating
100
Japans/Faux Finishing Coating
350
Magnesite Cement Coating
450
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
Section 01359
Mastic Coating
300
Metallic Pigmented Coating
500
Multi-Colour Coating
250
Non-Flat Coating
50
Pigmented Lacquer
275
Pre-Treatment Wash Primers
420
Primer, Sealer and Undercoating
100
Quick-Dry Enamel
50
Quick-Dry Primer, Sealer and Undercoating
100
Recycled Coating
250
Roof Coating
B.
Page 8 of 22
50
Roof Coating, Aluminum
100
Roof Primer, Bituminous
350
Rust Preventative Coating
100
Shellac, Clear
730
Shellac, Pigmented
550
Specialty Primer
100
Stains
100
Stains, Interior
250
Swimming Pool Coating, Repair
340
Swimming Pool Coating, Other
340
Traffic Coating
100
Waterproofing Sealer
100
Waterproofing Concrete/Masonry Sealer
100
Wood Preservative, Below-Ground
350
Wood Preservative, Other
350
Low-Solids Coating
120
Submit supporting documentation as per 1.09A for all paints and coatings that
are applied onsite and fall within the building weather barrier.
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
2.03
Section 01359
Page 9 of 22
CARPET
A.
All carpet systems must meet or exceed the requirements of the Carpet and
Rug Institute’s (CRI) Green Label Indoor Air Quality Test Program.
B.
The maximum allowable carpet emissions of the CRI Green Label program are
as follows:
1.
Carpet Criteria
Maximum Emission Factor (measured in mg/m²·h)
Total Volatile Organic Compounds
0.50
4-PC (4-Phenylcyclohexene)
0.05
Formaldehyde (to prove that none is used)
0.05
Styrene
0.40
2.
Cushion Criteria
1.00
BHT (butylated hydroxytoluene)
0.30
Formaldehyde
0.05
4-PC (4-Phenylcyclohexene)
0.05
3.
Adhesive Criteria
C.
2.04
10.00
Formaldehyde
0.05
2-Ethyl-1-Hexanol
3.00
Submit supporting documentation as per 1.09B for all carpet systems used in
the building.
COMPOSITE WOOD AND AGRIFIBRE
A.
All composite wood and/or agrifibre products (including core materials) used in
the building must not contain added urea-formaldehyde.
B.
Composite wood products used as or to construct products listed in Section
01611, Paragraph 2.03 must also be FSC Certified.
C.
Adhesives used to fabricate laminated assemblies used in the building that
contain composite wood and/or agrifibre products must not contain added
urea-formaldehyde.
D.
The requirements of paragraph A and C apply to all products/materials used in
the building regardless of whether they are manufactured on or off site.
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
E.
2.05
Section 01359
Page 10 of 22
Submit supporting documentation as per 1.09C for all composite wood and
agrifibre products used in the building.
FILTRATION MEDIA REQUIREMENTS
A.
Air filter MERV (minimum efficiency reporting value) ratings shall be
determined by ASHRAE 52.2-1999.
B.
Air handling equipment not used during construction:
C.
1.
Filters in 100% outdoor air and recirculating systems with flow rates more
than 283 L/s (600 cfm) must have a MERV-13 rating.
2.
Filters in 100% outdoor air and recirculating systems with flow rates less
than 283 L/s (600 cfm) must have the highest supply air filtration level
commercially available for the specific equipment.
3.
Fan units that provide no outdoor air or serve only a single zone are
exempt from filtration requirements above.
Air handling equipment used during construction:
1.
Filters in 100% outdoor air and recirculating systems with flow rates more
than 283 L/s (600 cfm) must have a MERV-13 rating.
2.
Filters in 100% outdoor air and recirculating systems with flow rates less
than 283 L/s (600 cfm) must have the highest supply air filtration level
commercially available for the specific equipment.
3.
Fan units that provide no outdoor air or serve only a single zone are
exempt from filtration requirements above.
4.
Install new filters with a MERV = 8 (or higher) at all return/exhaust
grilles/inlets before any HVAC system is operated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
POLLUTANT SOURCE IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify potential sources of indoor air pollutants on the construction site.
1.
Any construction activity or material that produces odour and/or dust is
considered a source of air pollutants. Pollutant sources include, but are
not limited to:
a. Materials that produce detectable odour:
paints
coatings
grouts
stains
adhesives
epoxy flooring
sealants
caulking
solvents
pesticides
fuels
cleaning products
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
Section 01359
Page 11 of 22
b. Materials that create dust:
concrete products
drywall
wood products
acoustic ceiling tile
insulation
ceramic tile
c. Equipment that emit products of combustion or create odour and/or
dust:
generators
compressors
cutting tools/saws
torches/welders
vehicles
portable heaters
d. Construction activities that disrupt pollutants:
demolition
repair
renovation
standing water
tobacco smoke
e. Other:
exterior site work
3.02
MINIMIZE POLLUTANTS
A.
Minimize pollutants generated inside the building from the sources identified
under article 3.01 using the following measures:
1.
Prohibiting smoking inside the building at all times during construction
2.
Fuelling up equipment outside the building
3.
Storing gasoline or solvents outside the building
4.
Restricting outdoor vehicular/equipment traffic and operation where
emissions can enter the building
5.
Reducing on-site emissions by using equipment that burns
propane/natural gas or is powered by electricity
6.
Exhausting pollutant sources directly outside using temporary or
permanent ventilation equipment. Where exhaust is not feasible, locally
re-circulate air through a portable air cleaner.
7.
Collecting and bagging sawdust from woodworking tools
8.
Covering and/or sealing all indoor sources of odour and dust
9.
Using painting techniques that minimize odour (e.g roller instead of
spraying)
10. Using cleaning practices that minimize dust (e.g. vacuum instead of
sweeping)
11. Using cleaning products that minimize pollution, fumes, VOC’s, etc.
12. Prohibiting the burning of garbage
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
3.03
Section 01359
Page 12 of 22
POLLUTANT CONTAINMENT MEASURES
A.
Prevent the movement of pollutants from the sources identified under article
3.01 to other areas in the building using the following measures:
1.
When possible, perform pollutant generating activities outside the
building.
2.
Move equipment, work and other pollutant sources to locations where they
will have the minimum impact on indoor air quality.
3.
Setup small, contained, designated work areas to contain pollutants:
a. Avoid open areas and areas with high drafts
b. Erect dust curtains and barriers
c. Depressurize areas using temporary or permanent ventilation
equipment
3.04
4.
Use portable fans to exhaust pollutants (e.g. gas engine exhaust) to the
exterior through windows, doors, etc. Ensure that adjacent windows,
doors, etc. will not allow pollutants to re-enter the building.
5.
Close windows and doors adjacent to pollutant sources (e.g. dust, vehicle
emissions, etc.) outside of the building. If windows and doors have not
been installed, temporarily seal exterior openings with plastic, wood, etc.
6.
Pressurize occupied or completed areas of the building using temporary or
permanent ventilation equipment.
HOUSEKEEPING MEASURES
A.
Prevent the accumulation of moisture, dust and dirt in the building from the
sources identified under article 3.01 using the following measures:
1.
Frequently cleaning interior surfaces to minimize dust and dirt
accumulation by:
a. Dusting with damp rags
b. Wet mopping
c. Sweeping using wetting agents and sweeping compounds
d. Vacuuming with equipment that contains HEPA filtration and/or a wet
scrubber
Note: Localized cleaning should occur immediately after a construction
activity is completed and/or at the end of each day. A full building cleanup must be performed at least once a week.
2.
Close exterior windows and doors or create temporary enclosures using
plastic or wood to prevent moisture accumulation indoors.
3.
Immediately remove any water accumulated indoors to protect interior
surfaces and materials.
4.
Cover, seal and protect materials stored and installed on-site from
moisture, dust and dirt accumulation.
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
3.05
Section 01359
Page 13 of 22
5.
Elevate materials stored on-site off the ground to protect from moisture
and dirt accumulation.
6.
Do not install materials with evidence of moisture damage or excessive
moisture accumulation.
7.
If necessary, use ventilation/dehumidification to control humidity levels
within the building.
8.
Promptly clean all spills (fuels, lubricants, paints, adhesives, etc.).
9.
Clean or remove excess application of solvent-containing products.
HVAC PROTECTION MEASURES
A.
B.
During/Before Installation
1.
Cover (with plastic) and elevate (off ground) all ductwork, fittings,
insulation, acoustic lining and equipment stored on site during
construction.
2.
Seal all supply, return and exhaust openings as well as all temporary
ductwork openings not under immediate work (e.g. open ends in ductwork
runs) with plastic. Openings must be sealed immediately after installation
in areas that will no longer be under work.
3.
Close/cover all hatches and access doors in HVAC equipment that will not
be under work.
4.
Seal all HVAC equipment openings (e.g. inlets/outlets of air handlers,
fans, VAV boxes, etc.) with plastic until ductwork is connected.
5.
Do not use mechanical rooms to store or collect construction waste
materials.
6.
Install ceiling tiles and seal all openings into the plenum with plastic prior
to final cleaning.
After Installation (select Option 1 or Option 2 for each HVAC system)
1.
Do not use mechanical rooms to store or collect construction waste
materials.
2.
Option 1: HVAC Equipment Not Used During Construction (Recommended)
a. Do not operate any permanent HVAC equipment or systems during
construction.
b. Seal all openings in HVAC systems, ductwork and plenums as
described in paragraph 3.05A above.
c. If an HVAC system protection measures are not implemented, or if the
system is operated during construction, the Contractor must provide
duct cleaning services, plus all necessary access doors, at no extra
cost to the contract.
d. After all construction and final cleaning work is complete the
Contractor shall:
1)
Remove all HVAC protection measures
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
3.
Section 01359
Page 14 of 22
2)
Install new filters in all air handling equipment as per paragraph
2.05
3)
Start-up systems
4)
Prepare systems for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Contractor
and Commissioning Agent.
Option 2: HVAC Equipment Used During Construction
a. Install new filters in all air handling equipment as per paragraph 2.05
before any HVAC system is operated. Provide a duct-mounted filter
(external to equipment) if necessary.
b. Install new filters with a MERV = 8 (or higher) as per 2.05A at all
return/exhaust grilles/inlets before any HVAC system is operated.
c. Temporarily shut down the return/exhaust side of HVAC systems
during heavy construction/demolition.
d. Permanently close off the return/exhaust side of HVAC systems in
areas with high dust levels. Cover duct openings with plastic in these
areas.
e. If an HVAC system is operated without the above protection measures
in place, the Contractor must provide duct cleaning services, plus all
necessary access doors, at no extra cost to the contract.
f.
3.06
After all construction and final cleaning work is complete the
Contractor shall:
1)
Remove all temporary filters installed on return all grilles.
2)
Install new filters in all air handling equipment as per paragraph
2.05
3)
Prepare systems for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Contractor
and Commissioning Agent.
INDOOR AIR QUALITY PRIOR TO OCCUPANCY
One of the following options (A. Building Flush-Out Prior to Occupancy, B.
Building Flush-Out Overlapping with Occupancy, C. IAQ Testing Prior to
Occupancy) shall be completed prior to Occupancy.
1.
After all construction, final cleaning and Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
work is complete, and prior to building occupancy, conduct a building
flush-out by:
a. Supplying a total air volume of 4,300 m3 of outdoor air per m2 (or
14,100 ft3 per ft2) of floor area,
b. Maintaining a temperature of at least 16oC (60oF) and,
c. Where mechanical cooling is operated, maintaining a relative humidity
no higher than 60%.
Note: The estimated time required to carry-out the building flush-out is
14-21 days.
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
B.
Section 01359
Page 15 of 22
2.
Perform all corrective work related to general deficiencies, Testing,
Adjusting and Balancing, and Commissioning prior to commencing the
building flush-out.
3.
Install new filters in all air handling equipment as per paragraph 2.05 prior
to commencing the building flush-out.
4.
Replace all filtration media in air handling equipment with new filters as
per paragraph 2.05 after the building flush-out and immediately prior to
occupancy. Filtration media is to be replaced at the expense of the
Contractor.
Building Flush-Out Overlapping with Occupancy
1.
After all construction, final cleaning and Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
work is complete, and prior to building occupancy, conduct a building
flush-out by:
a. Supplying a total air volume of 1,075 m3 of outdoor air per m2 (or
3,530 ft3 per ft2) of floor area,
b. Maintaining a temperature of at least 16oC (60oF) and,
c. Where mechanical cooling is operated, maintaining a relative humidity
no higher than 60%.
Note: The time required to carry-out the building flush-out is to be
confirmed by the Consultant.
2.
After the building is occupied, continue the building flush-out by:
a. Supplying outside air at a minimum rate of 0.76 L/s/m2 (0.15 cfm/ft2)
for at least 3 hours prior to each time the building is occupied,
b. Supplying outside air at the greater of 0.76 L/s/m2 (0.15 cfm/ft2) or
the design minimum outside air supply during times when the building
is occupied and,
c. Continuing the flush-out process described in the subparagraphs 1 and
2 until 3,225 m3 of outdoor air per m2 (or 10,570 ft3 per ft2) has been
supplied to the building.
3.
Perform all corrective work related to general deficiencies, Testing,
Adjusting and Balancing, and Commissioning prior to commencing the
building flush-out.
4.
Install new filters in all air handling equipment as per paragraph 2.05 prior
to commencing the building flush-out.
5.
Replace all filtration media in air handling equipment with new filters as
per paragraph 2.05 after the building flush-out and immediately prior to
occupancy. Filtration media is to be replaced at the expense of the
Contractor.
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
C.
Section 01359
Page 16 of 22
IAQ Testing Prior to Occupancy
1.
Indoor air quality testing will be carried out by and at the expense of the
Contractor.
2.
The Contractor shall allow 3 days after all construction and final cleaning
work is complete and prior to building occupancy for the Consultant to
conduct indoor air quality testing.
3.
The Contractor shall perform all corrective work related to general
deficiencies, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing, and Commissioning prior to
indoor air quality testing.
4.
In order for IAQ Testing to be deemed complete, the test results must
demonstrate that the air samples taken at all required locations are not
above the limits established in the table below:
Contaminant
Maximum Concentration
Particulate Matter (PM10)
50 ug/m3
Formaldehyde
50 parts per billion
500 ug/m3
Carbon Monoxide
9 PPM and no greater than 2 PPM above outdoors
4-Pheycyclohexene (4-PC)*
6.5 ug/m3
* Required only if carpets with Styrene Butadiene (SB) latex backing material are installed
3.07
5.
All testing shall be carried out using the testing protocols consistent with
the United States Environmental Protection Agency “Compendium of
Methods of the Determination of Air Pollutants in Indoor Air”.
6.
All testing shall be carried out according to the requirements published on
pages 371 and 372 of the LEED Green Building Rating System Reference
Package: For New Construction & Major Renovations LEED Canada-NC
Version 1.0, December 2004.
7.
The number of test locations required shall be determined according to the
requirements published on pages 371 and 372 of the LEED Green Building
Rating System Reference Package: For New Construction & Major
Renovations LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0, December 2004.
8.
In the event that the test results exceed the limits established in the table
above, the Contractor is responsible for taking remedial actions as
recommended by the Consultant or testing agent and for scheduling and
retesting for any contaminant concentrations that were exceeded. This
process shall be repeated until all requirements have been met. All
addition work and re-testing is to be carried out at the expense of the
Contractor.
9.
Upon successful completion of IAQ testing, the Contractor must provide
the Consultant with a copy of the IAQ testing results indicating the
locations tested and the contaminant concentration readings at each
location.
SCHEDULING
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
Section 01359
Page 17 of 22
A.
Schedule construction activities to minimize the amount of VOC’s, odours and
fumes absorbed by porous materials (e.g. ceiling tiles, carpet, etc.).
B.
Complete applications of wet and odorous materials such as paints, sealants,
and coatings before installing absorbent “sink” materials such as ceiling tiles,
carpets, and fabric-covered furnishings.
C.
Allow for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing to be carried out following
construction and before occupancy (refer to HVAC Protection Measures).
D.
Allow for corrective work related to general deficiencies, Testing, Adjusting
and Balancing, and Commissioning to be carried out following construction and
before occupancy.
3.08
INSPECTIONS AND MAINTENANCE
A.
B.
3.09
The Contractor shall inspect all indoor air quality management measures and
remedy any deficiencies on a weekly basis.
1.
Inspections shall be recorded in the IAQ Management Inspection Log (see
article 1.09D) and shall denote the measures implemented at the time of
inspection, any deficiencies as well as corrective actions taken.
2.
Provide photos as specified by article 1.09E at various occasions during
construction to prove continuous compliance.
All Pollutant Containment, Housekeeping and HVAC protection measures will
be reviewed by the Consultant during each site visit.
1.
All deficiencies identified by the Consultant must be remedied and
documented in the IAQ Management Inspection Log within 48 hours of
notification.
2.
The Contractor shall clean or replace any equipment or materials that is
incorrectly stored or improperly protected at no extra cost to the contract.
REMOVAL OF PROTECTION MEASURES
A.
All products/materials installed as a part of indoor air quality management
measures shall be removed prior to building turnover. Any remedial work
required as a result of removing the measures is the responsibility of the
Contractor.
END OF SECTION
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
Section 01359
Page 18 of 22
SCHEDULE Q1 - PRODUCT VOC IDENTIFICATION
(Submit to Consultant 14 days prior to ordering product/material)
Project Name:
Completed By:
Project Location:
Company:
For the purposes of LEED documentation, I am pleased to certify the following information:
(Complete the following table for adhesives, sealants, paints and coatings
that are applied onsite and that fall within the building weather barrier)
Product &
Manufacturer
Ex.
Duct Master
by Caulk
Canada
Description
Mastic Duct
Sealant
VOC
Content
Quantity
Used
(grams/litre)
(litres)
35
50
Attached
Supporting
Documentation
 MSDS
 Product Data Sheet
 Manufacturer Letter
 MSDS
 MSDS
 MSDS
 MSDS
 MSDS
I hereby certify that the information provided above is complete and correct:
Position
Date
Volatile Organic Compound (VOC): Organic chemicals that produce vapors readily at room temperature and
normal atmospheric pressure (e.g. gasoline, solvents, etc.). VOCs react with sunlight and nitrogen to form groundlevel ozone, a chemical that has detrimental effect on human health, agricultural crops, forests, soil, groundwater
and ecosystems.
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
Section 01359
Page 19 of 22
SCHEDULE Q2 - CRI GREEN LABEL CARPET
(Submit to Consultant 14 days prior to ordering carpet)
Project Name:
Completed By:
Project Location:
Company:
For the purposes of LEED documentation, I am pleased to certify that the following carpet
products meet or exceed the CRI Green Label requirements:
Product
Ex.
Greenline
Modular Tile
Manufacturer
"Green Label"
Product
Identification
Number
Attached
Supporting
Documentation
Canada Carpet Ltd.
13795278
 Product Literature
 Manufacturer Letter
Position
Date
Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI) Green Label: a program established by the national trade association
representing the carpet and rug industry to identify carpet products that have been tested by an independent
laboratory and have met the criteria for low VOC emissions. (www.carpet-rug.org)
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
Section 01359
Page 20 of 22
SCHEDULE Q3 - NO-ADDED UREA-FORMALDEHYDE
Project Name:
Completed By:
Project Location:
Company:
For the purposes of LEED documentation, I am pleased to certify that the following
composite wood and agrifibre products do not contain added urea-formaldehyde:
Product
Ex.
EnviroBoard
Attached
Supporting
Documentation
Manufacturer
EcoForest Canada
 MSDS
 MSDS
 MSDS
 MSDS
 MSDS
 MSDS
Position
Date
Urea-Formaldehyde (UF): A combination of urea and formaldehyde the readily decomposes at room
temperature. It is found in some glues/resins used to manufacture furniture, composite woods (e.g. particle
board), agrifiber products and laminated assemblies. UF has detrimental effect on human health and may include
symptoms such as eye, nose, and throat irritation, wheezing and coughing, fatigue, skin rash and severe allergic
reaction.
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
Section 01359
Page 21 of 22
SCHEDULE Q4 – IAQ MANAGEMENT INSPECTION LOG
(Complete Weekly. Submit most recent copy to the Consultant on a monthly basis)
Project Name:
Completed By:
Project Location:
Company:
IAQ Management Measures
Date
Ex.
Currently
Implemented
Sept
17/06
Dust curtain and
HVAC pressurization
protecting finished
offices on 2nd floor.
Corrective Action
Taken
Deficiencies
Standing water
present adjacent to
sprinkler room in
basement
Water removed.
Adjacent materials
were not damaged
Initials
G.L.
Position
Date
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
Section 01359
Page 22 of 22
SCHEDULE Q5 - PHOTO DOCUMENTATION CHECKLIST
(Submit with photos to Consultant after construction and prior to demobilization)
Project Name:
Completed By:
Project Location:
Company:
Indoor Air Quality Management Measure
Date of Photo
#1
#2
#3
N/A
Tobacco smoke prohibited inside the building (signage)

Gasoline and solvents stored outside the building

Outdoor equipment restricted around building (signage)

Electric, propane or natural gas powered equipment

Pollutant sources exhausted to outside

Portable air cleaner used to filter air in work areas

Sawdust from wood working tools collected and bagged

Indoor sources of odour and dust covered/sealed

Painting techniques used to minimize odour

Temporary dust curtains and barriers

Designated cutting and work areas

Materials covered, sealed and protected

Materials stored elevated off the ground

Building sealed from the exterior environment

Wetting agents, sweeping compounds, wet rags/mops

Vacuuming with HEPA filtration and/or wet scrubber

Ventilation/dehumidification to remove moisture

Protecting stored ductwork, lining, insulation & fittings

Scheduled construction activities

Openings in ducts sealed w/ plastic

Openings & hatches in HVAC equip. sealed w/ plastic

Supply, return and exhaust openings sealed w/ plastic

Ceiling plenum openings sealed w/ plastic

Ceiling tiles installed prior to final cleaning

Position
Date
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
Section 01611
LEED® Product Requirements
Page 1 of 11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.02
Overview of product/material selection requirements and procedures.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
01352 General LEED Requirements
B.
Division 2 – Sitework
C.
Division 3 – Concrete
D.
Division 4 – Masonry
E.
Division 5 – Steel and Metals
F.
Division 6 – Carpentry
G.
Division 7 – Thermal and Moisture Protection
H.
Division 8 – Windows and Doors
I.
Division 9 – Interior Finishes
J.
Division 10 – Specialty Items
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A.
Recycled Content: the percentage (by mass) of constituents that have been
recovered or otherwise diverted from the solid waste stream, either after the
manufacturing process (post-industrial) or after consumer use (postconsumer) and as further defined as follows:
1.
Post-Consumer Recycled Content: the percentage (by mass) of recycled
material that is derived from previously used consumer products (e.g.,
aluminum and steel cans, glass and plastic bottles, asphalt from parking
lots, gypsum from drywall etc.).
2.
Pre-Consumer Recycled Content: the percentage (by mass) of recycled
material that is derived from outside industrial sources (i.e., in-house
process recycling of production scrap is not included). Examples include
sawmill dust used in MDF board, blast furnace slag used in mineral wool
insulation, and coal fly ash used in concrete mixes. Pre-Consumer
Recycled Content is also referred to as Post-Industrial Recycled Content.
3.
In-House Process Recycled Content: the percentage (by mass) of in-house
material (i.e. trimmings, cutoffs, and scrap) that is returned to the
production process as a part of internal housekeeping.
B.
Manufacturing Location: the last point that a product or material is processed
or assembled (e.g., a sawmill that turns harvested trees into framing lumber
which is then used on-site).
C.
Extraction Location: the point(s) of origin (e.g. quarry, recycling plant, etc.)
for ≥80% (by mass) of the material transported to the Manufacturing Location
to create a product or material (e.g., if 80% of the mass of a concrete batch is
aggregate, the extraction location for the concrete is the gravel pit where the
aggregate was obtained).
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
Section 01611
Page 2 of 11
D.
Forest Stewardship Council (FSC): FSC is an international not-for-profit
membership-based organization geared to find solutions to the problems
created by bad forestry practices and to reward good forest management.
E.
Rapidly Renewable: materials that grow or regenerate in less than 10 years,
(e.g., wheat, straw, cork, some softwood lumber, cotton, etc.)
1.04
REFERENCES
A.
Canada Green Building Council. “Materials & Resources” credits. LEED Green
Building Rating System Reference Package: For New Construction & Major
Renovations LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0, December 2004.
B.
Canada Green Building Council. “Materials & Resources” credits. LEED Green
Building Rating System Reference Guide Addendum: LEED Canada for New
Construction & Major Renovations Version 1.0, September 2007.
1.05
OBJECTIVES
A.
To minimize the ecological footprint of the building by specifically selecting
materials that conserve raw and non-renewable resources.
B.
To minimize the amount of energy expended in the transportation of materials
to the site through intentional sourcing of regional materials.
C.
To document the Materials and Resources Credits under the LEED Canada-NC
Version 1.0 Green Building Rating System administered by the Canada Green
Building Council for the purpose of LEED Certification.
1.06
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
related to the selection and sourcing of products/materials.
B.
Product/material selection activities shall include:
1.07
1.
Preparing an itemized list of all materials that will be used in Divisions 2
through 10
2.
Coordinating with the subcontractors to select products and materials that
meet the requirements specified herein
3.
Providing product and material documentation and submittals to the
Consultant as detailed herein prior to ordering a product or material
4.
Providing material costs (sub-contractor cost excluding labour and
equipment) to the Consultant for LEED material credit calculations
5.
Reporting product/material selection progress to the Consultant
A.
the Consultant to review the product/material selection and documentation
requirements. This meeting shall include a review of:
1.
Product/material selection objectives
2.
Product/material selection requirements and procedures
3.
Product/material selection documentation and submittals
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
1.08
Section 01611
Page 3 of 11
LEED COORDINATION MEETING
A.
1.09
Prior to start of construction, the Contractor (in conjunction with the
Consultant) shall hold a coordination meeting with the construction team to
explain the product/material selection and documentation requirements to the
Sub-Contractors. This meeting shall include a review of:
1.
Product/material selection objectives
2.
Product/material selection requirements and procedures
3.
Product/material selection documentation and submittals
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Schedule P1 - Recycled and Regional Content
1.
suppliers, product literature, etc.) for all products/materials listed in
articles 2.01 and 0 of this Section and requested by the Consultant.
2.
Schedule P2 – Concrete Mix Design
1.
Complete schedule listing all concrete mix designs as well as indicating
concrete strengths after 28 days, amount of Portland cement used, and
whether the mix is air entrained.
2.
Submit completed schedules to the Consultant for all concrete mix designs
after the Structural Engineer has approved the designs, and prior to
delivery of any concrete to the site.
Note: As an alternative to completing Schedule P2, a letter signed by the
concrete supplier/manufacturer will be accepted that states the reduction
in Portland cement. This can be provided as a total reduction in Portland
cement for all concrete used on the project. If this compliance path is
used, the documentation must be produced in accordance with The Ready
Mix Concrete Association Ontario Technical Bulletin T-030.
C.
D.
E.
Schedule P3 - Material Cost
1.
Complete schedule by providing individual material costs (excluding labour
and equipment) for all products/materials in divisions 2 through 10 (and
11 through 14 if deemed necessary by the Consultant) that contribute to
meeting LEED requirements specified in Part 2 of this Section.
2.
Submit completed schedules to the Consultant after all of the materials
have been purchased and prior to Subcontractor demobilization.
Schedule P4 - Concrete Cost
1.
Complete schedule by listing all concrete mix designs, amount of concrete
by mix, cost of the concrete and cost of formwork.
2.
Submit completed schedules to the Consultant after all concrete has been
delivered to site and prior to Contractor demobilization.
Schedule P5 - FSC Certified Wood Content
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
F.
Section 01611
Page 4 of 11
1.
Complete schedule and collect supporting documentation (vendor
invoices, letters from suppliers, product literature, etc.) for the
products/materials listed in clause 2.03 of this Section to clearly
demonstrate they meet FSC certification requirements.
2.
Total Construction Cost
1.
Submit the total construction cost associated with divisions 2 through 10
(and 11 through 14 if deemed necessary by the Consultant) to the
Consultant upon project completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
RECYCLED CONTENT
A.
Select products/materials that contain recycled content and that fall within
divisions 2 through 10 (and 11 through 14 if deemed necessary by the
Consultant).
B.
At a minimum, the following materials shall include recycled content:
Target Recycled
Content Values
(by mass)
Min. PostMin. PreCombined*
Consumer
Consumer
Material
Engineered Fill
25%
10%
30.0%
Asphalt
20%
0%
20.0%
0%
25%
N/A
0%
25%
N/A
30%
65%
62.5%
0%
25%
N/A
0%
80%
N/A
Structural Steel
25%
40%
45.0%
Steel Deck, Roofing and Siding
20%
25%
32.5%
25%
5%
27.5%
0%
90%
45.0%
60%
0%
60.0%
Mineral Wool Insulation
0%
40%
20.0%
Gypsum (interior)
5%
90%
50.0%
Concrete (% SCM Content in
Cement)
Precast Concrete Products (%
SCM Content in Cement)
Concrete Reinforcement
Masonry (% SCM Content in
Cement)
Masonry - Light Weight or
Acoustic
(% slag content in aggregate)
Light Steel Framing (Steel
Studs)
Composite Wood (MDF, Particle
Board)
Fiberglass Insulation
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
Section 01611
Page 5 of 11
Ceramic Tile (Wall)
0%
35%
17.5%
Ceramic Tile (Floor)
0%
30%
15.0%
Acoustic Ceiling Tile
5%
40%
25.0%
90%
0%
90.0%
0%
25%
12.5%
60%
5%
62.5%
Linoleum
0%
35%
17.5%
Carpet
5%
30%
20.0%
Suspended Ceiling T-Grid
(Aluminum)
Suspended Ceiling T-Grid (Steel)
Rubber Flooring
*If the minimum Post-Consumer and Pre-Consumer recycled content values cannot both be
met for a product or material, the Combined recycled content value can be used. The
Combined recycled content for a product can be calculated using the equation:
Combined
Recycled
Content (%)
C.
2.02
=
1.0 x
Post-Consumer
Recycled
Content (%)
+ 0.5 x
Pre-Consumer
Recycled
Content (%)
Submit supporting documentation as per 1.09A and Error! Reference source
not found. for each product/material listed above.
REGIONAL CONTENT
A.
B.
Select products/materials that are extracted and manufactured locally and that
fall within divisions 2 through 10 (and 11 through 14 if deemed necessary by
the Consultant).
1.
Products/materials transported by truck: To qualify as a regional
product/material, at least 80% (by mass) must be manufactured and/or
extracted within 800 km of the site (straight-line distance).
2.
Products/materials transported by rail or water: To qualify as a regional
product/material, at least 80% (by mass) must be manufactured and/or
extracted within 2,400 km of the site (straight-line distance).
At a minimum, the following materials shall be of regional content:
1.
Landscaping Material
2.
Asphalt
3.
Concrete
4.
Granular Material
5.
Concrete Reinforcement
6.
Masonry
7.
Structural Steel
8.
Steel Deck, Roofing and Siding
9.
Light Steel Framing (Steel Studs)
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
Section 01611
Page 6 of 11
10. Light Steel Framing
11. Fiberglass Insulation
12. Mineral Wool Insulation
13. Gypsum
14. Acoustic Ceiling Tile
15. Carpet
C.
2.03
Submit supporting documentation as per 1.09A and Error! Reference source
not found. for each product/material listed above.
FSC CERTIFIED WOOD
A.
At least 50% (by cost) of all permanent wood based products/materials used
for the project must be FSC Certified. Temporary construction applications
such as bracing, concrete formwork, and pedestrian barriers are excluded from
this requirement.
B.
In addition to the above requirement, all composite wood products (e.g.
plywood, particleboard, MDF, OSB) must not contain added ureaformaldehyde. Refer to Section 01359, Paragraph 2.04.
C.
Products/materials to target include:
D.
2.04
1.
Framing (e.g. trusses, decking, beams, studs, joists, etc.)
2.
Panel products (e.g. plywood, particle board, etc.)
3.
Millwork (e.g. cabinetry, trim, baseboards, etc.)
4.
Doors (including cores, rails, and stiles)
5.
Hardwood flooring
6.
Furniture
7.
Elevator Finishes (i.e. panels)
Submit supporting documentation as per1.09E for each FSC Certified wood
product/material.
SUBSTITUTIONS/ALTERNATES
A.
Compliance with requirements needed to obtain LEED Material credits will be
used as one criterion to evaluate requests for substitutions or alternates.
B.
When proposing a substitution/alternate, the Contractor must submit the
applicable schedules described in article 1.09.
PART 3 EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
Section 01611
Page 7 of 11
SCHEDULE P1 - RECYCLED AND REGIONAL CONTENT
Project Name:
Completed By:
Project Location:
Company:
% Recycled Content (by mass)
Product &
Manufacturer
Ex.
Tegular ACT
by Ceiling Tile Ltd.
Description
PostConsumer
PreConsumer
In-House
5%
50%
0%
Mineral Fibre Lay-in
This product was manufactured and extracted at the following locations:
Manufacturing Location
City
Ex.
Kitchener
Prov.
/State
Postal
Code
ON
N2K
3S2
Extraction Location
Mode of
Transport






Truck
Rail
Ship
Truck
Rail
Ship
City
Prov.
/State
Postal
Code
Hamilton
ON
N3M
6K4
Mode of
Transport






Truck
Rail
Ship
Truck
Rail
Ship
Position
Date
Post-Consumer Recycled Content: % (by mass) of recycled material derived from previously used consumer
products (e.g., aluminum cans, glass and plastic bottles, asphalt from parking lots, gypsum from drywall, etc.)
Pre-Consumer Recycled Content: % (by mass) of recycled material derived from outside industrial sources
(e.g., sawmill dust in MDF board, blast furnace slag in mineral wool insulation, coal fly ash in concrete mixes, etc.)
In-House Process Recycled Content: % (by mass) of in-house material (i.e. trimmings, cutoffs, and scrap) that
is returned to the production process as a part of internal housekeeping
Manufacturing Location: the last point that a product or material is processed or assembled (e.g., a sawmill that
turns harvested trees into framing lumber)
Extraction Location: point(s) of origin (e.g. quarry, recycling facility, etc.) for ≥80% (by mass) of the material
transported to the Manufacturing Location to create a product or material (e.g., if 80% of the mass of a concrete
batch is aggregate, the extraction location for the concrete is the gravel pit where the aggregate was obtained)
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
Section 01611
Page 8 of 11
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
Section 01611
Page 9 of 11
Schedule P3 – Material Cost
(Submit to Consultant after purchasing materials and prior to demobilization)
Project Name:
Completed By:
Project Location:
Company:
For the purposes of LEED documentation, I am pleased to provide the following material
costs for the products/materials listed below:
Product
Ex.
Tegular ACT
Description
Manufacturer
Material Cost
(excluding labour
and equipment)
Mineral Fibre Lay-in
Ceiling Tile Ltd.
$50,000
Position
Date
Note: Material costs will be used to complete calculations required to achieve the Materials Credits under LEED
Canada-NC Version 1.0. All costs provided in this schedule will be kept in strict confidence by the Consultant and
the Canada Green Building Council (CaGBC) and will in no way be made available to the public. To submit this
schedule directly to the Consultant, please send a fax to (519) 743-8778.
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
Section 01611
Page 10 of 11
SCHEDULE P4 - CONCRETE COST
(Submit to Consultant after concrete is delivered to site and prior to demobilization)
Project Name:
Completed By:
Project Location:
Company:
For the purposes of LEED documentation, I am pleased to certify the following information
for the concrete mixes used on this project:
Mix Number
Volume Used
(m3)
Concrete
Supply Cost
Cost of All
Forming
Materials
Position
Date
Note: Concrete costs will be used to complete calculations required to achieve the Materials Credits under LEED
Canada-NC Version 1.0. All costs provided in this schedule will be kept in strict confidence by the Consultant and
the Canada Green Building Council (CaGBC) and will in no way be made available to the public. To submit this
schedule directly to the Consultant, please send a fax to (519) 743-8778.
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
Section 01611
Page 11 of 11
SCHEDULE P5 - FSC CERTIFIED WOOD CONTENT
Project Name:
Completed By:
Project Location:
Company:
Product &
Manufacturer
Ex.
EcoDor by
Doors’R’Us
Description
FSC Chain-ofCustody
Certification
Number
% FSC
Wood
Content
(by volume)
% PostConsumer
Recycled
Wood Fiber
Content
(by cost)
Man door w/ FSC
stave-core and veneer
SCS-COC12345
75%
0%
These wood products meet the requirements for the Forest Stewardship Councils (FSC)
Principals and Criteria and FSC Cain-of-Custody Standard (FSC-STD-40-004), and comply
with the documentation requirements included within those standards.
Position
Date
Post-Consumer Recycled Content: % (by mass) of recycled material derived from previously used consumer
products (e.g., aluminum cans, glass and plastic bottles, asphalt from parking lots, gypsum from drywall, etc.)
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
Section 01710
COMMISSIONING
Page 1 of 9
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Applicability
.1
1.2
The work in this section lays out the responsibilities and the work required of the:
.1
General contractor or Construction Manager
.2
Mechanical contractor
.3
Electrical Contractor
.4
Controls contractor
.5
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Contractor
.6
Other contractors providing services under the requirements of this contract as
may be noted in this or other related parts of the specifications
DESCRIPTION
.1
Commissioning is a systematic process of ensuring that all building systems installed in
accordance with the drawings and specifications, manufacturer’s requirements and good
industry practice. Commissioning also ensures that equipment operates and performs,
in and of itself as well as in the system, as was intended by the designers in response to
the owner’s requirements. Finally commissioning ensures the owner has the
documentation and training required to operate the equipment and systems in a safe,
efficient and long lasting manner.
.1
During the construction phase, commissioning will include the following specific
activities:
.1
Review of shop drawings for commissionable mechanical and electrical
equipment and systems at the same time as the design engineers.
Comments from the Commissioning Agent (CxA) will be given to the design
engineers to incorporate into their review as appropriate. Contractors will
respond to the comments from the engineer of record.
.2
Verify equipment is installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations and industry accepted standards including review of
completed manufacturers’ start-up sheets, supplemented where required
with commissioning installation verification checklists provided by the CxA.
Contractor shall complete check sheets as required by the CxA
.3
Verify equipment is set-up, adjusted and balanced to perform as specified.
This will include review of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB)
procedures, review of TAB reports and spot checking measurements on site.
The TAB contractor shall cooperate with the CxA providing information
requested and tools and manpower for spot checking measurements as
required by the CxA.
.4
Functional Performance Testing (FPT) of mechanical and electrical equipment
and systems to ensure proper, complete and efficient operation under the
range of conditions they are expected to encounter. Contractors shall
provide manpower, tools and other services as required by the CxA to
perform the FPT
.5
CxA will review O&M documentation provided to the owner to ensure it is
complete and acceptable for ongoing operation and maintenance of the
equipment. The review shall be sent to the consultant for incorporation with
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
Section 01710
COMMISSIONING
Page 2 of 9
his comments. The Contractors shall provide changes as required by the
Engineer.
.6
.2
1.3
The CxA will witness the Owner’s operating personnel training to verify it
was adequate and complete to ensure they fully understand the
requirements of operating and maintaining the equipment. Contractors shall
ensure training meets the approval of the CxA and provide additional
training if requested.
Commissioning does not take away from, reduce responsibility of or in any way diminish
the requirement for system designers and installing contractors to provide a complete,
finished and fully functioning product.
COORDINATION
.1
Commissioning Team. The following contractors will be required to participate in
commissioning and to assist the commissioning team with verification, testing and
documentation preparation:
.2
.1
General Contractor (GC or Contractor)
.2
Construction Manager (CM)
.3
Mechanical Contractor (MC)
.4
Electrical Contractor (EC)
.5
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing contractor (TAB)
.6
Controls Contractor (CC)
.7
Contractors installing insulation, windows and doors, air barrier or other
building shell components.
.8
Any other installing Subcontractors or suppliers of equipment.
Other members of the commissioning team include:
.1
Commissioning Agent (CxA)
.2
Owner’s Project Manager (PM)
.3
Designated representative of the owner’s Operations and Maintenance
personnel (O&M)
.4
Architect and Design Engineers - particularly the mechanical and electrical
engineers (A/M/E)
.2
Management: Contractors shall cooperate fully with the CxA who will be the Owner’s
representative for commissioning during all commissioning activities. Contractors shall
work together and with the other members of the commissioning team as required to
fulfil their contracted responsibilities and meet the objectives of commissioning.
.3
Scheduling: The GC/CM will work with the CxA to schedule the commissioning activities
required of contractors and subcontractors. All parties will address scheduling problems
and make necessary notifications in a timely manner in order to expedite the
commissioning process.
The CxA will provide the initial schedule of primary commissioning events at the
commissioning scoping meeting. As construction progresses more detailed schedules
may be developed by the GC/CM.
The GC/CM shall be responsible for ensuring that the mechanical, electrical, and
controls sub-contractors will return to the building approximately 10 months after the
start of the warrantee period to review system operation and to address operational
issues.
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
1.4
1.5
Section 01710
COMMISSIONING
Page 3 of 9
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
Mechanical – General Provisions
Section 15010
.2
Mechanical – Energy Management Control System
Section 15900
.3
Mechanical – Testing, Adjusting & Balancing
Section 15950
.4
Electrical – General Provisions
Section 16010
.5
Electrical – Luminaire Construction and Installation
Section 16504
RESPONSIBILITIES
.1
.2
Mechanical Contractor:
.1
Attend initial commissioning coordination meeting.
.2
Provide a complete set of all submittals for mechanical equipment for the CxA
.3
Provide complete equipment and systems start-up including personnel and tools,
as required for safe, proper and complete start-up of all mechanical equipment.
.4
Perform installation verification, start-up and complete required documentation as
directed by CxA.
.5
Correct all deficiencies found during installation verification, start-up and TAB to
ensure that all equipment and systems are fully functional and ready for functional
performance testing.
.6
Prepare O&M manuals and supplementary information on all equipment as
directed by CxA and assemble in binders tabbed and indexed. Supplementary
information may include, but is not limited to, such items as power/control field
wiring diagrams, equipment maintenance schedule, vendor and maintenance
contact lists. Submit to CxA when requested.
.7
Prepare preliminary schedule for O&M manuals submission, owner training, pipe
and duct system testing, flushing and cleaning, equipment start-up, and TAB for
use by the CxA. Update schedule throughout the construction period.
.8
Notify CxA a minimum of two weeks in advance of equipment and system start-up
and/or installation verification testing.
.9
Set-up and schedule vendors and contractors required to participate in the owner
training sessions for all equipment and systems.
.10
Provide a complete set of as-built record drawings and schematics, include a copy
to the CxA.
.11
Return to site with the GC/CM, O&M and CxA approximately 10 months after the
start of the warrantee period to review system operation and to address
operational issues.
TAB Contractor(s)
.1
.2
Submit TAB procedures to CxA and Mechanical Consultant for review and
acceptance.
.3
Provide a preliminary TAB report showing that the system is complete and capable
of being balanced. Provide an additional copy of the preliminary report labelled
“For CxA”.
.4
Attend TAB review meeting scheduled by the CxA. Be prepared to discuss
procedures that shall be followed in TAB and findings of preliminary TAB.
.5
Submittal of final TAB report showing all flows, pressures, motor speeds, voltages
and amperages etc., as required for a full and complete balancing report on all
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
Section 01710
COMMISSIONING
Page 4 of 9
systems. Provide an additional copy of the TAB final report labelled “For CxA”, and
include as-built distribution systems schematics.
.6
.3
.4
Participate in verification of the TAB report, which includes of repeating selected
measurement contained in the TAB report where required by the CxA for
verification or diagnostic purposes.
Building Controls and Automation System Contractor(s)
.1
.2
Attend Sequence of Operation and Graphics review meeting scheduled by the CxA.
Be prepared to discuss all sequences including all changes, and provide a
schematic for each proposed graphic.
.3
Provide the following submittals to the CxA at time of FPT. (Note: The following
shall be updated to as-built conditions).
.1
Hardware and software submittals and shop drawings.
.2
Narrative description of each control sequence for each piece of equipment
or system controlled.
.3
Point-to-point and sensor calibration verification checklists
.4
As-built diagrams showing all control points, sensor locations, point names,
actuators, controllers and, where necessary, points of access, superimposed
on diagrams of the physical equipment.
.5
Printout of panel layouts including all analog input, analog output, digital
input, and digital output connections. Provide a separate list for each stand
alone control unit.
.6
Printout of final control programming algorithms, include current values of all
parameters for each system point.
.7
Owners operation and maintenance manuals.
.4
Provide complete training to operating personnel on hardware, operation and
programming, and the application program for the system.
.5
Demonstrate system performance to CxA. including all modes of system
operation. (e.g. normal, abnormal, emergency).
.6
Provide control system technician to operate systems as required by and under
the direction of the CxA during system verification and functional performance
testing.
.7
Provide support and coordination with TAB contractor on all interfaces between
their scopes of work. Provide all devices, such as portable operators’ terminals,
for TAB use in completing TAB procedures.
.8
Provide any trend logs as may be required by the CxA.
.9
Return to site with the GC/CM, O&M and CxA approximately 10 months after the
start of the warrantee period to review system operation and to address
operational issues.
Electrical Contractor
.1
Attend commissioning meetings scheduled by the CxA.
.2
Provide a complete set of all submittals for electrical equipment to the CxA
.3
Provide a copy of the electrical Coordination Study.
.4
Correct all deficiencies found during Installation Verification Inspection (IVI), startup, TAB and FPT to ensure all equipment and systems are fully functional and in
complete and proper working order.
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
1.6
Section 01710
COMMISSIONING
Page 5 of 9
.5
Prior to occupancy, but following the completion of all changes, certify that all
protection devices have been checked and reset to conform to the Coordination
Study settings.
.6
Participate in the verification of all protective device settings.
.7
Prepare O&M manuals and supplementary information on all equipment as
directed by CxA and assemble in binders tabbed and indexed. Supplementary
information may include, but is not limited to, such items as power/control field
wiring diagrams, equipment maintenance schedule, vendor and maintenance
contact lists. Submit to CxA when requested.
.8
Provide electrical system technicians to assist during system verification and
functional performance testing as required by the CxA.
.9
Provide a complete set of as-built record drawings and schematics with a copy to
the CxA.
.10
Return to site with the GC and CxA approximately 10 months after the start of the
warrantee period to review system operation and to address operational issues.
EQUIPMENT/SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED
.1
Systems to be commissioned under this part are primarily associated with HVAC for the
building and central plant but do not include process or special purpose equipment such
as:
.1 life safety systems such as fire alarm, sprinkler, fire pumps
.2 security systems such as card readers, automatic door locks, CC cameras
.3 Communication systems such as data, paging and telephone systems
.4 specialty equipment such as kitchen cooking and refrigeration equipment, medical
gas, elevators, laboratory equipment, etc. but scope does include exhaust hoods and
fans
.5 Plumbing piping systems such as drainage and storm water management but scope
does include booster pumps, hot water generation, cistern pumping and control systems
for these
.2
All major mechanical equipment and their controls will be commissioned using a series
of installation verification and functional checks. Equipment to be commissioned during
the course of this project includes but is not limited to:
.1
Building Automation System (Controls System)
.2
Domestic Water Heaters
.3
Air Handling Units
.4
Heat/Energy Recovery Ventilators
.5
Pumps
.6
Exhaust Fans
.7
Unit Heaters, Cabinet Unit Heaters
.8
Fan Coil Units
.9
Range Hood
.10
Lighting Control
.11
Heat Exchangers
.12
Piping Systems
.13
Ducting Systems
.14
VFDs
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
Section 01710
COMMISSIONING
Page 6 of 9
Other major equipment as may be included in construction but may have been left off of
this list will also be required to be included in commissioning.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
TEST EQUIPMENT
.1
All standard testing equipment required to perform start-up and installation verification
and required functional performance testing shall be provided by the division contractor
for the equipment being tested.
.2
Special test equipment, tools or instruments required by the contract documents shall
be provided for commissioning and shall be left on site.
.3
All testing equipment shall have had a certified calibration, traceable to a national
standard, performed within the past year. If not otherwise noted, temperature sensors
and digital thermometers shall have an accuracy of ± 0.1F, pressure sensors shall have
an accuracy of ± 1.0% for each range available on the instrument (not the full range of
the meter). All equipment shall be re-calibrated when dropped or damaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
MEETINGS
.1
Commissioning Meetings: Soon after construction commences, the CxA will conduct an
initial commissioning scoping meeting with the entire commissioning team in
attendance. Commissioning requirements, procedures, responsibilities and schedule will
be reviewed.
Other commissioning meetings will be conducted as required throughout construction.
These meetings will cover coordination, deficiency resolution and planning issues with
particular Contractors and Subs.
3.2
SUBMITTALS
.1
Division 15 and 16 Contractors and Subs shall supply one (1) copy of all shop drawings
marked “for CxA” to the CxA at the same time as provided to other designers for
review, including all controls and shop drawings and narrative description of each
control sequence for each piece of equipment or system controlled.
.2
Contractors and Subs shall comply with specific requests for submittal documentation
from the CxA in a timely fashion to ensure commissioning work continues as scheduled.
At a minimum, the request will include the manufacturer’s printed installation and startup procedures, O&M data and manuals, final shop drawings, power and control field
wiring drawings, sequences of operation, and results of required tests.
.3
Final completion of the O&M manuals including all required submittals is the
responsibility of the Contractor. The CxA will review and forward comments to the
engineer of record for follow-up.
.4
TAB contractor shall supply an extra copy of the preliminary and the final TAB report
marked “for CxA” for review. The CxA will review and forward comments to the engineer
of record for follow-up.
.5
Contractor shall provide an extra set of O&M manuals, as built drawings and field power
wiring diagrams to the CxA. The CxA will review and forward comments to the engineer
of record for follow-up.
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
3.3
3.5
Page 7 of 9
START-UP AND INSTALLATION VERIFICATION CHECKS
.1
The installing Contractor or Sub-contractor shall be responsible for performing and
documenting start-up based on manufacturer’s requirements and/or good industry
practice. They shall perform all required procedures and checks and document the
results. Start-up documents as requested by the CxA shall be provided.
.2
Controls and Sensor Point-to-Point Checks. Control system point-to-point checks and
calibration checks for all sensors shall be included as part of installation verification. The
results shall be documented and provided to CxA.
.3
Execution of Start-up and Installation Verification (IV/S-U).
.4
3.4
Section 01710
COMMISSIONING
.1
IV/S-U checklists shall be developed and provided by CxA. Where appropriate
manufacturers checklists and procedures shall be combined or accepted in lieu of
CxAs checklists.
.2
The contractor, sub-contractor, manufacturer’s rep or supplier shall perform IV/SU. They shall complete the checklist on each piece of equipment. IV/S-U shall be
successfully completed prior to any FPT.
.3
At his sole discretion the CxA shall observe, recheck or verify the IV/S-U
documentation of any or all equipment. The contractor shall cooperate with and
provide support to the CxA as requested.
.4
Only individuals with direct knowledge of and who personally witnessed any IV/SU shall sign off the checklists.
.5
It will be the responsibility of the contractor to remedy all deficiencies found.
Retesting by the contractor may be required to demonstrate corrections have been
made.
Deficiencies, Non-Conformance and Approval of IV/S-U Checklists.
.1
Dates for remedy of deficiencies shall be provided to the CxA with the initial IV/SU documents.
.2
The CxA will work with all parties as required to affect proper corrective measures,
correct and retest deficiencies or uncompleted items.
.3
Items left incomplete or not properly corrected, causing delays or multiple callbacks for retest may result in back-charges to the party at fault.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING (TAB)
.1
A preliminary TAB balancing shall be done prior to final balancing. System deficiencies
requiring correction prior to final TAB shall be documented.
.2
All deficiencies shall be corrected by the contractor prior to final balancing.
.3
Participate in repeating selected measurement as required by the CxA for verification or
diagnostic purposes.
FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING (FPT)
.1
In general, functional performance testing is conducted after IV/S-U have been
satisfactorily completed, the control system is fully operational, and TAB is complete.
.2
The installing Contractor or Sub-contractor, under the direction of the CA, shall execute
all FPT and shall maintain responsibility for all equipment tested.
.3
In general, each system shall be operated through all modes of operation (seasonal,
occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, cool-down, part-load, full-load). Proper responses to
such modes and emergency conditions (e.g., power failure, freeze condition, no flow,
equipment failure, etc.) shall be verified.
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
3.6
Section 01710
COMMISSIONING
Page 8 of 9
.4
FPT verification may be achieved by manual testing (persons manipulate the equipment
and observe performance) or by monitoring the performance and analyzing the results
using the control system’s trend log capabilities or by stand-alone data loggers. The CxA
will determine which method is most appropriate.
.5
The CxA will schedule FPTs through the GC/CM and affected Contractors and Subs.
.6
Corrections of minor deficiencies identified during FPT may be made by the Contractor
or Sub during the tests.
.7
Where a deficiency cannot be corrected immediately, the Contractor or Sub shall
provide a reasonable timeline for correction. The CxA shall document the deficiency and
reschedule the FPT.
.8
Where there is a dispute regarding whether a problem is a deficiency or who is
responsible, the deficiency shall be documented and resolution attempted by parties in
attendance. Final acceptance of proposed resolution lies with the Owner or designated
representative.
.9
The burden of responsibility to solve and correct deficiencies lies with the A/M/E,
manufacturers, vendors, GC/CM, Contractors, and Subs. The CxA may recommend
solutions to problems in consultation with these parties.
.10
Cost of Retesting:
.1
If the Contractor or Sub is responsible for a deficiency then they shall carry the
cost to rework the deficiency and complete the IV/S-U or FPT.
.2
The CxA will direct the first retesting of the equipment at no charge.
.3
If corrections of deficiencies have been reported to be successfully completed but
are determined during testing to be faulty or otherwise incomplete, the time for
the CxA to direct second or subsequent retests will be charged back.
TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL
.1
The contractor supplying each piece of equipment shall be responsible for providing
complete and satisfactory training on that piece of equipment. Training may be
performed by the contractor, supplier, manufacturer or others as the contractor may
decide best able to provide that training.
.2
Owner personnel shall be provided with completed O&M Manuals at least 1 week prior to
training. In addition, up to five (5) copies of the related maintenance booklet and wiring
as-builts shall be provided to owner personnel for the purpose of training.
.3
The GC shall be responsible for training coordination and scheduling and ultimately for
ensuring that training is completed. The CxA shall be responsible for overseeing and
approving the content and adequacy of training for all commissioned equipment.
.4
Basic training for each piece of equipment shall include the following items at a
minimum:
.1
General description of the system and its operation (Design Intent)
.2
Detailed itemization and identification of major components and access to same
.3
Detailed itemization and identification of operating controls and safeties including
normal and abnormal sensor readings
.4
Review of the O&M manuals for identification of service requirements, procedures,
wiring diagrams, parts identification, safety procedures, etc.
.5
Review of system drawings and schematics
.6
Review of control drawings and schematics
.7
Operational review for
Project No. 0701-BS
Feb 07, 2014
3.7
.1
Start-up
.2
Normal operation
.3
Shut down
.4
Unoccupied operation
.5
Seasonal changeover
.6
Manual operation
.7
Controls set-up and programming
.8
Troubleshooting and alarms
Page 9 of 9
.8
Interactions with other systems
.9
Adjustments and optimizing methods for energy conservation
.10
Health and safety issues
.11
Regular maintenance requirements including frequency, parts and equipment, and
tools needed, replacement parts sources
.12
Special maintenance needs
.13
Tenant interaction issues
.14
Discussion of environmentally responsible system features
.15
Identification of contacts for service support and maintenance parts
DEFERRED TESTING
.1
3.8
Section 01710
COMMISSIONING
If any check or test cannot be completed due to weather conditions, the building
structure, required occupancy condition or other deficiency, execution of IV/S-U and/or
FPT may be delayed upon approval of the Owner.
POST-OCCUPANCY REVIEW
.1
The CxA, GC/CM, mechanical, electrical, and controls sub-contractors shall return to the
building approximately 10 months after the start of the warranty period to review
system operation, owner concerns, unresolved deficiencies or warranty issues and to
address any outstanding operational issues.
.2
The exact date and time of this meeting is to be coordinated by the CxA.
.3
CxA will provide site report to the consultants and owner for review, acceptance and
formal issue to the appropriate parties.
END OF SECTION
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 02050
DEMOLITION AND PREPARATION
FOR NEW WORK
Page 02050 - 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if repeated
here.
1.2
LEED Requirements
1.2.1
This project is required to achieve a minimum rating of LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0
Gold. Refer to Section 01352. Where submittals are required they must be complete as
specified in the LEED reference guide.
1.2.2
The LEED requirements listed in Sections 01355, 01359, 01611, and 02370 apply to all
Sections and Work for this Project, whether specifically indicated or not.
.1
Compliance with requirements needed to obtain LEED prerequisites and credits
will be used as one criterion to evaluate requests for substitutions or alternates.
1.3
Work Included in Section
1.3.1
Various demolition and removals shown/noted on Drawings.
1.3.2
Restoration of damaged or disturbed work.
1.3.3
Removal of surplus materials from the site.
1.4
Referenced Standards
1.4.1
CSA S350-M1980 (R2003)
1.5
Existing Conditions
1.5.1
Take over structures to be demolished based on their condition on date that tender is
accepted.
1.6
Survey of Existing Concrete Slabs and Drains
1.6.1
The elevation levels at the top of the existing Parking Garage at intervals of half of the
typical grid (approximately 4250), and at the corners of all protrusions, upturned or raised
slabs, roof drain locations, existing top and bottom of ramp walls on Bay Street (locations
to be confirmed by Consultant) and elevations of the bases of all trees to remain shall be
measured by the Contractor's surveyor, recorded and submitted to the Consultant for
review. Do not set any building or paving levels until the Consultant has responded to the
survey submission.
Code of Practice for Safety in Demolition of
Structures.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 02050
FOR NEW WORK
Page 02050 - 2
1.7
Demolition Drawings
1.7.1
Where required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit for approval, drawings, diagrams
or details showing sequence of disassembly work and supporting structures and
underpinning.
1.7.2
Submissions to bear stamp of qualified professional engineer registered in the Province of
Ontario.
1.8
Quality Assurance
1.8.1
Comply with all applicable municipal regulations, the Occupational Health and Safety Act
1991 and Regulations for Construction Projects and the Ontario Building Code.
1.8.2
Provide all shoring, bracing, or other measures necessary to prevent accidental collapse of
any part of existing building, and take all necessary measures to prevent damage to
adjacent areas including parking garage.
1.8.3
Complete all measures required by the authority having jurisdiction for the enclosure of the
site and protection of the public before the work of demolition is commenced.
1.8.4
Conspicuously post danger signs around the property. Close off with barricades all
doorways and thoroughfares giving access to the area of demolition.
1.8.5
Requirements specified herein shall be considered the minimum requirements; be
responsible for providing and performing things required and necessary to complete the
work, in a safe, proper and workmanlike manner.
1.8.6
A competent foreman shall be in charge of the work at all times while work is in progress.
1.9
Maintaining Traffic
1.9.1
Maintain and preserve Owner's access requirements to and from existing areas including
parking garage where demolition and removal work is being carried out.
1.9.2
Do not close, obstruct, place or store material in Owner's driveways and passageways.
Conduct operations with minimum interference with roads, streets, driveways and
passageways.
1.10
Hauling Operations
1.10.1
Haul and move machines, vehicles and equipment over designated route and within work
areas as designated by Consultant.
1.10.2
Maintain roadways and paving in the hauling areas clean on a daily basis and as required
by Municipal authorities.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 02050
FOR NEW WORK
Page 02050 - 3
1.11
Interruptions To Owner's Operations
1.11.1
There will be absolutely no interruptions to Owners operations in adjoining areas
permitted. Therefore, it is imperative that operations and machine and equipment
movements, deliveries and removals are executed at time or times that will permit
uninterrupted Owner's operations around building(s), including parking, deliveries and site
access and egress.
1.11.2
There can be no noise or odour producing activity within the Parking Garage from lunch
time 12:00 noon until 2:00 pm.
1.11.3
The Square and/or Parking Garage may be shut down with little warning for a few days in
the event of an unscheduled major event, without penalty from the Contractor.
1.12
Protection
1.12.1
Protect work to remain against damage of any kind. Repair or replace damaged work at the
discretion of Consultant, at no cost to Owner.
1.12.2
Protect existing duress stations against damage during the Work of this Section. Duress
stations shall remain connected and in working order through duration of Work. Protect
existing plaza pavers and garage roof waterproofing membrane against damage from
operations under this Section, including lifting, moving, rolling, etc., of materials. Use 13
mm thick plywood covers with ends mechanically joined, over floor for any such handling.
Over roof, provide 19 mm thick plywood underlaid with 25 mm thick polystyrene
insulation board adhered to same. Be responsible for repairs to building floor (garage roof)
for any damage caused. Execute such repairs to the satisfaction of, and at no cost to Owner.
1.12.3
Prevent movement, settlement or damage of adjacent structures, services, walks, paving,
trees, landscaping, adjacent grades, parts of existing building to remain. Provide bracing,
Take precautions to support affected structures and, if safety of building being demolished
or adjacent structures or services appears to be endangered, cease operations and notify
shoring and underpinning as required. Make good any damage caused by demolition
beyond scope of Work.
1.12.4
Prevent debris from blocking surface drainage system, elevators, mechanical and electrical
systems which must remain in operation.
1.12.5
Pay particular attention to prevention of fire and elimination of fire hazards that would
endanger the work or adjacent buildings and premises.
1.12.6
Provide and maintain necessary fire extinguishers throughout the work at all times to the
approval of the Fire Marshal, and located at convenient and accessible points.
1.12.7
Do work required to maintain such services, including preparation of sketches, detail
scheduling of such work and coordinating and obtaining approval of Consultant.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 02050
FOR NEW WORK
Page 02050 - 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
2.1.1
Temporary Wood Studs: Construction Grade Spruce.
2.1.2
Polyethylene Sheet: 0.152 mm (6 mil.), thick, clear, stapled in place.
2.1.3
Plywood: Douglas Fir plywood. 13mm thick over floor., 19mm thick over roof.
2.1.4
Insulation: 25 mm thick polystyrene insulation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Temporary Partitions and Screens
3.1.1
Dustproof Partitions (At parking garage): Before any work proceeds in any particular area
in the existing building, temporarily enclose the area and access thereto, with light stud and
clean polyethylene sheet material, overlapped 100 mm and taped at floor, ceiling, walls or
intersecting members, in a manner to prevent dust and dirt infiltration into the adjoining
areas to the satisfaction of Consultant. Take every possible precaution to prevent dust and
dirt resulting from the contract operations from entering Owner's operational areas. Adjust
and relocate such partitions as required for the various operations under the contract.
3.1.2
Weather Protection
.1
Provide weather protection screens similar to above in areas where existing
building interior is exposed to the elements.
.2
Provide protection in the form of tarpaulins, plywood or polyethylene for
temporary roof and wall openings and other exposed areas such as during removal
of windows, doors or parapets, equipment to be relocated, etc., before final
construction is in place.
3.2
Demolition
3.2.1
Safety Code
.1
3.2.2
Blasting operations are not permitted during demolition.
Preparation
.1
Disconnect and re-route electrical and telephone service lines entering buildings to
be demolished in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction. Post warning
signs on electrical lines and equipment which must remain energized to serve other
properties during period of demolition.
Project No. 0701-BS
.2
3.2.3
SECTION 02050
FOR NEW WORK
Page 02050 - 5
Disconnect and cap designated mechanical services in accordance with authorities
having jurisdiction.
.1
Natural gas supply lines: to be removed by gas company.
.2
Sewer and water lines: remove to property line.
.3
Other underground services: remove and dispose of as indicated.
.3
Do not disrupt active or energized utilities traversing premises or designated to
remain undisturbed.
.4
Employ rodent and vermin exterminators to comply with health regulations.
Selective Demolition
.1
Demolish existing items as indicated on drawings.
.2
At end of each day's work, leave work in safe condition so that no part is in danger
of toppling or falling. Protect interiors of parts not to be demolished from exterior
elements at all times.
.3
Demolish to minimize dusting. Keep materials wetted as directed by Consultant.
.4
Demolish masonry and concrete walls in pieces not larger than 2 m2.
.5
Remove structural framing.
.6
Do not sell or burn materials on site.
.7
Remove contaminated or dangerous materials as defined by authorities having
jurisdiction, relating to environmental protection, from site and dispose of in safe
manner to minimize danger at site or during disposal.
3.3
Materials To Be Reused
3.3.1
As listed below and where indicated on Drawings to be removed and stored for future use
by Owner, or for later reuse by other trades of this Contract, remove, handle and transport
such items to storage area designated on Drawings or to an area within the site designated
by Consultant. Perform such work carefully and with diligence to prevent any damage to
the items during removal and in storage.
3.3.2
Following is a listing and description of elements to be removed and stored or reused:
.1
3.4
Cutting
Items as requested by Owner.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 02050
FOR NEW WORK
Page 02050 - 6
3.4.1
Perform required cutting using power operated cutting devices. Chipping will not be
allowed. Breaking out shall commence only after sawcutting of the cut-off points has been
performed in order to prevent damage to remainder.
3.4.2
Demolish masonry and concrete in small sections.
3.4.3
Coordinate with mechanical trade and sawcut and breakout existing floor or wall to
accommodate new mechanical piping or conduit. Have mechanical trade lay out and
supervise work.
3.5
Disposal of Materials, Rubble and Debris
3.5.1
Surplus Materials
3.5.2
3.5.3
.1
Materials forming permanent part of the building that require removal become
Contractor's property and must be removed from site daily, unless such materials
are otherwise specified or shown on Drawings to be reused under this Contract or
turned over to Consultant. Remove materials not suitable for reuse as specified or
as shown on Drawings from site.
.2
Stockpiling of surplus materials on site will not be permitted.
Waste and Debris
.1
Waste and debris resulting from execution of the work shall be cleaned up as they
are generated. Dispose of same at end each day's work or place in waste disposal
bins which must be emptied on a regular basis. Stockpiling of waste and debris
will not be permitted.
.2
Do not burn material on site.
Demolition and Excavation Dust Control Plan: Submit demolition and excavation dust
control plan for consultant review and approval. The Demolition and Excavation Dust
Control Plan should identify measures that will be taken to control dust during demolition,
related soil excavation or during soil remediation/excavation activities and should include
the following as applicable:
.1
The daily, or more frequently if required, wetting of all soft and hard surfaces and
any excavation face on the site, with the addition of approved dust repressant, if
required.
.2
The daily cleaning of the road pavement and sidewalks for the entire frontage of
the demolition area to a distance of 25 metres from the hoarding.
.3
The designation of truck loading points to avoid trucks tracking potentially
contaminated soil and demolition debris off the site. Such loading points should be
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 02050
FOR NEW WORK
Page 02050 - 7
on a gravel base to minimize tracking of the soil onto the sidewalk and the street.
If the loading point becomes contaminated it should be cleaned and replaced.
.4
All trucks and vans leaving the site should be cleaned of all loose soil and dust
from demolition debris including the washing of tires and sweeping or washing of
exteriors and tailgates by a designated labourer. A daily log of each truck leaving
the site should be kept noting when the truck was cleaned and by whom.
.5
Tarping all trucks leaving the site which have been loaded with indigenous soil or
demolition debris.
.6
An air monitoring program, if necessary, as determined through consultation with
the Environmental Protection Offices of the City of Toronto.
.7
Supervision of the dust control measures by a qualified environmental consultant if
necessary, as determined by consultation with the Environmental Protection
Offices of the City of Toronto.
3.6
Cleaning-Up
3.6.1
Leave building in a "broom-clean" condition on completion of work to Consultant's
satisfaction.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Nathan Phillips Square Revitalization – Bike Storage
Re-Issued for Tender
2014 May 23
STRUCTURAL ALTERATIONS
Section 02060
Page 1 of 2
1
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
.1
Provide labour, materials and equipment necessary to perform structural alterations
indicated or noted on the drawings or in the specifications including:
i.
Verification of field conditions and dimensions.
ii.
Design of shoring and needling and associated bracing along with necessary
foundations thereto as required to safely install new structural members.
iii.
Temporary shoring, needling and associated bracing and, where necessary,
jacking of existing work and removal thereof as required to safely install new
structural members.
1.2
RESPONSIBILITY
.1
Be responsible for all damage arising out of the work of the Contract and for all damage
to adjacent private or public property. Make good damages caused in the performance of
this contract to the satisfaction of the Consultant.
.2
Review of shoring and needling design drawings by the Consultant shall in no way relieve
the Contractor of his responsibility for carrying out the work in a manner which ensures
the complete safety of the existing work, persons and adjacent property and also ensures
that no damage occurs thereto, during any period of the alterations.
1.3
GENERAL
.1
The drawings governing alterations to existing structural work were prepared using the
following assumptions:
i.
The existing structure is built in accordance with the original contract documents,
significant details of which have been reproduced on the drawings.
ii.
The workmanship and materials employed on the existing buildings were of good
quality and the building has not deteriorated significantly.
iii.
Bearing walls, structural steel, and structural concrete is reasonably true and
plumb.
EXAMINATION
.1
Examine the site and buildings on it. Establish conditions under which the work is to be
done, and accept the premises as found upon taking possession of the property. The
Owner will make no allowance for conditions that were apparent at the time of
submission of tender. Direct all inquiries to the Consultant.
1.4
1.5
.2
Before proceeding with alterations to structural members, verify that the assumptions
described above are correct. Should the assumptions described above not be correct
notify the Consultant immediately. The Consultant will determine revisions necessary to
the work as shown. The Contractor shall provide the necessary assistance to enable the
consultant to determine the extent of the revisions necessary.
.3
Investigate the existing building to determine actual field conditions, take field
dimensions, ascertain loads and forces to be supported or resisted, probe structural
bearing members to determine soundness and perform other inspection necessary to
carry out design of shoring, needling, bracing and the like, to schedule the sequence of
operations, and prepare shop drawings and details.
DESIGN
.1
Design shoring, bracing, needling, scaffolding, and the like, along with the necessary
foundations in accordance with the requirements of the Ontario Building Code, so that
loads applied to them will be safely carried. Superimposed live loads, construction loads
and wind loads shall be taken into account and the lateral stability of the elements
supported and the shoring and needling shall be insured.
Blackwell Bowick Partnership Limited
060449
2014 May 23
1.6
STRUCTURAL ALTERATIONS
Section 02060
Page 2 of 2
.2
The members requiring shoring or needling, the elements to be altered, the general
sequence of operations, and in some circumstances the type of needling and shoring, are
shown. These general requirements shall govern the design.
.3
The design of shoring, needling and foundations thereto and the sequence of their
installation and the sequence of the work shall be prepared by a Professional Engineer
registered in the province of Ontario.
.4
Prepare design of shoring, and the like, in co-operation with other trades so that new
work may be installed as required.
.5
Prepare and submit to the Consultant sepia drawings fully describing the shoring,
needling, bracing and scaffolding work, the sequence of their installation and removal
and the sequence of alterations. Submit calculations to the Consultant if he so requires.
.6
The Professional Engineer employed to design the shoring, bracing, needling and the like
shall also be employed to fully supervise their installation and removal and shall submit
weekly reports to the Consultant regarding these phases of the work.
WORKMANSHIP
.1
Concrete, grouting, formwork and reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of
CAN/CSA-A23.1-04.
.2
Structural steel shall conform to the requirements of CAN3-S16.1.
.3
Structural timber framing shall conform to CSA Standard 086.
.4
Carry out shoring and needling by means of jacking, wedging or by other suitable means
so that load is transferred to the shoring and needling without damaging the work
supported. Ensure that over-wedging does not damage the work.
END OF SECTION 02060
060449
Project No. 0701-BS
Section 02370
Feb 07, 2014
Erosion and Sedimentation Control
Page 1 of 13
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.02
Overview of erosion and sedimentation control requirements and procedures.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.03
REFERENCES
A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Water. “Chapter 3: Sediment
and Erosion Control” and Chapter 4: Other Controls”. Document No. EPA 832R-92-005 Storm Water Management for Construction Activities. 1992.
B.
Canada Green Building Council. “Sustainable Sites Prerequisite 1: Erosion &
Sedimentation Control”. LEED Green Building Rating System Reference
Package: For New Construction & Major Renovations LEED Canada-NC Version
1.0, December 2004.
C.
Canada Green Building Council. “Sustainable Sites Prerequisite 1: Erosion &
Sedimentation Control”. LEED Green Building Rating System Reference Guide
Addendum: LEED Canada for New Construction & Major Renovations Version
1.0, September 2007.
1.04
OBJECTIVES
A.
Prevent the loss of soil from the construction site resulting from storm water
runoff, wind erosion, and construction activities.
B.
Prevent the sedimentation of storm sewers and receiving waters.
C.
Prevent air pollution caused by dust and particulate matter.
D.
Meet or exceed the requirements of LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0 Sustainable
Sites Prerequisite 1 “Erosion & Sedimentation Control” which specifies
compliance with EPA832/R-92-005 (September 1992), Storm Water
Management for Construction Activities, Chapter 3, or local erosion and
sedimentation control standards and codes, whichever is more stringent.
1.05
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
related to erosion and sedimentation control.
B.
Erosion and sedimentation control activities shall include:
1.
Implementing erosion and sedimentation control measures shown on the
drawings and described in this Section
2.
Installing erosion and sedimentation control products in accordance with
manufacturer instructions and the prescribed installation procedures in the
referenced EPA document
3.
Supervising on site erosion and sedimentation control activities on a daily
basis
Project No. 0701-BS
Section 02370
Feb 07, 2014
1.06
Page 2 of 13
4.
Coordinating erosion and sedimentation control tasks with subcontractors
to ensure timely and orderly progress of the work
5.
Conducting erosion and sedimentation control inspections and making
necessary repairs
6.
Maintaining an erosion and sedimentation control inspection log to
document observations, deficiencies and corrective actions
7.
Preparing erosion and sedimentation control documentation and
submittals as detailed herein
8.
Reporting erosion and sedimentation control progress to the Consultant
A.
1.07
the Consultant to review erosion and sedimentation control requirements. This
meeting shall include a review of:
1.
Erosion and sedimentation control objectives
2.
Erosion and sedimentation control requirements and procedures
3.
Erosion and sedimentation control documentation and submittals
SUBMITTALS
A.
Schedule E1 – ESC Inspection and Photograph Checklist
1.
Using the checklist for reference, conduct an inspection of all erosion and
sedimentation control measures implemented onsite each week and
following any significant storm event (0.5 inches of precipitation or
greater).
2.
Inspections shall commence when the site is “disturbed” (i.e. when site
work begins) and carry through until final landscaping is complete.
3.
Provide a minimum of 3 digital photographs of each ESC measure
implemented on-site. Record the date each photograph was taken in the
checklist. Photographs are required at the following occasions:
a. Immediately following installation,
b. In-situ and,
c. At the end of construction or prior to removal, whichever comes first
B.
4.
Coordinate with photo requirements of General LEED Requirements 01352
1.09A
5.
Submit the completed checklist and accompanying photos to the
Consultant after construction and prior to Contractor demobilization.
Schedule E2 – ESC Inspection Log
1.
Complete the log on a weekly basis. The log shall commence when the
site is “disturbed” (i.e. when site work begins) and carry through until
final landscaping is complete.
2.
The inspection log shall be completed for each inspection and must
document:
Project No. 0701-BS
Section 02370
Feb 07, 2014
Page 3 of 13
a. Deficiencies related to the measures listed in Schedule E1 – ESC
Inspection and Photograph Checklist and,
b. Corrective actions taken to remedy the deficiencies
3.
Each deficiency must be initialed and each log signed after all corrective
measures have been completed and documented.
4.
Submit an up-to-date copy of the ESC Inspection Log to the Consultant on
a monthly basis.
5.
Submit a compilation of the completed logs to the Consultant after
construction and prior to Contractor demobilization.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
PROCEDURES
A.
B.
Installation
1.
Install erosion and sedimentation control products as per this Section.
2.
Install erosion and sedimentation control products in accordance with
manufacturer instructions and the prescribed installation procedures in the
referenced EPA document.
General Practices
1.
Site Arrangement
a. All construction trailers and equipment shall be positioned to reduce
the disturbance of the site. They shall be located close to the current
phase of construction to minimize traffic damage to the site.
2.
Stabilized Construction Entrance (SCE)
a. Construct a SCE before construction begins at every point where traffic
leaves the site and enters onto a public road and/or any unpaved
entrance/exit location where there is a risk of transporting mud or
sediment onto paved roads.
b. The SCE must be at least 3.65m wide, with room for two vehicles to
pass at high traffic areas, and constructed of 50mm dia. clear stone,
150mm dia. rip rap, and filter fabric with the following characteristics:
1)
Grab Tensile Strength: 220lbs;
2)
Elongation Failure: 60%;
3)
Mullen Burst Strength: 430lbs;
4)
Puncture Strength: 125lbs;
5)
Equivalent Opening: Size 40-80 (US std Sieve).
Project No. 0701-BS
Section 02370
Feb 07, 2014
3.
Page 4 of 13
Material Stockpiling
a. If material that has been stockpiled and will not be used within 14
days, it must be stabilized using one of the following measures:
C.
1)
Temporary Seeding
2)
Tarps
3)
Compaction
4)
Surface Roughening
Stabilization Practices
1.
Temporary Seeding
a. Use temporary seeding to reduce soil erosion by stabilizing areas
disturbed by construction that will not be brought to final grade within
30 days.
b. Areas that may require temporary seeding include, but may not be
limited to soil stock piles, dikes, dams and sides of sediment basins
and traps.
c. Species used for temporary seeding must be fast growing, native or
adapted, not require permanent irrigation and not be invasive.
d. Till/loosen compacted soil prior to planting seed.
2.
Permanent Seeding
a. Apply permanent seeding to any graded or cleared area as specified on
the landscaping plan.
b. Plant native grass, tree and shrub species in favourable growth
conditions. For areas outside of construction activity, plant species
within 3 weeks of construction start.
c. Species shall not require permanent irrigation after the first two years
or fertilizers containing phosphorus. Species must not be invasive.
d. Use topsoil on areas where topsoil has been removed, where the soil is
dense or impermeable, or where mulching and fertilizers alone cannot
improve soil quality. Make topsoil layers at least 2 inches deep, or
similar to the existing topsoil depth.
3.
Mulching
a. Hay, grass, woodchips, straw, and/or gravel shall be used in areas
prone to erosion during construction and to facilitate the growth of
permanent seeding.
4.
Preservation of Natural Vegetation
a. Establish construction boundaries to limit site disturbance to 40 feet
beyond the building perimeter, 5 feet beyond primary roadway curbs,
walkways and main utility branches, and 25 feet beyond parking
areas.
Project No. 0701-BS
Section 02370
Feb 07, 2014
Page 5 of 13
b. Stakes shall be used to indicate limits of construction, grading and
disturbance. Trees shall be clearly marked to be preserved and
protected from ground disturbances around the base.
5.
Buffer Zones
a. Incorporate vegetated strips of land on floodplains, next to wetlands,
along stream banks, and on steep, unstable slopes to decrease the
velocity of storm water runoff, preventing soil erosion.
b. May be areas of vegetation left undisturbed during construction, or can
be newly planted. New strips require establishment of permanent
seeding and planting.
6.
Stream Bank Stabilization
a. Use riprap, gabion, reinforced concrete, log cribbing, grid pavers, or
asphalt where vegetative stabilization practices are not practical and
where the stream banks are subject to heavy erosion.
b. Structures shall be planned and designed by a licensed professional
engineer.
7.
Soil Retaining Measures
a. Use skeleton sheeting, continuous sheeting, or permanent retaining
walls to hold in place loose or unstable soil where other soil retaining
methods of soil retention are not practical.
8.
Sod Stabilization
a. Sod shall be applied in alternating strips or other patterns on graded
or cleared areas that might erode.
b. Roll or compact immediately after installation to ensure firm contact
with topsoil. Add lime and phosphorus-free fertilizers to the soil to
promote growth. If the soil is acidic, then add lime as directed by the
Landscape Architect.
c. Do not plant sod during very hot or wet weather or on slopes greater
than 3:1 if they are to be mowed.
9.
Rolled Erosion Control Products (RECP)
a. Use RECPs on recently planted slopes to protect seedlings until they
become established, on tidal or stream banks where moving water is
likely to wash out new plantings, and/or alone on slopes to mitigate
soil erosion.
b. Installation shall follow manufacturer/consultant requirements.
10. Dust Control
a. Apply vegetative cover, mulch, spray-on adhesives, calcium chloride,
sprinkling, stone, or barriers on open dry areas of soil as specified on
drawings.
D.
Structural Practices
1.
Silt Fence
Project No. 0701-BS
Section 02370
Feb 07, 2014
Page 6 of 13
a. Construct posts with a filter fabric media to remove sediment from
storm water volumes flowing through the fence.
b. The lower edge of the fence is to be vertically trenched and covered by
backfill.
c. Filter fabric should be a pervious sheet of polypropylene, nylon,
polyester, polyethylene, or equivalent and have the following
characteristics:
2.
1)
Filtering Efficiency: 75%-85% (minimum)
2)
Tensile Strength at 20% (maximum) Elongation: Standard
Strength = 30 lb/linear in. (min.), Extra Strength = 50 lb/linear in.
(min.)
3)
Slurry Flow Rate: 0.3 gal/ft2/min (min.)
Outlet Protection
a. Install stone, riprap, concrete aprons, paved sections, or settling
basins at all pipe, interceptor dike, swale, or channel section outlets
where the velocity of flow may cause erosion or pools at the outlet of
an erosion and sedimentation control measure.
3.
Inlet Protection
a. Install straw bales, stone, concrete masonry units and stone, filter
fabric, or silt fences around catch basins and manhole covers to
prevent silting of inlets, storm drainage systems, or receiving
channels.
4.
Surface Roughening
a. Create horizontal grooves, depressions, or steps that run parallel to
the contour of the land.
b. Use surface roughening on all slopes, as soon as possible after the
vegetation has been removed.
c. Methods of surface roughening are stair-step grading, grooving (using
disks, spring harrows, or teeth on a front-end loader), and tracking
(driving a crawler tractor up and down a slope, leaving the cleat
imprints parallel to the slope contour).
5.
Check Dams
a. Install check dams in steeply sloped swales, or in swales where
adequate vegetation cannot be established, and only in small open
channels which will not overflow once dams are constructed.
b. Construct a small, temporary or permanent dam of stone, straw bales,
logs or pea gravel-filled sandbags across a drainage ditch, swale, or
channel to slow water flow and allow suspended sediment to settle.
6.
Drainage Swale
a. Construct a channel with a lining of vegetation, riprap, asphalt,
concrete, or other material to convey runoff from the bottom or top of
a slope.
Project No. 0701-BS
Section 02370
Feb 07, 2014
Page 7 of 13
b. Intercepted runoff shall be diverted to an appropriate outlet with
sediment trap if required; swale shall have a positive grade with no
dips to collect water.
c. Swale shall be lined using geotextiles, grass, sod, riprap, asphalt, or
concrete - based on the volume and velocity of the runoff.
7.
Interceptor Dikes and Swales
a. Construct ridges of compacted soil (dikes) and excavated depressions
(swales) where upslope runoff has high risk of erosion.
b. Construction shall occur before any major soil disturbing activity takes
place. Outfall shall be stabilized or a structural sediment trapping
practice.
c. Temporary dikes and swales to remain in place longer than 15 days,
must be stabilized and remain until area is permanently stabilized.
d. Permanent controls shall be permanently stabilized and designed to
handle runoff after construction is complete.
8.
Gradient Terraces
a. Use gradient terraces on long, steep slopes with high potential for
water erosion.
b. Construct earth embankments or ridge-and-channels along the face of
a slope at regular intervals that drain to an outlet where erosion will
not occur.
c. Design and installation must be completed according to a plan
determined by an engineering survey and layout. Design elevation of
the water surface of the terrace shall not be lower than the design
elevation of the water surface in the outlet at their junction at design
flow.
d. Provide vegetative cover at outlet where possible.
9.
Earth Dike
a. Construct a mound of stabilized soil to divert surface runoff volumes
from disturbed areas or into sediment basins or sediment traps.
b. Check for local design requirements. Ensure dike is properly
compacted, has properly designed height and thicknesses, constructed
along a positive grade, and has no low points for water to collect.
c. Stabilize using vegetation or stone/riprap.
10. Gravel or Stone Filter Berm
a. Construct a temporary ridge of loose gravel, stone, or crushed rock to
slow filter flow and divert it from exposed traffic in areas with gentle
slopes and traffic.
11. Sediment Trap
a. Excavate a pond area or construct earthen embankments to allow for
settling of sediment from storm water volumes.
Project No. 0701-BS
Section 02370
Feb 07, 2014
Page 8 of 13
b. Incorporate temporary seeding, mulching, and/or earth dike per
installation procedures to reduce erosion of banks.
c. Use a sediment trap for small drainage areas, no more than 2 hectares
(5 acres).
12. Temporary Sediment Basin
a. Use sediment basins for areas larger than 2 hectares (5 acres).
b. Construct a pond with a controlled water release structure to allow for
settling of sediment from storm water volumes.
c. Construction shall occur before any clearing and grading occurs, and
must not be built on an embankment in an active stream.
d. Incorporate temporary seeding, mulching, and/or earth dike per
installation procedures to reduce erosion of banks.
e. Design of outlet pipe and spill way shall be designed by an engineer
based on an analysis of the expected runoff flow rates from the site.
13. Pipe Slope Drains
a. Install pipes, sectional down drains, paved chutes, or clay tiles to carry
concentrated runoff from the top to the bottom of a slope without
causing erosion.
b. Inlets and outlets of drain shall be stabilized, and inlet properly
installed to ensure runoff does not bypass the inlet.
14. Subsurface Drains
a. Place a perforated pipe or conduit beneath the surface of the ground at
a designed depth and grade to drain an area with a high water table.
b. Use relief drains in a gridiron, herringbone, or random pattern to
dewater an area where the water table is high.
c. Place interceptor drains, as single pipes, to remove water where
sloping soils are excessively wet or subject to slippage.
d. Backfill with open granular, highly permeable soil immediately after
pipe is placed.
e. Stabilize outlet and ensure sediment-laden storm water runoff is
directed to a sediment trapping measure.
15. Temporary Stream Crossing
a. Construct a bridge or culvert across a stream or watercourse for shortterm use by construction vehicles or heavy equipment.
16. Temporary Storm Drain Diversion
a. Install a pipe to redirect an existing storm drain system or outfall
channel to discharge into a sediment trap or basin.
b. Measure shall remain in place while the area draining to the storm
drain is disturbed.
3.02
INSPECTIONS & MAINTENANCE
Project No. 0701-BS
Section 02370
Feb 07, 2014
Page 9 of 13
A.
Using Schedule E1 – ESC Inspection and Photograph Checklist for reference,
inspect all erosion and sedimentation control measures at least once each
week and following any significant storm event (0.5 inches of precipitation or
greater).
B.
All erosion and sedimentation control measures must be maintained in good
working order. If maintenance or repairs are identified they must be
completed within 24 hours.
C.
Schedule E2 – ESC Inspection Log (1.07B) must be completed for each
inspection.
D.
Inspection procedures specified below summarize the EPA document and shall
be followed in conjunction with details, drawings, and manufacturer
requirements.
1.
Stabilized Construction Entrance: Apply additional gravel as required,
remove sediments and other materials from all areas to minimize
clogging. Keep adjacent public roadway(s) free of sediment.
2.
Material Stockpile: Inspect for effective prevention of runoff and erosion.
3.
Temporary Seeding: If plants do not grow quickly or thick enough to
prevent erosion, reseed the area as soon as possible. Keep seeded areas
adequately moist. If irrigation is required, over-watering shall be avoided.
Phosphorus-containing fertilizers are not to be used.
4.
Permanent Seeding: Inspect for sufficient growth and water conditions.
Replant areas as per installation instructions (refer to 3.01C.2) if cover
does not provide erosion control.
5.
Mulching: Inspect to ensure mulching is not loose or removed. Apply
additional mulch or reseed if necessary. If mulch binder is required, apply
at rates specified by the manufacturer. Employ alternative controls if
current measures are not effective.
6.
Preservation of Natural Vegetation: Routine maintenance shall include
mowing, fertilizing, liming, irrigating, pruning, and weed and pest control,
depending on the specific species and environmental conditions. Remove
any debris, and ensure area is protected from traffic.
7.
Buffer Zones: Routine maintenance shall include mowing, fertilizing,
liming, irrigating, pruning, and weed and pest control, depending on the
specific species and environmental conditions. Remove any debris, and
ensure area is protected from traffic.
8.
Stream Bank Stabilization: Inspect for structural damage and repair as
required.
9.
Soil Retaining Measures: Inspect for structural damage and repair as
required.
10. Sod Stabilization: Remove and replace dead sod. Ensure area receives
sufficient water. If irrigation is required do not over-water.
11. Rolled Erosion Control Products (RECPs): Inspect for separation, cracks,
tears, and breaches. Ensure matting is in continuous contact with the soil.
Project No. 0701-BS
Section 02370
Feb 07, 2014
Page 10 of 13
12. Silt Fence: Silt fence to be inspected for depth of sediment, tears, loose
fabric attachment at the fence posts, channel erosion beneath fence,
sagging or collapse and to ensure the fence posts are firmly in the ground.
Built up sediment is to be removed from silt fence when it has reached
one-third the height of the fence. Repair such that fence is in original
installation condition.
13. Outlet Protection: Inspect outlet for erosion and pooling of water.
Necessary repairs to be made as required to reduce exit velocity of runoff.
If a riprap apron is used, inspect for riprap displacement and damage to
filter fabric.
14. Inlet Protection: Inspect that measures are in original installed condition.
Ensure measures are effectively trapping sediment. Remove accumulated
sediment and debris when it reaches ½ the design depth of the trap.
Repair protection measures as required.
15. Surface Roughening: Inspect for small eroded watercourses, as little as a
few inches deep, or washout of roughened grading. Fill, regrade, and
reseed immediately.
16. Check Dams: Inspect for sediment and debris accumulation and erosion of
sides. Sediment should be removed when it reaches one half the original
dam height. Repair dams as required.
17. Drainage Swale: Inspect for dips or low points along the swale where
water is pooling and ensure that runoff is being directed to sedimenttrapping measure used onsite.
18. Interceptor Dikes and Swales: For swales inspect for dips or low points
along the swale where water is pooling and ensure that runoff is being
directed to sediment-trapping measure used onsite. For dikes ensure
runoff is being directed to sediment-trapping measure used onsite and
that it is compacted and free of low points for water collection.
19. Earth Dike: Ensure runoff is being directed to sediment-trapping measure
used onsite and that it is compacted and free of low points for water
collection.
20. Gravel or Stone Filter Berm: Inspect for breach in structure caused by
vehicles and accumulated sediment. Replace filter material if needed, and
remove and properly dispose of accumulated sediment.
21. Sediment Trap: Remove sediment when it reaches 300mm in depth. If
outlet becomes clogged with sediment it must be cleaned to restore flow
capacity. Maintain until site area is permanently stabilized and/or
permanent structures are in place. Ensure bank is sufficiently compacted
and stabilized such that erosion into the basin does not occur.
22. Temporary Sediment Basin: Remove sediment when it reaches 300mm in
depth. If outlet becomes clogged with sediment it must be cleaned to
restore flow capacity. Maintain until site area is permanently stabilized
and/or permanent structures are in place. Ensure bank is sufficiently
compacted and stabilized such that erosion into the basin does not occur.
23. Pipe Slope Drains: Ensure runoff does not bypass the inlet, undercutting
the structure. Repair undercutting at inlet if needed. If required, install a
Project No. 0701-BS
Section 02370
Feb 07, 2014
Page 11 of 13
headwall, riprap, or sandbags around the inlet. Inspect pipes for leakage.
Repair leaks and restore damaged slopes. If evidence exists of pipe
movement, install additional anchor stakes to secure slope.
24. Subsurface Drains: Inspect for pipe breaks or clogging by sediment,
debris, or tree roots. Remove blockage immediately, replace any broken
sections, and re-stabilize the surface. Check inlets and outlets for
sediment or debris, and remove and dispose of these materials properly.
25. Temporary Stream Crossing: Inspect for structural deficiencies. Ensure
runoff is flowing through culvert, not between soil and outside edge of the
pipe.
26. Temporary Storm Drain Diversion: Ensure flow is being properly directed
towards sediment-trapping device. When construction is complete, move
diversion, flush storm drain prior to removal of sediment trap/basin,
stabilize outfall, and restore grade areas.
3.03
REMOVAL OF PRODUCTS
A.
Erosion and sedimentation control measures shall be maintained and inspected
until final landscaping is complete.
END OF SECTION
Project No. 0701-BS
Section 02370
Feb 07, 2014
Page 12 of 13
SCHEDULE E1 – ESC INSPECTION AND PHOTOGRAPH CHECKLIST
(Submit checklist with photos to Consultant after construction and prior to demobilization)
Project Name:
Completed By:
Project Location:
Company:
Conduct an inspection of all erosion and sedimentation control measures implemented
onsite each week and following any significant storm event (0.5 inches of precipitation or
greater). Record any maintenance or repair performed in Schedule E2 – ESC Inspection Log.
Photographs of each measure must be taken immediately following installation, in-situ and
at the end of construction.
ESC Measure
Date of Photo
Location Onsite
#1
#2
#3
Position
Date
Project No. 0701-BS
Section 02370
Feb 07, 2014
Page 13 of 13
SCHEDULE E2 – ESC INSPECTION LOG
(Complete weekly. Submit most recent copy to the Consultant on a monthly basis)
Project Name:
Completed By:
Project Location:
Company:
Erosion and Sedimentation Control Measures
Date
Ex.
Observations
Sept
17/06
Heavy rain night
before. Measures in
good condition.
Corrective Action
Taken
Deficiencies
Straw bale check
dam in northeast
swale deteriorated
New straw bale
installed in
northeast swale.
Initials
G.L.
Position
Date
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 02513
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING
Page 02513 - 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
here.
1.2
LEED Requirements
1.2.1
1.2.2
.1
1.3
Submittals
1.3.1
Samples: Submit two 300 x 300 mm coloured, textured asphalt samples to show colour and
texture for Architects approval of each asphalt area.
1.3.2
Erect a sample installation where designated on site, approximately 1500 x 1500 mm in
size. Mock-up to illustrate coloured and textured asphalt. Modify or replace mock-up to
obtain approval. After acceptance, retain mock-up as standard of quality for installation.
1.4
Quality Assurance
1.4.1
Paving work shall be done only by a Subcontractor with an accredited experience of at
least 10 years, and having skilled workmen, experienced foremen and suitable machinery.
1.5
Job Conditions
1.5.1
Environmental Temperature
.1
Commence laying of asphalt binder courses only when base surfaces are at least
1C and the temperature is rising.
.2
Commence laying of asphalt surface courses only when binder course surfaces are
completely dry, at least 7C, and the temperature is rising.
.3
Suspend paving operations if temperature drops below specified minimums.
1.6
Protection
1.6.1
Prevent vehicle or foot traffic over freshly-paved areas of asphalt for at least 24 hours
following completion. Barricade as required.
Project No. 0701-BS
1.6.2
SECTION 02513
Page 02513 - 2
Pave only in areas where no project earthwork or trucking is taking place.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
2.1.1
Asphaltic Concrete Paving: conforming to OPSS 1150, and consisting of a base course and
a surface course, in "HL" types as specified herein.
.1
Asphalt Cement: conforming to Specification Designation 85/100 in Table 1 of
OPSS 1101.
.2
Asphalt Primer: Liquid asphalt emulsion, slow drying for spray or brush
application.
2.2
Textured Asphalt Pavement: to be applied with imprinter designed to produce custom
texture as manufactured by IPC Integrated Paving Concepts or approved alternative.
Texture: Allow for two custom textures selected by Consultant.
2.2.1
Coloured Asphalt Coating: Provide high performance cementitous, epoxy modified,
acrylic based waterborne ‘StreetBond CemBase’ base coat and epoxy modified, acrylic
waterborne ‘StreetBond 150’ top coat by IPC Integrated Paving Concepts or approved
alternative. Colour: Allow for two custom colours selected by Consultant.
2.2.2
Granular Base and Subbase Courses: Conforming to OPSS Form 1010.
2.2.3
Filter Fabric: "Terrafix 270-R" by Terrafix Geosynthetics Inc., or approved equal.
2.2.4
Asphalt Sealer: Provide sealer to all new work in accordance with Section.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Inspection
3.1.1
Refer to Section 02200 of this Specification for subgrade conditions, field testing, and soil
investigation specified for project.
3.1.2
Ensure that subgrade work has been completed in accordance with Section 02200 of this
Specification, and that subgrade conditions are satisfactory for placing of pavements,
before commencing work.
3.1.3
Verify that subgrade densities as specified in Section 02200 of this Specification have been
attained under pavement locations.
3.2
Removals
3.2.1
Remove existing pavement or soil/granular and excavate subgrade as required to construct
new pavement structure.
3.2.2
Proof roll exposed subgrade, subexcavate weak areas and backfill with clean, approved
material capable of obtaining 100% Standard Maximum Dry density.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 02513
Page 02513 - 3
3.2.3
Remove surplus materials from the site at the end of each day's work.
3.3
Placing of Subbase and Base Courses
3.3.1
Proof roll earth subgrade in the presence of the Consultant in order to identify
inconsistencies or soft spots. Do not proceed with aggregate fill until inconsistencies or soft
spots have been rectified as approved by the Consultant.
3.3.2
Prior to the placement of granular material, compact the subgrade surface uniformly to
provide a minimum compaction of 98% Standard Proctor density. Compact top 300 mm to
98% Standard Proctor density. Grade the subsoil to catch basins and weeping tile in such a
manner that water will not pond beneath the pavement, nor flow back toward building.
3.3.3
Spread aggregate in 75 to 100 mm layers and shape accurately, finish by blading, and roll
to cross-section and profile required by drawings and specifications. Compact to 100%
Standard Proctor maximum dry density. Sprinkle water on base course ahead of
compacting machine to aid compaction or to reduce dust nuisance, or both.
3.3.4
Specified granular course thicknesses shall be the thickness after compaction to refusal.
3.3.5
Apply additional layers of aggregate to attain design depth.
3.3.6
Eliminate surface irregularities exceeding 13 mm under a 3000 mm long straight edge.
3.3.7
Shape base course at edges of asphalt pavement to form extended shoulder and to allow for
thickened asphalt edge band.
3.4
Placing of Pavement
3.4.1
Provide asphalt paved surfaces formed to lines and compacted thicknesses shown on the
Drawings. Preparation of the mix, transportation, methods of application and compaction
shall be in accordance with OPSS 310.
3.4.2
Asphaltic concrete paving shall be laid in thicknesses to match existing.
3.4.3
Finish pavement surfaces to elevations indicated on drawings.
3.4.4
Maintain accuracy of elevations to within specified tolerances.
3.4.5
Ensure that drainage is effected from all areas, without formation of puddles.
3.4.6
Inform Consultant if slopes to drains are less than 1% before commencing work, in order
that corrective methods may be considered.
3.4.7
Lay asphalt mixture only on dry bases from which foreign matter has been removed.
3.4.8
Deliver admixtures to site at minimum workable temperature. After spread, and before
initial rolling, temperature of mixture shall be no less than 110C.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 02513
Page 02513 - 4
3.4.9
Control spreader alignment by positive means, such as string lines set from grade stakes or
alignment stakes, or both. Place these controls on each side of pavement, or utilize other
approved methods so that spreader is not guided by edges of preceding courses.
3.4.10
Locate containers carrying fuel oil to clean shovels, rakes, or brooms, on pavers where they
will not drip or splash oil on freshly-laid asphalt.
3.4.11
Adjust course widths so that centre joints of successive courses do not coincide.
3.5
Finishing Asphalt Surfaces
3.5.1
Compact asphalt in accordance with requirements of OPSS Form 310 to 96% Marshall
density.
3.5.2
Smooth out surface irregularities to within a tolerance of 6 mm under a 3000 mm straight
edge.
3.5.3
Roll asphalt to a smooth, dense, uniform surface with a heavy steel tandem roller.
Manually tamp areas around manholes, walls and other inaccessible areas to produce
surfaces matching rolled areas. Use a light roller for walks or other confined areas of lightduty pavement.
3.5.4
Roll asphalt across the direction it is spread.
3.6
Finishing Asphalt Pavement Edges
3.6.1
Trim exposed edges to neat, straight lines.
3.6.2
Correct alignment and grade irregularities at edges of pavement by addition or removal of
asphalt mixture before rolling.
3.6.3
Form a thickened edge band of asphalt to strengthen exposed pavement edges.
3.7
Joints in Asphalt Pavement
3.7.1
Make transverse and longitudinal joints, and joints between new and old work precisely
and carefully. Make sawcuts where services are installed under existing pavement.
3.7.2
Make joints by keying or butting, and bond them well.
3.7.3
Provide bond between new and old pavements, or between work of successive days by
cutting through full depth of older course to expose a clean, vertical surface. Clean and
remove loose or broken material and seal with asphalt emulsion. Paint all surfaces against
which all joints are to be made with a thin, uniform, and continuous coat of joint painting
material. Place hot admixture of new pavement against joint, and rake to required depth
and grade.
3.7.4
Do not scatter excess material derived from joint making on freshly-laid asphalt. Remove it
from site.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 02513
Page 02513 - 5
3.8
Asphalt Pavement Topping
3.8.1
Provide 25 mm thick topping in locations as indicated on drawings, conforming to the
requirements within this Section.
3.9
Textured Asphalt Pavement
3.9.1
Textured work shall be applied with imprinter designed to produce custom texture as
indicated on drawings and as manufactured by IPC Integrated Paving Concepts or
approved alternative.
3.9.2
Heat up asphalt surfaces to be textured to manufacturers recommended temperatures to a
minimum depth of 12 mm without burning pavement surface.
3.9.3
Place templates in position and press into surface using vibratory plate compactors until top
of template is flush with surrounding asphalt pavement and then shall be removed.
3.10
Coloured Asphalt Pavement Coating
3.10.1
Apply two coats of asphalt pavement base coat and two coats of asphalt pavement top coat
to clean, dry pavement in thicknesses as recommended by manufacturer.
3.10.2
Provide first base coating to asphalt and broom coating into asphalt.
3.10.3
All remaining coating shall be applied than broomed or rolled, allowing each coating to dry
prior to application of next coating.
3.10.4
Protect coating work from traffic until dry.
3.11
Work Outside The Property Line
3.11.1
Where the work of asphalt paving joins into municipal paving all work shall conform to
local municipal standards. Unless detailed otherwise carry paving from the street to the
new paving inside the property line. Obtain all pertinent details and specifications before
the work begins and make arrangements for inspections by municipality field supervisors.
Additionally, take 2 photographs each of the existing work and the completed work. Photos
shall be in 8" x 10" size taken from 2 different angles.
3.12
Field Quality Control
3.12.1
An independent testing and inspection firm will carry out testing and inspection to verify
conformance of work to the specifications. The testing and inspection firm will be chosen
by the Consultant and paid from the Cash Allowance.
3.12.2
Notify the testing company when it is ready for tests. The testing and inspection firm will
be responsible for all tests taken and will ensure that paving meets with its approval.
3.12.3
Testing and inspection will be in four stages as described herein, and in sufficient site visits
to ensure satisfactory results but in no case less than four site visits. Additional visits to site
due to faulty performance by the Contractor shall be made at no expense to the Owner.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 02513
Page 02513 - 6
3.12.4
The testing company must be completely satisfied in the performance of the Contractor at
each stage, before giving approval to that Contractor to proceed to the next stage.
3.12.5
The Owner expects the testing company to test within sixteen (16) hours from the time
called to do so by the Contractor, since paving is a critical item at the end of the project.
3.13
Stages of Inspection
.1
Stage 1: Visual inspection of site preparation and marking.
.2
Stage 2: Inspection of subgrade.
.3
Stage 3
.4
.5
3.13.2
.1
Inspection of granular subbase and base (after each layer is placed or after
both layers are placed and compacted).
.2
On-site density tests.
.3
Checking of thickness of various levels. (Minimum of four (4) checks
shall be done on thickness in a paved area of 232 sq.m. or less, and one
(1) additional check for each additional 232 sq.m. or part thereof).
.4
Laboratory tests re: moisture content and grading of materials.
Stage 4
.1
Inspection of asphalt installation.
.2
Checking of thickness and density of material and checking suitability of
equipment used.
.3
Further carry out grain size analysis and Marshall test if visual inspection
is not satisfactory or, if there is reason to suspect that the materials
supplied are not acceptable. The cost of these two tests shall be borne by
the Contractor.
.4
Do all laboratory tests according to ASTM methods, latest revisions.
Grading Tables: Submit grading tables of the materials used to the Consultant for
approval. The testing company shall ensure that the material delivered complies
with the grading tables.
Cooperate fully with the testing and inspection firm.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 02583
EXTERIOR CONCRETE
Page 02583 - 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
here.
1.1.2
Refer to Contract Drawing GP-S-001 Structural General Notes, including items 010000
General, 010001 Design Notes, 030000 Concrete
1.2
LEED Requirements
1.2.1
1.2.2
.1
1.3
Work Included In This Section
1.3.1
Concrete sidewalks, curbs, concrete base for asphalt paving, and other poured-in-place
work not connected to, and not forming part of the building structure unless noted or
specified otherwise. Conform in general to requirements of Section 03300 unless otherwise
called for in this section or noted on drawings.
1.3.2
1.3.3
Law Society of Upper Canada must be notified of any work being carried out adjacent to
their buildings and must be coordinated with the Law Society of Upper Canada.
1.4
1.4.1
CAN/CSA-A5/A8/A362-M88
1.4.2
CAN/CSA-A23.1-04/A23.2-0-most recent issue
Portland Cement/Masonry Cement/Blended Hydraulic
Cement
Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete
Construction/Methods of Test for Concrete
1.4.3
CAN3-A266.1-M78
Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
1.4.4
CAN3-A266.2-M78
Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
1.4.5
G30.1-18-M92
Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 02583
EXTERIOR CONCRETE
Page 02583 - 2
1.4.6
OPSS 1010
Ontario
Provincial
Standard
Specifications,
Aggregates-Granular A,B,M and Select Subgrade
Material.
1.5
Submittals
1.5.1
Concrete Mix: Submit details of proposed concrete mix for review by Consultant, well in
advance of first pour.
1.5.2
Inspection Laboratory Reports: Submit inspection laboratory reports specified under Field
Quality Control herein. Submit a copy of reports for each test directly to Consultant.
Include in reports all results and a statement as to whether or not the materials comply with
the Specification. Submit concrete cylinder test reports on a form similar to Appendix ‘B’
of CAN/CSA-A23.2.
1.5.3
Mockup: Provide colour test samples, up to three in total, for areas of exposed concrete
Samples are to be 1m x 1m and include sandblast range and saw cut joints. Sample paved
section shall be approved in writing by the Consultant before concrete is installed in any
permanent location.
1.6
Environmental Conditions
1.6.1
When concrete is placed while temperatures are lower than 4C, or are likely to go below
4C, the freshly-placed concrete must be protected from freezing by adequate coverings
(i.e. tarpaulins) and the addition of heat.
1.6.2
Concrete when placed shall have a temperature of not less than 21C for the first three
days, or 10C for five days. Concrete temperature at no time shall exceed 37C. No
calcium chloride will be allowed in the mix.
1.6.3
Protect freshly laid concrete from damage by rain. Provide impermeable covering material
to protect surfaces in case of rain. Extend protective coverings over edges of concrete and
arrange so as not to bear on unprotected edges.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
2.1.1
In accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1 and the following:
.1
Water: Verify that no salts are present which will cause efflorescence.
.2
Cement: Type 10 Normal Portland cement, conforming to CAN/CSA-A5.
.3
Aggregate: Natural sand, gravel, or crushed rock. CAN/CSA-A23.1 shall govern
for approval and control of fine and coarse aggregates and their grading.
Maximum coarse aggregate size of 20 mm.
.4
Water-Reducing Admixture: Conforming to CAN3-A266.2, Type WN.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 02583
EXTERIOR CONCRETE
Page 02583 - 3
.5
Air-Entraining Admixture: Conforming to CAN3-A266.1.
.6
Joint Filler: Non-asphaltic, premoulded fibre joint filler that is compatible with
sealants, non-rotting, and with a 70% minimum recovery after compression. For
expansion joints, use polyethylene backer rod (rope).
.7
Sealer: "Euco-Guard 100" by Euclid Canada Inc.
.8
Sealant: "Sealtight Pourthane" by W.R. Meadows or "Vulken 245" by Mameco.
For joints to be covered with asphalt paving, use No. 158 cold applied sealant by
W.R. Meadows or other approved manufacture.
.9
Granular Base: Granular ‘A’ material conforming to OPSS 1010.
.10
Reinforcing Bars: billet steel with a yield strength of 400 MPa conforming to CSA
G30.18-M92.
.11
Formwork: Steel or plywood to provide a smooth finish to concrete.
.12
Bonding Agent: Sternson "ST-432" epoxy adhesive, for bonding new concrete to
existing concrete.
2.1.2
Colour admixture: Pre-bagged colour additive consisting of pre-blended synthetic iron
oxide pigments with dispersing agents. Colour: to be selected by Consultant. ‘Chromix’ by
L. M. Scofield Company or approved alternative by Davis Colors or Elementis.Mixing
2.1.3
Mix concrete in accordance with reviewed mix design.
2.1.4
Incorporate the following in the mix in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
.1
A water-reducing admixture.
.2
An air-entraining admixture to provide 5% to 8% air, as determined by CAN/CSAA23.1, Table 8. Mix admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
2.1.5
All concrete shall be Type C2 as defined by Table 8 of CAN/CSA-A23.1 (32 MPa
concrete).
2.1.6
Incorporate colour loading up to a maximum 5% based upon dry cementitious mix weight.
Colour added to mix on job site 20 minutes prior to pour. Cement and aggregate to
produce concrete matching reviewed sample.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Examination
3.1.1
Refer to Section 02200 of this Specification for grading, compaction and backfilling
requirements, field testing, and soil investigation specified for project.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 02583
EXTERIOR CONCRETE
Page 02583 - 4
3.1.2
Ensure that grading and backfilling has been completed in accordance with Section 02200
of this Specification, and that subgrade conditions are satisfactory for placing of
pavements, before commencing work.
3.1.3
Verify that subgrade densities as specified in Section 02200 of this Specification have been
attained under pavement locations.
3.1.4
Ensure that no water is present on beds where concrete work is to be placed. Place concrete
only on frost-free ground. Remove previously frozen bearing surfaces.
3.2
Placing of Subbase and Base Courses
3.2.1
Proof roll earth subgrade in the presence of the Consultant in order to identify
inconsistencies or soft spots. Do not proceed with aggregate fill until inconsistencies or soft
spots have been rectified as approved by the Consultant.
3.2.2
Prior to placing granular material, compact the subgrade surface uniformly to provide a
minimum compaction of 95% Standard Proctor density. Compact top 300 mm to 98%
Standard Proctor density. Grade and crown the subsoil grade in such a manner that water
will not pond beneath the pavement.
3.2.3
Spread aggregate in 75 to 100 mm layers and shape accurately, finish by blading, and roll
to cross-section and profile required by drawings and specifications. Compact to 100%
Standard Proctor maximum dry density. Sprinkle water on base course ahead of
compacting machine to aid compaction or to reduce dust nuisance, or both.
3.2.4
Specified granular course thicknesses shall be the thickness after compaction to refusal.
3.2.5
Apply additional layers of aggregate to attain design depth.
3.2.6
Eliminate surface irregularities exceeding 13 mm under a 3000 mm long straight edge.
3.2.7
Unless detailed otherwise granular layer under sidewalks shall be 200 mm thick.
3.3
Bonding Agent
3.3.1
Where new concrete toppings are applied over existing concrete, prepare surfaces and
apply bonding agent in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.4
Placing of Concrete
3.4.1
Place concrete in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1.
3.4.2
Do not place concrete when it is raining, or likely to rain. If rain begins after concrete is
placed, and before it is set, protect with waterproof covers until set.
3.4.3
Use only tools and handling equipment that are absolutely clean of rust, salts, and other
harmful materials to avoid efflorescence and staining.
3.4.4
Unless detailed otherwise sidewalks shall be minimum 125 mm thick.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 02583
EXTERIOR CONCRETE
Page 02583 - 5
3.5
Joints
3.5.1
Provide joints in concrete as indicated on drawings, providing the following as a minimum:
expansion joints at 6000 mm maximum o.c., and control joints midway between expansion
joints.
3.5.2
In sidewalk slabs and curbs, provide dummy joints between the 1200 mm control joints.
Provide temporary rope in-fill to control joints until after sealant has been applied.
3.5.3
Provide 13 mm wide expansion joint filler where concrete abuts any part of a vertical
surface. Seal top of joint filler with caulking compound tooled flush with concrete.
3.5.4
When sidewalk is adjacent to curb, make joints of curb, gutters and sidewalk coincide.
3.6
Finish
3.6.1
Finish concrete sidewalk slabs and curbs with sandblasted finish. Refer to Section 03353
for sandblasting of concrete.
3.7
Curing and Sealing
3.7.1
Moist cure concrete for 7 consecutive days minimum and allow to dry. Seal the entire
surface of concrete with two coats of sealer in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
3.7.2
Remove temporary rope in-fill in expansion joints, or alternatively, push into joint allowing
13 mm depth of joint to be caulked. Apply sealant to joints per manufacturer's directions.
Prime sides as required. Ensure that rope in-fill is of the bond breaker type, otherwise,
provide separate bond breaker type to prevent 3-point adhesion of sealant.
3.7.3
Fill control joints in concrete slab to receive asphalt paving using specified cold applied
sealant.
3.8
3.8.1
Engage an inspection and testing laboratory, to be chosen at a later date by the Consultant,
to conduct the following tests in accordance with the noted CSA standards. Payment for
inspection and testing will be made from a cash allowance.
3.8.2
Take three control cylinders from each pour and not less than three from each 100 cubic
metres of concrete. Make, handle, and store cylinders in accordance with the "Making and
Curing Concrete Compression and Flexure Test Specimens" of CAN/CSA-A23.2. The
inspection laboratory shall take the actual concrete samples on the site. Make air-entraining
tests in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.2 for each pour of exterior work specified under
Article "Mixing".
3.8.3
For the purpose of determining consistency of concrete in the field, provide a metal mould
in the form described in CAN/CSA-A23.2 and make slump tests in the manner described in
CAN/CSA-A23.2 for each set of compression test cylinders.
Project No. 0701-BS
3.8.4
SECTION 02583
EXTERIOR CONCRETE
Page 02583 - 6
Additional cylinders, or other methods required by the Contractor to validate early
stripping, will be paid for by the Contractor.
* * *
END OF SECTION
2014 May 23
PART 1:
1.1
GENERAL
.1
The General Conditions of the Contract, Supplementary General Conditions, and the
General Requirements of Division 1, form part of this section, and must be read in
conjunction with the requirements of this section, and all related sections.
.2
The work of this section, and related work specified in other sections shall comply with all
requirements of Division 1 – General Requirements.
.3
Provide all material and labour required for the completion of the Contract. Breakdown of
Work by Section is for guidance only and is not necessarily complete.
.4
Work Furnished and Installed:
i.
1.2
.2
1.4
All cast-in-place concrete.
STANDARDS, CODES AND ACTS
.1
1.3
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Section 03300
Page 1 of 8
Conform with the Ontario Building Code 2006 under O. Reg. 403/97, and amendments
O. Reg. 22,102 and 122/98, O. Reg. 152,278,593 and 597/99, O. Reg. 205/00, O. Reg.
283/01, O. Reg. 220/02, O. Reg. 304 and 305/03, O. Reg. 23 and 245/04 and O. Reg.
145, 146, 236 and 389/05 and any other applicable acts of any authority having
jurisdiction and the following:
i.
CAN/CSA-A23.1-04, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction,
Canadian Standards Association.
ii.
CSA-A23.3-04, Design of Concrete Structures for Buildings, Canadian Standards
Association.
iii.
ASTM C260-01, Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for
Concrete, ASTM International.
iv.
CAN/CSA-S269.3-M92 (R2003) - Concrete Formwork, Canadian Standards
Association.
Where there are differences between the specifications, drawings, codes, standards or
acts, the most stringent shall govern.
TOLERANCES
.1
Perform placing operations so that completed work will be within the tolerances set out in
CAN/CSA-A23.1.
.2
These tolerances are acceptable with regard to visual and structural requirements.
Interfacing tolerances may not be compatible with the above. Review and coordinate
interfacing tolerances so that the various elements come together properly.
CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
.1
Design of Mix
060449
2014 May 23
1.5
Section 03300
Page 2 of 8
i.
Design the mix in accordance with CSA – A23.1 so that concrete will be
homogeneous, uniformly workable, and readily placeable into corners and angles
of forms and around reinforcement by the methods of placing and consolidation
employed on the work, but without permitting materials to segregate or excessive
free water to collect on the surface. The concrete, when hardened, shall have
the qualities specified.
ii.
Cement Type: 10 Normal.
iii.
Specified Strength: As called for on drawings.
iv.
Water Cement Ratio, Slump and Air Content: As called for on the Drawings.
These requirements are for concrete at the point of placing.
v.
Nominal Size of Coarse Aggregate: 20 mm.
vi.
Admixtures: Type WN water reducing admixture.
vii.
Fly Ash: Except as noted above, cementing materials for concrete shall contain
40% fly ash by mass. Do not use fly ash in concrete that will be exposed to view
and in concrete that will be exposed to freeze-thaw cycles or de-icing chemicals.
viii.
Do not use recycled concrete aggregate in slabs or in concrete exposed to view.
Except as noted, recycled concrete shall constitute up to 100% of the coarse
aggregate for concrete.
ix.
Use of calcium chloride is not permitted.
x.
Each type of architectural concrete may have a custom tint to be specified by the
Consultant.
xi.
Concrete mix for cast-in-place curbs to be designed to meet the requirements in
this section, as well as to match the colour, mix and finish of the precast concrete
curbs & caps.
xii.
Obtain cementitious materials from same source throughout.
ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
.1
All concrete exposed to view is to be considered architectural concrete.
.2
Quality of Finish:
i.
The quality of finish shall be such that when the forms are stripped, it meets the
standards set out below, without further finishing work other than treatment of tie
holes and clean-up.
ii.
Dense, even concrete free of major defects such as deep or extreme
honeycombing, inconsistencies in plane, severe cold joint lines and major loss of
fines. Minor imperfections may be acceptable. Major defects will necessitate
replacement. The judgement as to what constitutes major or minor defects will be
the Consultant's. Patching will not be permitted and if used, will constitute a
major defect. Repairs, i.e. removal of sections of a member, may be carried out if
060449
2014 May 23
Section 03300
Page 3 of 8
approved by the Consultant, but the repair shall match the colour and texture of
the surrounding concrete.
1.6
iii.
Concrete members of generally uniform colour.
iv.
Concrete members with sharp, accurate definition at corners, arrises, reglets and
the like, generally free of chipped or spalled areas and within dimensional
tolerances set out in CAN/CSA-S269.3. Members shall be visually straight.
v.
Plane surfaces without protuberances, indentations, ridges or bulges.
vi.
Under no circumstances shall repair to any architectural concrete be undertaken
without the consultant's consent will be classified as defective Work and the
consultant may require their removal and replacement.
SAMPLES AND ASSISTANCE
.1
.2
Concrete Test Cylinders
i.
Cooperate in the execution of the concrete cylinder testing program. Furnish
concrete required, protect specimens against injury and loss, and assist in the
sampling and storage of specimens.
ii.
Sample concrete and cast cylinders in accordance with CAN/CSA-A.23.1 where
directed by the Consultant.
iii.
In accordance with requirements of CAN/CSA-A.23.1, provide storage facilities
for the initial 24 hours of site storage of all cylinders and the subsequent site
storage of field cured cylinders. Suitably equip the 24 hour storage facility with
humidity and temperature control equipment and maximum/minimum
thermometers. It shall be sufficiently large to handle the maximum number of
cylinders required at any one time.
iv.
Provide sufficient field curing storage facilities so that cylinders representing the
various areas can be safely stored in locations representing the curing conditions
for those areas. Move the field-cured cylinder storage facilities from area to area
as the work progresses.
Cold Weather Concreting Plan
i.
Submit for review a plan for cold weather concreting. Included as a minimum:
•
Curing period for concrete selected if accelerators are to be used to
reduce the length of time winter heat is required.
•
Method of application of winter heat to the concrete for the initial curing
period, be it through construction of a heated enclosure or other means.
•
Method of protection of the concrete for the balance of the curing period,
be it through the use of insulating blankets, straw, fill or other methods.
•
Method of pre-heating of embedded elements such as reinforcing steel
and cast-in inserts.
060449
2014 May 23
1.7
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit the following for review by the Consultant:
.2
Certificates
i.
1.8
Prior to beginning work and when any change in materials or source of supply is
proposed, provide the following certificates prepared by an approved inspection
company. The cost of this work shall be borne by the Contractor.
•
Certification that aggregates and cements proposed for the work comply
with requirements of specifications and CSA-A.23.3.
•
Certification that compressive strength, water-cement ratio, slump,
entrained air content and other specified properties will be met, using the
proposed mixes.
•
Give proportions by dry weight of cement, coarse and fine aggregate,
type and amount of admixture or air entraining agents, and water-cement
ratio, for the mix proposed for each class of concrete.
•
State for each mix if fly ash is used in lieu of cement.
•
Verification that air entraining admixtures is compatible with water
reducing admixtures.
.1
Separate and recycle waste material sin accordance with Section 01740 Cleaning and
Waste Management.
.2
Use trigger operated spray nozzles for water hoses.
.3
Designate a cleaning area for tools to limit water use and runoff. Cleaning area should
be a portion of the site which is be paved at a later date.
.4
Carefully coordinate the specified concrete work with weather conditions.
.5
Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely for disposal away from people.
.6
Prevent plasticizers, water-reducing agents and air-entraining agents from entering
drinking water supplies or streams. Using appropriate safety precautions collect liquid or
solidify liquid with an inert, non-combustible material and remove for disposal. Dispose of
all waste in accordance with applicable local, provincial and national regulations.
.7
Choose least harmful, appropriate cleaning method which will perform adequately.
PART 2:
2.1
Section 03300
Page 4 of 8
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
060449
2014 May 23
.1
Concrete
i.
Conform to CAN/CSA-A.23.1.
ii.
Comply with section 01611 LEED Product Requirements (minimum 25% SCM
where applicable).
iii.
Concrete supplier should provide RMCAO LEED letter based on Technical
Bulletin T-030.
.2
Coarse Aggregate: from locally quarried non-alkali reactive rock, Mineral or Air-cooled
Blast Furnace Slag
.3
Recycled Concrete Coarse Aggregate: Clean, hard, strong, durable particles, free of
absorbed chemicals, coatings and other fine materials, crushed from aggregate having a
compressive strength not less than 35 MPa
.4
Supplementary Cementing Materials: Type F Fly Ash to CAN/CSA-A23.5
.5
Cementitious Hydraulic Slag: to CAN/CSA-A363
.6
Water: to CAN/CSA-A23.1
.7
Admixtures: Air entraining agents or water reducing admixtures conforming to CSA
CAN3-A266.1.
.8
Chemical admixtures: to ASTM C494. Consultant to approve accelerating or set
retarding admixtures during cold and hot weather placing.
.9
Concrete retarders: to ASTM C494 water based, low VOC, solvent free. Do not allow
moisture of any kind to come in contact with the retarder film.
.10
Curing Compound: Water based curing compound conforming to CSA-A.23.1. such as
Cure & Seal 30 EF by Dayton/Richmond.
.11
Corrosion Inhibitor: DCI Corrosion Inhibitor, Type S, at a concentration of 11 litres/cubic
metre of concrete, as manufactured by W.R Grace and Co., Cambridge, MA, USA or
approved equivalent.
.12
Expansion Joint Filler: Asphalt impregnated fibre board, ½” thick unless noted otherwise;
ASTM D1751.
.13
Additional criteria for Architectural concrete:
i.
PART 3:
3.1
Section 03300
Page 5 of 8
Colour pigment: Chromix Admixture by L.M. Scofield or by Davis or by Elementis
or approved alternate. Finished concrete colour at curbs to match precast curbs.
Colour at planter to match historic precast spandrel panels/guard rail. Finished
concrete colour at paving to match adjacent paver units. Finished concrete
colour at furniture bases to be selected.
EXECUTION
CONSTRUCTION AND CONTROL JOINTS
060449
2014 May 23
3.2
3.3
Section 03300
Page 6 of 8
.1
Obtain approval from the Consultant for location and details of construction joints not
shown.
.2
Place joint filler vertical in position in straight lines. Secure to formwork during placement
of concrete. Recess top of filler 6mm for sealant placement. Do not tool border at
jointing or edges.
.3
Maximum spacing of control joints to be 4800mm.
PLACING CONCRETE
.1
Conform to requirements of CAN/CSA-A.23.1 and the following:
.2
Immediately before placing concrete, clean forms and reinforcement of foreign matter.
.3
During hot weather conditions, do not use concrete mixed more than 1 hour after
introduction of mixing water or 1-1/2 hours during other periods.
.4
Allow 24 hours minimum after placing concrete in columns, piers or walls before placing
concrete in beams or slabs supported thereon.
.5
Ensure waterproof membranes are not damaged during placing of concrete over them.
.6
Remove concrete spilled onto forms around hoisting equipment before depositing
concrete in these areas.
PROTECTION
.1
General
i.
.2
Conform to the requirements of CAN/CSA-A.23.1 and the following to protect
freshly deposited concrete from freezing, premature drying and extremes of
temperature. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at a relatively
constant temperature for the period of time necessary for the hydration of the
cement and to achieve the specified strength of the concrete.
Cold Weather Concreting
i.
Between the 15th of October of any year and the 15th of April of the following
year, provide on hand and ready for use all equipment necessary for adequate
cold weather protection and curing before concrete placement is begun.
ii.
When fresh concrete is to be cast against existing concrete, prevent the loss of
heat by extending the protection for the fresh concrete at least 600 mm over the
existing.
iii.
Insulate, or enclose within the protective housing, tie rods, reinforcement or metal
which projects from the concrete being protected.
iv.
Construct enclosures tight and safe for wind and snow loadings.
v.
Maintain housing, enclosures and supplementary heat in place for entire period
of protection, except that sections may be temporarily removed as required to
permit placing additional forms or concrete provided the uncovered concrete is
060449
2014 May 23
Section 03300
Page 7 of 8
not permitted to freeze. Make up time lost from the required period of protection
at the required temperature before protection is discontinued and removed.
.3
3.4
3.5
Dispose heating units to avoid heating concrete locally or drying it excessively.
Avoid high temperature and dry heating within enclosures.
vii.
Take particular care to maintain edges and corners of concrete at the required
temperature owing to their greater vulnerability to freezing.
Protection of Completed Work
i.
At all times during the work, protect exposed concrete, exposed masonry and
other exposed members from staining or becoming coated with concrete leakage
due to continuing concreting operations. Members which become coated may be
classed as defective work by the Consultant.
ii.
Protect exposed members from staining due to rusting of reinforcement
projecting beyond construction joints.
iii.
The application of de-icing salts on completed work is not permitted.
iv.
During the curing period, take suitable measures to protect the surface of the
concrete from pitting and loss of fines due to rain.
OPENINGS THROUGH COMPLETED MEMBERS
.1
Do not cut openings through completed members without the Consultant's approval.
.2
Where the location of openings is approved, mark their position on each side of members
to be perforated. In the case of slabs over 75 mm thick, cut two-thirds of the thickness by
drilling from the top and remaining one-third by drilling from the bottom. Drill walls
similarly from each side.
.3
Where the location of openings is approved, locate the reinforcing by x-ray, cover meter
or other positive means and adjust the location of the opening so that no reinforcement is
cut unless specifically approved otherwise in writing by the Consultant.
.4
Maintain the axis of the hole at right angles to the surface of the member.
MAKING GOOD
.1
3.6
vi.
Where directed by the Consultant, make good temporary openings left in concrete
construction around pipes, ducts and the like using a mortar of the same proportions as
the surrounding work. Reinforce mortar with mesh or the like where openings exceed 75
mm. Roughen existing surfaces to receive mortar or apply suitable bonding agent such
that mortar will be securely bonded to existing concrete.
TREATMENT OF FORMED SURFACES NOT DESIGNATED AS ARCHITECTURAL
CONCRETE
.1
General
060449
2014 May 23
.2
Section 03300
Page 8 of 8
i.
After stripping for forms, the bared surface of concrete will be inspected by the
Consultant. Do not proceed with repairs or surface treatment to concrete prior to
the Consultant's inspection.
ii.
After the Consultant's inspection, remove or cut back 25 mm, bolts, ties, nails or
other metal not specifically required for construction purposes.
iii.
Where no serious defects are revealed by the Consultant's inspection, cut out
areas of moderate honeycombing to sound concrete. Saturate the affected
areas with water but leave surface dry (no standing water) and fill with cement
mortar of the same general composition as that used in the concrete.
iv.
Where serious defects are found, such as large voids or extensive
honeycombing, repair the defect as directed by the Consultant.
v.
Where surfaces are to be, damp-proofed, waterproofed or similarly finished,
remove fins, ridges or bulges which would interfere with the application of the
final finishes.
vi.
Remove traces of form lining compound from concrete surfaces which may affect
the bonding of following surface application.
Surfaces Exposed to View
i.
In addition to the above requirements, go over the surface, remove ties, nails,
timber, inserts, minor imperfections, leaving the surface clean.
ii.
Where major defects are revealed, repair as the Consultant directs.
iii.
Where in the Consultant's opinion defects are minor, repair as follows or as the
Consultant may otherwise direct. Cut out affected areas, saturate cut-out areas,
voids, pit holes and form tie holes with water and fill with a cement mortar
containing an approved type of latex bonding agent. Affected areas should be
saturated but surface dry. Mortar mix and application shall be in accordance with
the recommendations of the manufacturers of the bonding agent.
iv.
After the mortar stiffens, wipe the whole surface clean such that no material
remains on the surface, except that within the voids and such that finished
surface is clean and smooth. Cure the patched areas by keeping moist for at
least 7 days.
v.
Where directed by the Consultant, power wash concrete surfaces to remove
surface imperfections remaining after the treatment noted above has been
carried out.
060449
Project No. 0701
SECTION 03353
SANDBLASTING
Page 03353 - 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
here.
1.2
LEED Requirements
1.2.1
1.2.2
.1
1.3
Protection
1.3.1
Provide all necessary protection to building and materials which are not scheduled to
receive sandblasting. Provide portable enclosures as required to contain sand drifting.
1.4
Submittals
1.4.1
Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating the proposed methods of protecting
adjacent building elements.
1.4.2
Samples: Submit 300 x 300 mm samples of each type of sandblasting on each colour of
concrete for approval by Consultant prior to starting work.
1.5
Quality Assurance
1.5.1
Perform Work of this Section by a company that has adequate equipment, skilled
tradesmen, and a minimum of five years proven experience in abrasive blast cleaning on
projects of a similar size and nature. Submit to Consultant substantiating information as
proof of compliance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Abrasives
2.1.1
Silica sand free from deleterious substances such as fine clay particles.
Project No. 0701
SECTION 03353
SANDBLASTING
Page 03353 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Review of Construction
3.1.1
Review of construction to ensure work does not proceed in error.
3.2
Sandblasting
3.2.1
Allow for three degrees of sandblasting for precast concrete elements as defined below:
3.2.2
.1
Light sandblast: Breaks surface to expose mainly fine aggregates and takes sheen
off precast face removing enough matrix (cement mix) to yield uniform
appearance. Depth of exposure to be approximately 1.0 mm. Perform finish just
prior to being loaded on truck for delivery to project site.
.2
Medium sandblast: Expose both fine and coarse aggregate. Depth of exposure to
be approximately 1.0 mm to 2.0 mm. Perform finish day after casting and then
touch up prior to loading on truck for delivery to project site.
.3
Heavy sandblast: Expose coarse aggregate and give a lot more relief in panel
finish. Depth of exposure to be approximately 3.0 mm to 5.0 mm. Perform finish
day after casting and then touch up prior to loading on truck for delivery to project
site.
Allow for three degrees of sandblasting for cast-in-place concrete elements as defined
below:
.1
Light sandblast: Breaks surface to expose mainly fine aggregates and takes sheen
off precast face removing enough matrix (cement mix) to yield uniform
appearance. Depth of exposure to be approximately 1.0 mm.
.2
Medium sandblast: Expose both fine and coarse aggregate. Depth of exposure to
be approximately 1.0 mm to 2.0 mm.
.3
Heavy sandblast: Expose coarse aggregate and give a lot more relief in panel
finish. Depth of exposure to be approximately 3.0 mm to 5.0 mm.
3.2.3
Schedule the sandblasting work with the Contractor.
3.2.4
Sandblast concrete benches, stairs and existing concrete as indicated on drawings to
remove all dirt, stains and debris.
3.3
Cleaning
3.3.1
Remove all protection, dirt, abrasive, and stains, and leave in clean condition.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 04200
MASONRY
Page 04200 - 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
here.
1.1.2
Refer to Contract Drawings A-003 General Notes.
1.1.3
Refer to Contract Drawing GP-S-001 Structural General Notes, including items 010000
General, 010001 Design Notes, 040000 Concrete
1.2
LEED Requirements
1.2.1
1.2.2
.1
1.3
1.3.1
CSA-A23.1-04/A23.2-04
Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete
Construction/Methods of Test and Standard Practices
for Concrete
1.3.2
CSA-A165 Series-04
CSA Standards on Concrete Masonry Units
1.3.3
CSA A179-04
Mortar and Grout for Unit Masonry
1.3.4
CAN3-S304.1-04
Masonry Design for Buildings (Limit States Design)
1.3.5
CAN3-A370-04
Connectors for Masonry
1.3.6
CAN3-A371-04
Masonry Construction for Buildings
1.3.7
ASTM C270-05a
Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.
1.4
Standard Of Work And Tolerances
1.4.1
Conform to CSA-S304 "Masonry Design for Buildings". Lay masonry to CSA-A371
including Appendix ‘H’.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 04200
MASONRY
Page 04200 - 2
1.5
Submittals
1.5.1
Test Reports: Before delivery of masonry, submit to Consultant, test reports of an
independent inspection laboratory, verifying that masonry proposed conforms to these
Specifications. Similarly submit results of mortar tests.
1.6
Product Delivery, Storage and Handling
1.6.1
Supplement Clause 5.16 of CSA-A371 as follows:
.1
Ensure that materials are delivered to job site in dry condition.
.2
Keep materials dry until use.
.3
Store under waterproof cover on pallets or plank platforms held off ground by
means of plank or timber skids.
1.7
Cold Weather and Protection Requirements
1.7.1
Conform to CSA-A371. In particular take notice of clause 5.16.1.2 "Protection When Work
is not in Progress".
1.7.2
In extremely hot weather perform the following:
.1
Plan in advance for hot weather construction.
.2
Remove plastic wrap from cubes of masonry upon arrival at site, to allow air
circulation.
.3
Cover masonry piles with plywood boards or tarps.
.4
Spread only enough mortar to permit soft setting of masonry units.
.5
Discard mortar not used within 2 hours. Do not retemper.
.6
Use line blocks or line stretchers to string masons line.
.7
Cover the walls at the end of the day, or fog (water) spray the walls after they
achieve initial set to compensate for evaporation.
.8
Do not over mix mortar materials.
.9
Do not dip masonry in a bucket of water.
.10
Do not use nails or line pins to string masons line due to possible joint damage and
personal injury.
.11
Do not tap or move the masonry unit once it has been set.
.12
Do not spread more than 900 mm of mortar for placement of stone.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 04200
MASONRY
Page 04200 - 3
.13
Store sand, masonry materials and mixing equipment in shaded areas.
.14
Store masonry materials off the ground on skids.
.15
Make certain that sand is moist. Dampen the sand pile if needed at the end of each
day to maintain uniform sand moisture for the duration of wall construction.
.16
Construct wind breaks protecting materials and construction areas.
.17
Cool all equipment and presoak wooden mortar boards.
1.8
Temporary Bracing
1.8.1
Provide adequate temporary bracing to masonry walls until joists, floor and roof decks are
installed and can develop adequate diaphragm action to brace walls.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
2.1.1
Water: Verify that water used contains no salts to cause efflorescence.
2.1.2
Asphalt Emulsion: In conformance with CAN/CGSB-37.2.
2.1.3
Deflection Space Filler: 75 x 6 mm thick preformed, polyurethane foam; “25V” by Emseal
Joint Systems Ltd. or other approved manufacturer. For filler at fire rated or zero hour fire
(smoke) separations refer to Section 07860.
2.1.4
Reinforcement
.1
Joint reinforcement (exterior cavity wall construction): 4.76 mm hot dipped
galvanized heavy duty welded steel rods, truss design with adjustable box pintles
by Blok-Lok Limited, Hohmann & Barnard Inc., or Wire-Bond.
.2
Joint reinforcement (interior walls): 3.66 mm, standard galvanized welded steel
rods, truss design by Blok-Lok Limited or Hohmann & Barnard Inc.
.3
Vertical reinforcement (jambs of fire shutters, etc.): in accordance with Section
03200.
.4
Cavity Wall Bonding Ties (Steel stud backup): 1.61 mm thick steel, galvanized
with 4.76 mm diameter adjustable cavity wall bonding tie, Fero "Slotted Stud Tie
(Type 1)" complete with V-ties, and insulation retainers or the equivalent by BlokLok Limited. Hot dipped galvanized non-conventional bonding ties conforming to
OBC are required. Design to meet criteria of CSA 370-94.
.5
Cavity Wall Bonding Ties (Concrete block backup): 1.61 mm thick steel,
galvanized with 4.76 mm diameter adjustable cavity wall bonding tie, Fero
"Slotted Block Tie (Type 1)" complete with corrugated section, V-ties, and
insulation retainers or the equivalent by Blok-Lok Limited. Hot dipped galvanized
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 04200
MASONRY
Page 04200 - 4
non-conventional bonding ties conforming to OBC are required. Design to meet
criteria of CSA 370-94.
2.1.5
Reinforcing Steel Bars: Canadian Produced billet, rail, or axle steel, with a yield strength of
50 Ksi, conforming to CSA G30.8, G30.12 and G30.13.
2.1.6
Lateral Support Anchors
.1
.2
2.1.7
.1
At concrete, 37 mm x 5 mm steel dovetail anchor, galvanized with 50 mm
at each bend 90 degrees, and stress relieved. Embed anchors a minimum
of 50 mm into masonry.
.2
At intersecting and abutting walls, 37 mm x 5 mm steel, 600 mm long,
galvanized, with 50 mm at each end bent 90 degrees, and stress relieved,
or with 9 mm diameter by 100 mm maximum pins through straps in lieu
of bent ends.
.3
For connecting masonry to steel structure, use Flexible anchor, galvanized
5 mm diameter, steel, bent into equilateral triangular shape, with apex
fastened to support, two sides terminating in 25 mm inward bent hooks,
and extending a minimum of 100 mm into masonry, "Flex-O-Lok" by
Blok-Lok Limited or Hohmann & Barnard Inc. Coordinate with Section
05100 to ensure compatibility.
.4
For attachment of ties to concrete use "Pos-i-Tie" fasteners.
.5
Provide 5.20 mm wire joint reinforcing every second course at columns
which have masonry fireproofing to the satisfaction of the authority
having jurisdiction.
Horizontal
.1
Masonry walls extending to the underside of building structure: One piece
12 ga. hot dipped galvanized steel lateral clip supports as supplied by
NCA/Acrow Richmond, Rexdale, Ontario to suit block width. For
attachment of clip supports, use power accentuated or self drill fasteners.
.2
Masonry walls which do not extend to the underside of building structure:
100 x 100 x 6 mm steel plate with 12 x 25 mm steel bar welded to the
centre of one side of plate. Size bar length to engage wall by 50 mm.
Secure plate assembly at 1200 mm o.c. and in such a way that the bars
will fit into sash grooves in masonry.
Stone Units
.1
2.1.8
Vertical
Stone: Refer to Section 04400 Building Stone.
Concrete Masonry Units
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 04200
MASONRY
.1
Lightweight Concrete Block: Use for all walls, except those in contact with earth,
and those exposed to the weather. Block shall be Richvale "Ultralite", Permacon
"Superlite" or equivalent by Boehmers or other manufacturer producing block of
less than 1700 kg/m3, modular, to meet CSA-A165 Series, Facet H/15/D/M. For the
purpose of fire resistance rating, lightweight block shall conform to the requirements
of L2 as specified in the NBC.
.2
Normalweight Concrete Block: Use for walls in contact with earth, walls exposed
to the weather, and for any other locations shown on Drawings. Block shall be
modular, to meet CSA3-A165 Series, Facet H/15/A/M.
.3
Special Shapes: Provide special sizes and shapes required including but not limited
to, plain ends, halves, jambs, sash, lintel, bullnose, and other shapes. Special
shapes shall be manufactured to shape, not cut. Use solid units at jambs of
overhead doors and at top of interior walls. Use bullnosed units for all external
corners.
.4
Fire Ratings: Provide lightweight, architectural, and polished concrete blocks
having void to solid ratios and aggregate as required to achieve required fire
ratings for width of fire rated walls shown. Provide solid filled blocks at tops of all
fire rated block partitions to support fire stop.
.5
Appearance: Notwithstanding the appearance requirements of the above
mentioned CSA Standards, block shall be free from all surface indentations,
surface cracks and other defects detrimental to the appearance of the finished
surface. Block having visual defects shall be rejected for exposed areas but may be
used for concealed or unfinished areas.
2.1.9
Bolts and Anchors: To CAN3-A370.
2.1.10
Natural Mortar
.1
Generally: Use materials only as specified in CSA A179 and ASTM C207. Ensure
that water and aggregate used in mortar, other than in walls buried in earth, will
not cause efflorescence.
.2
Mixes: Mix mortars as specified in CSA A179 using the Proportion Specification.
Add bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.3
Mortar Types
.4
2.1.11
Page 04200 - 5
.1
For load-bearing walls: mortar type "S".
.2
For all other masonry walls, use regular Type "N" mortar.
Ready Mixed Mortar: Ready mixed mortars supplied by BB Mega Mix, premixed
mortars by Jiffy Mortar Systems or approved equivalent.
Grout: Conforming to CSA A179 Table 3.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 04200
MASONRY
Page 04200 - 6
2.1.12
Colour Pigment: As manufactured by Elementis Pigments or Interstar Pigments. Make
allowance for full loading of 2 kgs. per bag of 1-1-6. Colour as selected by Consultant.
2.1.13
Neoprene Control Joints: Closed Cell Neoprene Sponge by Hohmann & Barnard Inc or
approved equivalent.
2.1.14
Soft Joint Seal: Emseal "Soft Joint Seal" as manufactured by Emseal Joint Systems Ltd.,
for use under shelf angles at exterior masonry walls.
2.1.15
Precast Concrete: In accordance with Section 02785 and 03400.
2.1.16
Mortar Net Drainage System: High density polyethylene, MN 10-1 manufactured by
Mortar Net USA Ltd., or Mortar Break distributed by Building Resource Construction
Products Representatives, to suit 25mm wide air space in typ wall assembly.
2.1.17
Weephole / Vent Material: “Goodco” vent by Williams Products Inc., or approved
alternate. Submit sample for review.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Coordination
3.1.1
Coordinate the work of Section 07200 with this Section to ensure monolithic air/vapour
barrier and thermal envelope is achieved.
3.2
Laying Masonry
3.2.1
General
.1
Make joints concave tooled of uniform size. Fill solidly with mortar in both bed
and vertical joints, and including block webs. Do not butter corners of units or
allow mortar scrapings in joints, slush joints, furrow bed joints excessively or shift
and tap units after mortar has initially set.
.2
Lay masonry using running bond unless detailed otherwise.
.3
For hollow masonry units, cover end areas and bearing areas of face cells fully
with mortar.
.4
When work is resumed on walls previously laid, and which are either partially or
totally set, remove loose mortar and mortar from top and adjoining surfaces.
Remove mortar completely when masonry is removed and replaced with new.
.5
Form tooled concave joints wherever exposed to view, whether behind cabinets,
fitments and wall accessories or not. When mortar has become "thumb-print hard"
form joints by a tool having a long bearing surface to avoid uneven depressions.
Close all cracks and crevices.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 04200
MASONRY
Page 04200 - 7
.6
Horizontal joints in all block walls shall receive a heavy raking, while vertical
joints shall receive very light raking, to achieve strong horizontal line effect
desired.
.7
Rake out joints at junction of interior and exterior walls with columns at interior
with exterior walls, at intersections of walls and partitions where joint
reinforcement is installed. These joints will be caulked by Section 07900.
.8
No mortar shall protrude from joints on wall surfaces to which air/vapour barrier
and insulation will be applied.
.9
Lay face work from face side.
.10
Lay masonry level, true to line, square, plumb, and as detailed.
.11
Distribute masonry units of varying colours and textures to avoid spotty
appearance over wall surfaces exposed to view. Do not use units which contrast
too greatly with overall range.
.12
Stop off horizontal runs of walls by racking back a half-unit in each horizontal
course. Do not tooth.
.13
Use chipped and blemished units only where concealed. Do not use defective or
broken units. Do not lay concrete units that will appear smooth or slick where
exposed to view, whether painted or not.
.14
Where a steel anchor is set in block cell, fill the anchor cell with cement grout.
Provide metal lath under the particular masonry unit to contain mortar fill.
.15
Brace walls and piers continuously during construction until structure provides
support. Do not brace walls with shims.
.16
Extend walls to construction above, except where otherwise noted on drawings.
Cut and fit as necessary.
.17
In cavity walls, keep all cavity spaces free of mortar and debris by placing a wood
strip on the ties. Retain strip on a wire line and pull up level and clean off toppings
prior to placing next course of ties.
.18
Weephole spacing: Provide free draining weepholes at 600 mm o.c. in bottom of
vertical joints of stone courses in cavity walls.
3.2.2
Precast Concrete: In accordance with Section 02785 and 03400.
3.2.3
Lintels and Bond Beams
.1
Build in steel and precast concrete lintels supplied to this Section. Set and level
lintels on a bed of mortar. Note the following:
Project No. 0701-BS
3.2.4
SECTION 04200
MASONRY
Page 04200 - 8
.1
When exterior steel lintels bear on block jambs, place a compressible
material at the ends of the lintel and place a sealant, not mortar, in the
joint in the front of the lintel.
.2
When exterior steel lintels are supported by the building frame, instead of
the adjacent block, locate expansion joints so the block above the opening
(supported by the building frame) is separated from the block adjacent to
the opening (supported by the building foundation).
.2
Unless noted otherwise as steel, for all openings in masonry walls, provide
lightweight block or concrete block unit lintels of at least 15 MPa compressive
strength. The unit lintel shall be filled with 20 MPa concrete and shall bear a
minimum of 200 mm each end. Each unit shall be reinforced in accordance with
Lintel Schedule on structural drawings.
.3
Provide concrete block bond beams filled with 20 MPa concrete and one 10m bar
at each floor for attachment of elevator rails unless other structural supports
acceptable to the elevator trade are provided.
.4
Support masonry units of reinforced block lintels built in place. Provide a level
platform, true to the proper elevation and of sufficient strength to support the load
without visible deflection. Maintain supports in place for a minimum of 7 days or
for a period sufficient to permit the mortar to cure and gain sufficient strength to
safely support all loads imposed.
.5
Lay masonry units will full mortar coverage on all abutting edges with joints
shoved tight. Where masonry construction is continued above the lintel, place the
first course of masonry units on the lintel in a full mortar bed.
.6
Hollow Metal Frame Installation and Other Built-In Work
.7
Verify with those performing work specified in other Sections that air vapour
barrier, through-wall and dampproof flashings, waterstops, sheet metal air/vapour
barrier flashings, accessories, access panels, frame anchors, guards, sills, and such
items specified in other Sections are available for building in before work
commences. Cooperate in the setting and aligning of built-in work and provide for
later installation of items which are included in the work of other Sections to avoid
cutting, fitting, and patching.
.8
Build masonry around metal frames including elevator entrances. Ensure that
anchors are well secured and that frames are true and plumb. Completely fill
frames with mortar. Maintain protective frame covering and ensure that no mortar
is left on frame face.
.9
Where the front and rear elevator hoistway walls are constructed of masonry, erect
the masonry after the elevator frames have been installed.
Rod Reinforcing and Grout: At walls where rod reinforcing is required ensure that the
vertical rods are accurately located and conform to locations indicated on structural details.
Grout fill block voids around rod reinforcing.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 04200
MASONRY
Page 04200 - 9
3.2.5
Cope, cut, and split concrete masonry units with power-driven abrasive discs. Cut units
wherever electrical outlets, grilles, ducts, conduits or pipes occur. Allow 3 mm clearance
around items which are incorporated in or pass through walls.
3.2.6
Lay hollow concrete masonry units so that effective shells rest and align one over the other.
3.2.7
Build chases, do not cut them.
3.3
Masonry Anchorage and Support
3.3.1
Anchor masonry construction to ensure its stability and to withstand loads imposed by
intended use and by natural elements. Embed bolts and anchors solidly in mortar or grout
to develop maximum resistance to design forces.
3.3.2
Supply anchors to Section 05100 where required to be welded to structural steel.
3.3.3
Unless indicated or specified otherwise, anchors shall be spaced at the maximum vertical
and horizontal spacing specified in CSA A370.
3.3.4
Provide lateral supports for masonry walls and partitions as shown on Drawings, specified
and required by Jurisdictional Authorities, perpendicular to wall faces and either
horizontally or vertically to wall panel edges.
3.3.5
Where lateral support at the top of a wall is required anchors or clip angles shall be
installed at a spacing not exceeding 10 times the nominal wall thickness in accordance with
CSA A370, unless otherwise specified.
3.3.6
Where lateral support at the side of a wall is required anchors or clip angles shall be
installed at a spacing not exceeding 4 times the wall thickness, unless otherwise noted.
3.3.7
Fill cells of block units at parapet walls with grout in accordance with CAN3-A371,
"Appendix G1".
3.3.8
Where masonry is attached to structural studs secure in accordance with anchor
manufacturer's instructions.
3.3.9
Provide 5.20 mm wire joint reinforcing every second course at columns which have
masonry fireproofing to the satisfaction of the authority having jurisdiction.
3.4
Mortar Net Drainage System
3.4.1
Install mortar net drainage system complete with mortar net inserts at cavity wall weep
holes. Follow manufacturer’s directions.
3.5
Deflection Space
3.5.1
Maintain a 25 mm deflection space unless otherwise noted on Structural Drawings,
between the structure and the top of all interior non-load-bearing walls and partitions.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 04200
MASONRY
Page 04200 - 10
3.5.2
Fill deflection space in unrated walls with specified fill compressed to 25% of original
thickness. Coordinate with installation of lateral supports, where they occur. Fill for fire
walls is specified in Section 07860.
3.5.3
Fill all deflection spaces completely to provide an absolute seal between each side of the
wall or partition.
3.6
Grouting Beneath Bearing Plates
3.6.1
Completely fill voids beneath steel base and bearing plates (bearing on masonry) with an
approved non-shrink grout having a compressive strength at 28 days of at least 35 MPa.
Where grout is exposed to view or weather, use non-ferrous expanding grout.
3.7
Shrinkage and Expansion Control Joints
3.7.1
Provide control joints in masonry walls, veneers and partitions. See BIA Technical Note
18A and NCMA Tek Notes 3 and 53.
3.7.2
Allow for settlement of slab-on-grade. See geotechnical report for magnitude of anticipated
settlement. Provide vertical control joints in masonry partitions to allow for uneven
settlement. Do not rigidly connect partitions to structure or other elements of the building
which will not settle.
3.7.3
Incorporate vertical shrinkage control joints in walls of which concrete masonry units are a
part.
3.7.4
Provide control joints at junctions of walls and columns, at intersections of unit concrete
masonry load-bearing walls, and wherever shown on Drawings, and otherwise in walls
with no openings, at a maximum spacing of 6 m o.c. Carry joints full height of walls.
3.7.5
Provide horizontal expansion control joints between shelf angles and stone for exterior
walls. Make expansion allowance below angles for caulking and backup rod as specified in
Section 07900. Install "Soft Joint Seal" under angles.
3.7.6
Provide complete vertical separation through walls incorporating control joints. Make
control joints 9.5 mm wide, rake back 19 mm at junctures with concrete, and leave joints
free and clear for caulking, as specified in Section 07900.
3.7.7
Use sash block units at each side of control joint. Cut as required, install joint filler full
height to a snug fit. Leave a depth of 12 mm for caulking as specified in Section 07900.
3.8
Joint Reinforcement
3.8.1
Place reinforcement in horizontal masonry joints at 400 mm o.c., and at 200 mm o.c. in
areas 750 mm above and below openings. Where changes in wall thickness occur, extend
reinforcement 450 mm beyond at each side.
3.8.2
Do not run joint reinforcement through control joints.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 04200
MASONRY
Page 04200 - 11
3.8.3
Install prefabricated corner sections in reinforced joints at corner and prefabricated tee
sections at reinforced joints where partitions intersect other partitions or walls unless lateral
support is being provided. Rake vertical joint at intersections for caulking as specified in
Section 07900.
3.9
Pointing and Cleaning
3.9.1
Point all holes in mortar joints except weepholes, and in concrete masonry unit faces.
3.9.2
Cut out defective mortar joints and repoint. Remove defect mortar min 25mm beyond
damaged portion. Repoint to provide a dense, concaved profile.
3.9.3
Wash down and brush stone walls to remove mortar and stains. Use 5% solution of
muriatic acid only when preceded and followed by a complete drenching of clean water,
and only when use of detergents or other cleaning methods are insufficient. Proceed only
with Consultant's approval.
3.9.4
Do not use muriatic acid for cleaning of stone or light coloured concrete block.
3.9.5
Clean concrete masonry units with brushes and as otherwise recommended by the supplier
to remove mortar and stains.
3.9.6
Do not use wire brushes for cleaning.
3.9.7
Should specified cleaning methods be insufficient, proceed with other methods only with
approval of Consultant.
3.9.8
Protect adjacent materials and work from damage while cleaning.
3.10
Fire Separations
3.10.1
Walls which provide required fire separations shall be constructed of masonry units which
are approved by Jurisdictional Authorities for material thickness, and rating.
3.10.2
Unless otherwise approved by Jurisdictional Authorities, in no case shall unplastered fire
separation walls of solid construction be reduced in any part to a thickness less than the
listed actual dimensions for the separation ratings indicated.
3.11
Air Leakage Control
3.11.1
Make the interior surfaces of exterior walls airtight, although concealed behind convectors,
gypsum board, panelling or suspended ceilings. Ensure that backup masonry walls are well
laid with full mortar joints.
3.12
Precast Concrete
3.12.1
Precast concrete will be supplied by Section 03400. Install precast concrete sills, bases,
bands and wall caps. Set in full mortar bed including pins. Where indicated rake back joints
19 mm to receive caulking by Section 07900, otherwise provide totally open joints to
receive caulking and bedding rope.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 04200
MASONRY
Page 04200 - 12
3.13
3.13.1
Engage an inspection and testing company chosen by the Consultant and paid for from
Cash Allowance, to conduct strength of mortar tests in accordance with CSA-A179 and
CAN3-S304-M84.
* * *
END OF SECTION
2014 May 23
PART 1:
1.1
GENERAL
.1
Provide all material and labour required for the completion of the Contract. Breakdown of
Work by Section is for guidance only and is not necessarily complete.
.2
Work Furnished and Installed:
i.
.3
.4
1.2
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120
Page 1 of 11
Structural steel work.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
i.
Grouting beneath column bases and bearing assemblies on concrete members:
Section 03300.
ii.
Grouting beneath baseplates bearing on masonry: Section 04200.
iii.
Miscellaneous metals: Section 05500.
iv.
Metal stairs, handrails, guards, balustrades and railings: Section 05510.
v.
Reinforcing at edges of openings in metal deck that are not larger than 450mm in
roof deck and 300mm in floor deck: Section 05311.
Work Furnished but not Installed:
i.
Anchor bolts, bearing assemblies and other structural steel connections to be
cast into concrete.
ii.
Shelf angles and related connections to be built into concrete to receive
masonry.
iii.
Bearing plates and related connections for metal deck to be built into masonry or
concrete.
iv.
Loose lintels, shelf angles and plates to be built into masonry.
STANDARDS, CODES AND ACTS
.1
Conform with the Building Code under Ontario Building Code 2006 (O. Reg. 403/97) and
any applicable acts of any authority having jurisdiction and the following:
i.
CAN/CSA-S16.1-01 - Limits States Design of Steel Structures; S16S1-05,
Supplement #1; and replacement pages issued June 2003 and December 2003
as Update #1 and Update #2 Canadian Standards Association.
ii.
CAN/CSA-G164-M92 (R2003) - Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped
Articles, Canadian Standards Association.
iii.
EN-10210-1 EUROPEAN STANDARD FOR ELLIPTICAL HOT FINISHED
STRUCTURAL TUBE.
060449
2014 May 23
.2
1.3
1.4
iv.
CSA-S136-94 - Cold Formed Steel Structural Members, Canadian Standards
Association.
v.
CSA-W47.1-03 - Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel
Structures, Canadian Standards Association.
vi.
CISC/CPMA 1-73a - Performance Specification for Shop Primer, Canadian
Institute of Steel Construction.
vii.
CISC/CPMA 2-75 - A Quick-Drying Primer for use on Structural Steel, Canadian
Institute of Steel Construction.
viii.
SSPC-SP2, Hand Tool Cleaning, The Society for Protective Coatings
ix.
SSPC-SP6/NACE No. 3, Commercial Blast Cleaning, The Society for Protective
Coatings
x.
SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, Brush-Off Blast Cleaning, The Society for Protective
Coatings
xi.
SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2, Near-White Blast Cleaning, The Society for Protective
Coatings
xii.
ASTM D6386, Preparation of Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coated Iron and Steel
Product and Hardware Surfaces for Painting
Where there are differences between the specifications, drawings, standards, codes or
acts, the most stringent shall govern.
TOLERANCES
.1
Conform to erection tolerances specified in CAN/CSA-S16.1 Clause 28.7.
.2
Interfacing tolerances may not be compatible with the above. Review and coordinate
interfacing tolerances so that the various elements come together properly.
QUALIFICATIONS
.1
1.5
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120
Page 2 of 11
Be certified under the requirements of Division 1, or Division 2.1 of CSA Standard W47.1.
DESIGN
.1
.2
General
i.
Design connections, joists, bridging, trusses, castings and the like in accordance
with the requirements of CSA S16.1 for the loads shown or implied.
ii.
Design calculations shall be carried out by a professional engineer licensed to
practice in the Province of Ontario.
Connections
i.
Use types of shop or field connection shown, or in absence of such indication,
use most appropriate type of connection.
060449
2014 May 23
1.6
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120
Page 3 of 11
ii.
Design of connections shall include not only those between columns, beams,
girders, trusses and braces, but also between such members as spandrel angles
and beams, hangers, stiffeners, etc., and their supporting members (be they
steel or concrete).
iii.
Design connections to safely withstand the combined effects of shear, moment
and torque at applicable design stresses.
iv.
Do not weld galvanized members without the Consultant’s approval.
v.
Design bracing member connections for positive adjustability.
vi.
Design connections that are exposed to weather so that moisture, dirt and the
like cannot gain entry to the interior of hollow built-up members.
vii.
Design and detail connections so as not to interfere with architectural clearance
lines or finishes.
viii.
Where connections between beams and columns and the like result in loss of
bearing to the metal deck, design and provide support as required.
ix.
Design connections that are to be cast into concrete to provide for the maximum
deviation that can occur in erection and based on the following:
Specified steel erection tolerances.
Maximum permissible tolerances in the location of inserts cast into concrete
of plus or minus 15 mm in any direction.
SUBMITTALS
.1
.2
.3
Connection Details, Erection Diagrams, Shop Details, Erection Procedures, Field Work
Details
i.
Submit connection details, erection diagrams, shop details, erection procedures,
and field work details for review by the Consultant.
ii.
Do not reproduce the structural drawings to serve as erection or setting drawings
without the Consultant’s approval.
Connection Design Details
i.
Connection design details shall be prepared before the preparation of shop
details and submitted to the Consultant for review that the intent of the design is
met.
ii.
Connection design details shall bear the signature and stamp of a qualified
professional engineer licensed to practice in the Province of Ontario
iii.
Connection design details shall provide details of standard and non-standard
connections and other data necessary for the preparation of shop details.
Connection design details shall be referenced to the design documents or the
erection drawings, or both.
Erection Diagrams
i.
Erection diagrams shall be submitted to the Consultant for review.
060449
2014 May 23
.4
.5
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120
Page 4 of 11
ii.
Amongst other items show the following:
General arrangement of the structure including all steel load-resisting
elements essential to the integrity of the completed structure
Principal dimensions of the structure
Piece marks
Sizes of the members
Connection details.
Bearing details.
Holes.
Finishes.
Grades of steel.
Size and type of bolts and bolt installation requirements
Shop and field welds
Elevations of column bases
All necessary dimensions and details for setting anchor rods
Sliding expansion joint bearing pad details, including materials, size and
thickness of pads, setting out dimensions and load capacity.
Required clearances and other details to receive correlative items
Any other information necessary for the assembly of the structure
iii.
Show necessary dimensions and details for setting structural steel bearings,
anchorages, assemblies and the like where they interface with other building
components.
iv.
Co-ordinate with shop drawings of cast-in-place concrete, masonry, miscellaneous metal work, structural steel castings, metal deck and other interfacing
work.
Shop Details
i.
Shop details shall be prepared before fabrication and submitted to the Consultant
for review.
ii.
Shop details shall provide complete information for the fabrication of various
members and components of the structure, including the required material and
product standards; the location, type, and size of all mechanical fasteners; bolt
installation requirements; and welds.
Erection Procedures
i.
Erection procedures shall be prepared before erection and submitted to the
Consultant for review.
ii.
Erection procedures shall outline the construction methods, erection sequence,
temporary bracing requirements, and other engineering details necessary for
shipping, erecting, and maintaining the stability of the steel frame.
iii.
Drawings and sketches that identify the location of permanent and temporary
load-resisting elements essential to the integrity of the partially completed
structure shall supplement erection procedures.
iv.
Submit details of method proposed to apply and verify the magnitude of tension
to bracing members within the specified tolerances.
v.
Submit procedures proposed when erection is carried out at temperatures greatly
differing from 20 degrees C.
060449
2014 May 23
.6
.7
Fieldwork Details
i.
Fieldwork details shall be submitted for review by the Consultant whenever
modifications to the approved structural details are required.
ii.
Fieldwork details shall provide complete information for modifying fabricated
members in the shop or on the job site. All operations required to modify the
member shall be shown on the fieldwork details.
Substitution
i.
.8
2.1
Mark on 2 complete sets of final drawings any changes, additions or deletions
that occur during the construction as a result of the Contractor's work, change
orders or for any other reason.
Mill Test Reports
i.
PART 2:
Furnish the Inspection Company with a copy of erection diagrams, shop details,
erection procedures, and fieldwork details bearing the Consultant's reviewed
stamp.
As-Built Drawings
i.
.10
If the Contractor wishes to make substitutions for steel materials or sizes
indicated, submit proposals with the tender with necessary calculations for review
of the Consultant.
Drawings for Inspection Company
i.
.9
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120
Page 5 of 11
Submit copies of mill test reports properly correlated to the materials available to
the Consultant.
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
.1
Rolled Wide Flange Sections: Conform to CSA-G40.21-M92 350W, unless otherwise
noted.
.2
Rolled channels and angles: Conform to CSA-G40.21-M92 300W, unless otherwise
noted.
.3
Steel plate, bars and rods: Conform to CSA-G40.21-M92 300W, unless otherwise noted.
.4
Hollow Structural Sections: Conform to CSA-G40.21-M92 Grade 350W, Class C.
.5
Bolts, nuts and washers: ASTM A325 M-00, galvanized when used with galvanized
material.
.6
Shop paint primer: Type 1 - Water borne: Low VOCs, and not to be manufactured or
formulated with aromatic solvents, formaldehyde, halogenated solvents, mercury, lead,
cadmium, hexvalent chromium and their compounds. Devguard 4020 by ICI Devoe
Coatings or approved equivalent. Contractor to verify compatibility of primer with finished
paint including intumescent paint where applicable.
060449
2014 May 23
.7
Primer for steel to receive Cafco Intumescent coating: [Devguard 4160 structural primer
by ICI Devoe Coatings][Rustguard 4150-7100 Red Low Voc Shopcoat Primer by ICI
Devoe Coatings][Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50NZ6 by Sherwin-Williams ] or
approved equivalent
.8
Reinforced Inorganic Zinc Primer - Catha-coat 302H by ICI Devoe Coatings or approved
Equivalent
.9
Alkyl Silicate Inorganic Zinc Coating - Catha-coat 304 by ICI Devoe Coatings or approved
equivalent.
PART 3:
3.1
EXECUTION
WORKMANSHIP AND FABRICATION
.1
Conform to CAN/CSA-S16.1-94 and the following:
.2
Provide holes to 15mm in diameter indicted at any time before shop drawings are
reviewed, as required to permit the attachment of other materials.
.3
Plates and shelf angles supporting masonry shall be continuous and extend full length of
masonry openings. At splices, grind welds smooth where exposed to view.
.4
Openings
.5
3.2
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120
Page 6 of 11
i.
Conform to requirements shown for location, size, reinforcing and cutting of
openings through structural members.
ii.
Obtain written permission of Consultant prior to field cutting or altering of structural members not shown on the drawings.
Galvanized Steel
i.
Detail and fabricate steel such that it will not trap the galvanizing material.
ii.
Detailed so that welding of galvanized material is not required.
iii.
Provided with vent holes as required.
iv.
Cleaned of all weld slag prior to galvanizing.
v.
Upon completion of erection, touched up with zinc rich primer at all locations
where galvanizing is damaged.
PROTECTION
.1
Steel ST-1
i.
This steel type applies to all structural steel concealed from view in the finished
building and not exposed to weather or high humidity environments including:
•
ii.
Bike Storage shower vestibule bulkhead bracing
No cleaning or painting is required for this steel type.
060449
2014 May 23
.2
Steel ST-2
i.
This steel type applies to all structural steel concealed from view in the finished
building and not exposed to weather or high humidity environments including :
•
.3
Bike Storage Mezzanine floor beams and hangers.
ii.
Clean structural steel in accordance with SSPC SP2, Hand Tool Cleaning
iii.
Within one hour following cleaning, apply one coat of paint conforming to
CISC/CPMA 1-73a
Steel ST-3
i.
This steel type applies to all structural steel which is to be encased in spray
applied fire proofing or concrete including:
•
.4
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120
Page 7 of 11
Bike Storage Mezzanine floor beams
ii.
Clean structural steel in accordance with SSPC SP2, Hand Tool Cleaning to
remove loose mill scale, rust, and other detrimental foreign matter.
iii.
No painting is required for this steel type.
Steel ST-4
i.
ii.
This steel type applies to all structural steel which is exposed to weather or
moisture in the finished building but is not designated as “architectural” such as
steel within the cavity of cavity walls, and not protected by a vapour barrier
including:
•
lintels
•
shelf angles
•
stair landing framing including columns
•
Bike Storage mezzanine floor framing
•
plates, hangers, braces etc. outside the building envelope
•
connection materials and inserts associated with the above.
Fully galvanize, in accordance with CSA G164 to a minimum zinc coating of 600
2
g/m .
.5
Except for steel which is to be left uncoated, upon completion of erection, apply primer to
welds, bolts and at locations where original primer is damaged. Primer to match the
primer of the base steel. For galvanized steel, touch up with zinc rich coating.
.6
Protect all steel from damage during storage, transportation and erection.
.7
For steel designated as “architectural” sand areas where the coating has been damaged
and “feather” into the surrounding field prior to touching up.
.8
Protect weep holes at base of closed column sections that have base plates, but no cap
plates.
060449
2014 May 23
3.3
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120
Page 8 of 11
.9
During cold weather, protect members from damage due to water freezing in confined
areas.
.10
Provide drain holes in closed sections to prevent water build-up during erection.
ERECTION
.1
.2
.3
General
i.
Conform to requirements of CAN/CSA-S16.1 and the following:
ii.
Maintain temporary bracing until completion of entire structure including floor and
roof decks, slabs, *masonry walls and other elements which are part of the wind
resisting system.
iii.
Carry out erection operations, including installation of any temporary guying and
shoring required, without loading portions of the existing structure already
constructed in excess of its safe load carrying capacity.
iv.
During erection, forces or reactions in the steel frame members and their connections may exceed those on which the design is based.
v.
Determine the magnitude of such forces and reactions and take such measures
as are necessary to ensure that the safety and stability of the structure is
maintained until the entire structure, including floor and roof slabs is complete.
vi.
Splices, other than those shown, shall not be permitted in members without the
Consultant's approval. If approval is given to permit welded splices, they shall be
non-destructively tested at no extra cost to the Owner.
vii.
Nuts on ordinary bolts ASTM A307 shall be prevented from working loose by use
of lock washers, lock nuts, jam nuts, thread burring or other approved methods.
viii.
Report to the Consultant where members cannot be erected within the specified
tolerances without modification or special procedures. Take corrective measures
to the Consultant's approval.
Bearing on Concrete or masonry
i.
Set steel bases and bearing assemblies true and level at the proper elevation so
that upon grouting, they will have full bearing.
ii.
Unless a specific method is shown, leveling devices or steel shimming may be
used to support bases prior to grouting. Subsequent to grouting, loosen the
leveling devices so that all loads pass only through the bases, or remove the
steel shims so that the resulting voids can be fully grouted.
Lintels
i.
.4
Unless a reinforced block or concrete lintel is noted, provide loose steel lintels, as
shown, over openings and recesses in masonry walls or partitions including
those for mechanical or electrical services.
New Steel Work to the Existing Building
060449
2014 May 23
3.4
i.
Make site measurements as required to verify dimensions of existing work before
proceeding with the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for extra costs
incurred due to proceeding without verifying site dimensions.
ii.
Adequately shore the existing structure until the permanent structure shown is
installed, to ensure that no movements or damage occurs.
EXPOSED STEEL
.1
General
i.
.2
.3
.4
.5
3.5
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120
Page 9 of 11
The following applies to all steel which is left exposed to view in the completed
building that is within 3 m of a floor
Fabrication
i.
All exposed edges of plates shall be universal mill or guided flame cut. Exposed
cut edges of beam flanges shall be guided flame cut. Cut surfaces shall be equal
in smoothness to a mill finish.
ii.
Where bolted connections are shown, ensure that connections are neatly
arranged with tight joints.
iii.
Remove mill marks, identification and surface imperfections by grinding smooth
and flush with adjacent surfaces.
Welding
i.
Continuously weld joints exposed to view.
ii.
Grind smooth all welds that are within the reach of the public.
Galvanizing
i.
Ensure that the galvanizing process leaves a smooth and uniform surface.
ii.
During galvanizing, use procedures to ensure that members do not deform
excessively.
Do not use marking paint, crayons or other marking materials on exposed surfaces.
ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STEEL
.1
General
i.
.2
Architecturally exposed steel is all steel which is left exposed to view in the
completed building. In addition to the requirements of this Section the
requirements of the AISC specification for Architecturally Exposed Steel shall
apply, except as varied herein.
Tolerances
i.
The "as fabricated and erected" straightness tolerances of architecturally
exposed steel members shall not exceed ½ of the standard camber and sweep
060449
2014 May 23
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120
Page 10 of 11
tolerances specified in CSA-G40.21, excepting that tolerances between structural
steel members and window frames shall not exceed plus 3 mm or minus 0.
.3
.4
.5
Fabrication
i.
Perform fabrication with special care and necessary straightening to maintain the
condition of the material as described herein.
ii.
Show clearly the required fabrication tolerances on shop drawings. Show the
required tolerances for setting embedded items on erection drawings.
iii.
Make copes, mitres and butt cuts in surfaces exposed to view within the closest
possible tolerances consistent with structural shop equipment and practice. Plan
erection sequence so that these tolerances can be maintained.
iv.
Where the fit-up of adjacent members is such that permissible tolerances
specified above may result in any unsightly joint, take special care to obtain a
visual plane on the exposed surfaces. If both surfaces are exposed, detail joints
in such a way as to minimize these unavoidable variations.
v.
All exposed edges of plates shall be universal mill or guided flame cut. Exposed
cut edges of beam flanges shall be guided flame cut. Cut surfaces shall be equal
in smoothness to a mill finish.
vi.
Where bolted connections are shown, ensure that connections are neatly
arranged with tight joints.
vii.
Welding
i.
Except as otherwise shown on the drawings, all shop and field assembly shall be
done by welding. Welders shall be qualified as hereinbefore specified.
ii.
Continuously weld joints exposed to view.
iii.
Form and weld all joints exposed to weather to exclude water by the use of "seal"
welds.
iv.
Exposed welds, except f filler welds and concealed welds where clearances or fit
of other items may so necessitate, shall be ground smooth and otherwise
finished flush and even with adjacent surfaces. Grinding is not required for well
formed fillet welds.
v.
Grind bevel welds smooth, forming neat, well-made corners.
vi.
Grind smooth any welds on structural steel members in the finished building that
are within the reach of the public.
Painting
i.
After inspection and before leaving the shop, clean all steel work exposed in the
finished work by grit-blasting of all mill scale, rust, weld slag or flux deposit, oil,
dirt and other foreign matter, to a "Commercial Bright" finish.
060449
2014 May 23
.6
.7
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120
Page 11 of 11
ii.
iii.
Immediately after cleaning, apply a shop coat paint to all steel work, except as
follows, to dry surfaces by spray, to a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. Allow
to dry in dust free areas.
iv.
Do not paint metal items that are to be encased in concrete and surfaces that are
to have concrete placed against them.
v.
Apply 1 additional shop coat of paint as specified to parts of shop coated steel
surfaces that will be inaccessible after erection.
vi.
Clean surfaces within 50 mm of any field weld location of materials that would
prevent proper welding or produce objectionable fumes while welding is being
done.
vii.
After erection and immediately after grinding welds, etc. touch up and paint with
1 coat of same paint as shop coat, all damaged and abraded spots, including any
unpainted areas. Completely remove anti-spatter coating, if used before field
touch-up painting.
Galvanizing
i.
Ensure that the galvanizing process leaves a smooth and uniform surface.
ii.
During galvanizing, use procedures to ensure that members do not deform
excessively.
Protection
i.
Prevent staining of architecturally exposed steel by concrete, mortar, plaster, oils,
paints or other foreign substances.
ii.
Do not use marking paint, crayons or other marking materials on exposed
surfaces.
060449
Project No. 0701 - BS
SECTION 05500
MISCELLANEOUS METALS
Page 05500 - 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
here.
1.2
LEED Requirements
1.2.1
1.2.2
.1
1.3
1.3.1
ASTM A143-01
Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement
of Hot-Dip Galvanized Structural Steel Products and
Procedure for Detecting Embrittlement
1.3.2
ASTM A167-99 (2004)
Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting
Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip
1.3.3
ASTM A307-00
Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs,
60,000 psi Tensile Strength
1.3.4
ASTM A325M-03
Standard Specification for High Strength Bolts for
Structural Steel Joints (Metric)
1.3.5
ASTM A380-99 (2005)
Standard Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and
Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and
Systems
1.3.6
ASTM A563M-04
Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
(Metric)
1.3.7
ASTM A780-01
Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated
Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings
1.3.8
CAN/CSA-S16.1-01
Limit States Design of Steel Structures
1.3.9
CSA W47.1-03
Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel
Structures
SECTION 05500
Page 05500 - 2
1.3.10
CSA W55.3-1965 (R1998)
Resistance Welding Qualification Code for Fabricators of
Structural Members Used In Buildings
1.3.11
CSA W59-03
Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding)
1.3.12
CSA-G40.20-04/G40.21-04
General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural
Quality Steel/ Structural Quality Steel
1.3.13
CSA-G164-M92 (R1998)
Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles
1.3.14
ANSI/NAAMM
MBG 531-88 Metal Bar Grating
1.4
Quality Assurance
1.4.1
Qualifications of Subcontractor: Execute work of this Section using a firm thoroughly
conversant with governing laws, bylaws, and regulations. Use workmen skilled in work of
this Section.
1.4.2
Welding
.1
Welding of structural components shall be done only by fabricators certified by
CSA Welding Qualification Codes, CSA W47 or W55.3 as applicable, for welding
of steel and who shall perform welding to meet specified requirements of W59.1,
as may apply.
.2
Weld all stainless steel by the Argon Arc process. Grind smooth and polish joints,
crevice free, and flush without seams.
.3
Weld all connections where possible, and bolt where not possible. Provide method
to prevent loosening of nuts. Ream holes drilled for fastenings. Make welded
joints tight, flush, and in true planes with base metals. Make welds continuous at
joints where entry of water into building or into voids of members or assemblies is
possible. Grind welds in exposed locations smooth in a manner that will not leave
blemishes on exposed surfaces. Join members generally by inert metal arc welding
where practicable, using materials recommended by manufacturers of metals being
welded. Remove flux completely following welding, and grind and polish joints
smooth and clean.
.4
Where galvanized steel is to be welded, provide adequate ventilation. If adequate
ventilation is not available provide supplementary air circulation. In confined
spaces use a respirator.
.5
Touch up all uncoated weld areas.
SECTION 05500
Page 05500 - 3
1.5
Shop Drawings
1.5.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01001, of all the work of this Section,
including large-scale detail of members and materials, of connection and jointing details,
and of anchorage devices, dimensions, gauges, thicknesses, description of materials, metal
finishing, as well as all other pertinent data and information, for Consultant's review before
fabrication.
1.5.2
Shop drawings of stairs, self climbing truss and other load bearing and/or force-resulting
components shall bear the seal and signature of an Ontario Professional Engineer.
1.6
Mock-Up
1.6.1
Erect a sample installation of expanded metal mesh wall where designated on site, two
panels high (+/- 4m) x 2 panels wide (+/- 2m), complete with supporting angles, plates,
HSS posts and vertically mounted light fixture with custom light shield. Coordinate with
the Work of Division 16 as required for a complete installation.
1.7
Product Delivery, Storage, and Protection
1.7.1
Maintain protection provided for work of this Section from time of installation until final
finishes are applied or to final cleanup.
1.7.2
Protect prime-painted and galvanized surfaces from damage.
1.7.3
Protect exposed surfaces of prefinished metal work which does not receive site finishing
with protective coatings or wrappings. Use materials recommended by finishers or
manufacturers of metals, to ensure that method is sufficiently protective, easily removable,
and harmless to the finish.
1.7.4
Load and store galvanized articles as follows to prevent the formation of wet storage stain:
.1
Stack the articles or bundle to allow air between the galvanized surfaces during
transport from the supplier. Load the material in such a manner that continuous
drainage could occur.
.2
Raise the articles from the ground and separate with strip spacers to provide free
access of air to most parts of the surface. Incline in a manner which will give
continuous drainage. Under no circumstances will galvanized steel be allowed to
rest on cinders, clinkers, wet soil or decaying vegetation.
.3
Handle galvanized articles in such a manner as to avoid any mechanical damage
and to minimize distortion.
SECTION 05500
Page 05500 - 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
2.1.1
General: Metals shall be free from defects which impair strength or durability, or which are
visible. Metals shall be new, of best quality, and free from rust, or waves, or buckles, clean,
straight, and with sharply defined profiles.
2.1.2
Metals
2.1.3
.1
Steel: For structural sections hot rolled to meet requirements of CAN3-G40.21,
Grade 50W for tubes and Grade 44W for flat shapes. For sheet cold-rolled
furniture steel, double annealed, mill stretched and levelled, and fully pickled.
Otherwise, steel shall be hot-rolled or cold-rolled of alloy to suit needs of
fabrication, use, and appearance.
.2
Stainless Steel: Type 304 alloy conforming to ASTM A167, No. 4 finish.
Exposed Metal in Parking Garage:
.1
2.1.4
2.1.5
All exposed metal and connections shall be galvanized. Refer to item 2.3.6
Galvanized Steel.
Primers and Coatings
.1
Interior Steel in Dry Areas: Quick drying oil alkyd conforming to CISC/CPMA
2.75.
.2
Exterior Steel, Interior Steel in Unheated Areas, Steel Embedded in Concrete: Hot
dip galvanized conforming to CSA G164.
.3
Cold Galvanizing Coating Touch-Up: W.R. Meadows "Galvafroid" or Kerry
Industries "Z.R.C." zinc rich coating or similar manufacturer containing minimum
90% zinc by weight.
Fastenings: Use nuts and bolts conforming to ASTM A307, A325, and A563 as applicable.
.1
For interior work, use cadmium-plated fastenings where other protection is not
specified.
.2
For exterior work and interior wet areas such as but not limited to shower rooms,
change rooms use 300 series stainless steel.
2.1.6
Anchors and Shims For exposed anchorage of stainless steel, use stainless steel and
otherwise to match metal anchored. For non-exposed work, anchors and shims may be
galvanized steel.
2.1.7
Anchors and Shims Pipe: To ASTM A53, extra strong steel pipe for bollards.
2.1.8
2.1.9
Page 05500 - 5
Expanded Metal Mesh [EXMP]:
.1
Expanded galvanized metal mesh in 1.5mm thick rot-rolled carbon steel, pickled
and oiled. Mesh shall be 34mm short way of diamond X 76.2mm long way of
diamond. Maximum panel size of 1,220mm X 3,048mm with 34% open area.
Mesh to be hot-dipped galvanized. Architectural Series, APEX style 12 mesh” by
AMICO Canada or approved alternative.
.2
Provide custom metal mesh partitions fabricated from galvanized steel angle
framing with expanded metal mesh panels as detailed on drawings.
.3
Fabricate posts from tubing, welded to 65 mm x 175 mm x 6 mm thick base plate.
Provide necessary extensions and braces to securely anchor partitions to structure.
.4
Install mesh panels 3048 mm, long way of diamond, running vertically with
angled strands facing outwards towards parking garage.
.5
Secure mesh to framing as indicated on drawings.
Partition support assembly for Expanded Metal Mesh:
.1
2.1.10
SECTION 05500
Provide the following support assembly for the Expanded Metal Mesh [EXMP]
screen assemblies, as indicated on drawings.
.1
Embedded weld plates to receive b/o vertical posts
.2
89x89mm vertical HSS posts
.3
Slot shoes to receive t/o vertical posts
.4
89x89mm horizontal HSS braces
.5
64x64mm steel angles
.6
Metal clips at top and bottom each screen
.2
All metal and connections shall be galvanized
.3
Provide painted finish [P-3 - dark grey] for all components.
Steel plate to support vertical light fixtures w/ light shield at expanded metal mesh:
1.
Provide 158mm wide x 1,270mm high x 6mm thk steel plate welded to
vertical support post, and metal clips.
2.
3.
4.
Refer to electrical dwgs and specs for fixture [FC-4] w/ light shield
2.1.11
2.1.12
2.1.13
2.1.14
SECTION 05500
Page 05500 - 6
Steel plate to receive door operator at expanded metal mesh:
1.
Provide at door [05B]
2.
Provide 152mm tall x 1,003mm wide (standard header) x 6mm thk steel plate
at interior header of frame, to receive surface-mounted door operator hardware
equipment
3.
Provide pin connections and weld to vertical or horizontal HSS posts
supporting metal mesh
4.
5.
6.
Coordinate with Hardware Schedule
Steel plates to receive door actuator and card-reader at expanded metal mesh:
.1
Provide at inside of door [05B] for actuator and outside of [05B] for actuator +
card-reader
.2
Provide a 152mm tall x 150mm wide x 6mm thick steel plate for a surfacemounted actuator. Provide a 152mm tall x 300mm wide x 6mm thk steel plate
for a surface-mounted door actuator and surface-mounted card-reader device.
1.
Provide pin connections and weld to vertical or horizontal HSS posts
supporting metal mesh
2.
3.
4.
Coordinate with Hardware Schedule
Concrete filled Steel Bollards
.1
150 mm outside diameter 6mm thick concrete filled bollards, complete with 210 x
210 x 10 Steel Base plate welded, and 4 x 13mm Stainless Steel anchor bolts
.2
Refer to specifications Volume 3 Reference Reports, TPA detail STD-11, [TYPE
1] bollard
.3
Base plate to be mounted to concrete garage slab.
.4
Provide waterproofing and sloped asphalt over base plate, complete with
Rodofoam and sealant as per waterproofing drawing detail C5/BR-A-501
Angle support for hollow metal and aluminum door frames
2.1.15
2.1.16
SECTION 05500
Page 05500 - 7
.1
Angles required for the support and anchorage of hollow metal and aluminium
door frames to masonry openings are the responsibility of the miscellaneous
metals section.
.2
Hot dip galvanize exterior angles, and prime paint those occurring on interior.
Lintels and Shelf Angles
.1
Lintels or shelf angles secured to a structural steel member are the responsibility of
structural steel trade.
.2
Other lintels and shelf angles are the responsibility of the miscellaneous metals
section.
.3
Hot dip galvanize exterior lintels and shelf angles, and prime paint those occurring
on interior.
.4
Refer to Structural Drawing for lintel schedule. Hot dip galvanize shelf angles and
bracing for support of masonry. Provide 6 mm expansion gaps at corners and
between lengths of shelf angles. Bolt angles to allow for construction inaccuracies
and tolerances unless shown as welded. At corners, bolts should not exceed 250
mm from corner. Maximum thickness of shims shall not exceed 9 mm.
Stainless Steel Countertops
.1
Countertop (SSC): Provide Stainless Steel as indicated on Room Finishes
Schedule. Laminate stainless steel sheet to exterior grade plywood with
acceptable laminating adhesive.
2.1.17
Bituminous Paint: Alkali-resisting to meet specified requirements of CAN/CGSB-1.108,
Type 2.
2.1.18
Lockers: “Ambassador Locker, or approved equal, Stainless Steel Coin operated,
conforming to CAN/CGSB-44.40, 300 mm wide x 450 380 mm deep lockers in single
tier(s) as indicated on drawings. Coin operated and master keyed. Height varies as
indicated on drawings. Provide options including: Handicap Accessibility, Stainless Steel
finished end panels, sloping top and fillers.
2.2
Design and Fabrication
2.2.1
Generally
.1
Fabricate work of this Section with machinery and tools specifically designed for
the intended manufacturing processes, and with skilled tradesmen.
.2
Fit and assemble work in the shop. When this is not possible, make a trial shop
assembly.
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
SECTION 05500
Page 05500 - 8
Construction
.1
Fabricate work with materials, component sizes, metal gauges, reinforcing,
anchors, and fasteners of adequate strength to withstand intended use, and with
allowable design factors imposed by Jurisdictional Authorities.
.2
Ensure that work will remain free of warping, buckling, opening of joints and
seams, distortion, and permanent deformation.
Assembly
.1
Accurately cut, machine, and fit joints, corners, copes and mitres so that junctions
between components fit together tightly, and in true planes.
.2
Fasten work with concealed methods, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
.3
Weld all connections where possible, and bolt where not possible, and cut off bolts
flush with nuts. Countersink bolt heads and provide method to prevent loosening
of nuts. Ream holes drilled for fastenings.
.4
Make welded joints tight, flush, and in true planes with base metals, and
continuous at joints where entry of water into building or into voids of members or
assemblies is possible. Continuously grind and make smooth welds in exposed
locations.
.5
Provide for differential movements within assemblies and at junctions of
assemblies with surrounding work.
.6
Plug galvanizing vent holes with pear shaped fishing weights hammered in place
and filed smooth.
.7
Fabricate shims of galvanized steel of sizes required.
Finish Work
.1
Provide holes and connections for work installed under other Sections of this
Specification.
.2
Cleanly and smoothly finish exposed edges of materials, including holes.
.3
Cap open ends of sections exposed to view, such as pipes, channels, angles, and
other similar work.
Prime Painting of Steel: Clean all loose mill scale, rust, dirt, weld flux, and spatter from
work after fabrication. Grind smooth sharp projections. Prepare for prime painting by blast
cleaning to SSPC-SP6. Apply to steel a shop prime coat of paint. Work paint into corners,
and onto open areas smoothly. Deliver work to site with primer undamaged. Paint all
surfaces except those to be welded in field, encased in concrete, or that are machined or
galvanized. Paint surfaces that are inaccessible to finish field painting with two coats of
primer.
2.2.6
2.2.7
SECTION 05500
Page 05500 - 9
Galvanized Steel
.1
Pre-clean steel work in accordance with accepted methods to produce an
acceptable surface for quality hot dip galvanizing.
.2
Galvanize steel members, fabrications, and assemblies after fabrication by the hot
dip process in accordance with CSA G164. Minimum coating Z275.
.3
Galvanize bolts, nuts and washers and iron and steel hardware components in
accordance with CSA G164.
.4
Safeguard products against steel embrittlement in conformance with ASTM A143.
.5
Design features which may lead to difficulties during galvanizing shall be pointed
out prior to dipping.
.6
The composition of metal in the galvanizing bath shall be not less than 98.0% zinc.
Mechanical Damage: Repair areas damaged by welding, flame cutting, or during handling,
transport or erection (in accordance with ASTM A780) using one of the following methods
whenever the damage exceeds 4.7 mm in width:
.1
Cold Galvanizing Compound
.1
Ensure surfaces to be reconditioned with cold galvanized zinc-rich
compound are clean, dry, and free of oil, grease and corrosion products.
.2
Power clean areas to be repaired to near white metal condition. To ensure
that a smooth reconditioned coating can be effected, extend surface
preparation into the undamaged galvanized compound.
.3
Touch up using specified cold galvanizing compound.
.4
Spray or brush apply paint in minimum two coats until a dry film
thickness of 4 mils minimum has been achieved. Apply a finish coat of
aluminum paint to provide a colour blend with the surrounding
galvanizing. Verify coating thickness by measurements with a magnetic
or electromagnetic gauge.
.2
Treat galvanized surfaces that are cut, welded, or threaded with three coats of cold
galvanizing compound immediately following damage to galvanized protection.
.3
Coating shall be continuous, adherent, as smooth and evenly distributed as
possible and free from any defect that is detrimental to the stated end use of the
coated article.
.4
Determine the integrity of the coating by visual inspection and coating thickness
measurements.
.5
2.2.8
2.2.9
SECTION 05500
Page 05500 - 10
The galvanized coating shall be sufficiently adherent to withstand normal handling
during transport and erection.
Wet Storage Stain: Remove any wet storage stain if formed and discovered prior to leaving
the galvanizer's plant, unless late pick up or acceptance of delivery has necessitated the
material being stored in unfavourable conditions. In any event, remove wet storage stain
before installation so that premature failure of the coating will not occur. Remove wet
storage stain as follows:
.1
Arrange the objects so that their surfaces dry rapidly.
.2
Remove light deposits by means of a stiff bristle (not wire) brush. Remove heavier
deposits by brushing with a 5% solution of sodium or potassium dichromate with
the addition of 0.1% by volume of concentrated sulphuric acid. Apply with a stiff
bristle brush and leave for about 30 seconds before thoroughly rinsing and drying.
Alternatively a proprietary product such as Oakite Highlite, which is intended for
this purpose may be used according to manufacturer's recommendations.
Stainless Steel Work
.1
The stainless steel fabricator shall take all necessary precautions to safeguard
against latent surface discolouration due to disturbance of the natural protective
oxide coating of the material or to contamination from other sources. The
fabrication process shall include proper and adequate cleaning in accordance with
the recommended practices set out in ASTM A380.
.2
Workmanship shall be the best standard practice for this type of work. Do all
stainless steel work in accordance with NAAMM, Code of Standard Practice for
the Metal Industry, Workmanship, Class 1.
.3
Do all stainless steel fabrication in clean shops, located away from areas where
carbon steel is burnt, ground, or cut with abrasive wheels to ensure that carbon
steel dust will not be embedded into the stainless steel.
.4
Prior to fabrication of stainless steel clean tools and dies which have been used on
carbon steels.
.5
Ensure tools and dies used for forming and cutting stainless steel are free of nicks
and other damage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Inspection of Site
3.1.1
Take site measurements to ensure that work is fabricated to fit surrounding construction
around obstructions and projections in place, or yet to be put in place to suit service
locations, and inaccuracies of construction.
3.2
Installation
SECTION 05500
Page 05500 - 11
3.2.1
Install work plumb, true, square, straight, level, and accurately and tightly fitted together
and to surrounding work.
3.2.2
Work includes anchor bolts, bolts, washers and nuts, lag screws, expansion shields,
toggles, straps, sleeves, brackets, clips, shims and other items necessary for secure
installation, as required to support and/or resist loads and forces, and as required by
Jurisdictional Authorities.
3.2.3
Provide anchors at 600 mm o.c. for cast-in-place work unless shown otherwise.
3.2.4
Attach work to wood by screws through countersunk holes in metal.
3.2.5
Attach work to masonry with lead plugs and non-corrosion fastenings to support load with
a safety factor of 3.
3.2.6
Insulate between dissimilar metals, or between metals and masonry or concrete with
bituminous paint to prevent electrolysis.
3.2.7
Caulk between components installed under this work. Caulking materials as specified in
Section 07900. Caulking between miscellaneous metal work and adjacent work of others is
included in the work of Section 07900.
3.3
Patching and Refinishing
3.3.1
After erection, touch up prime paint and galvanized finishes damaged or removed during
installation.
3.3.2
Remove damaged, dented, defaced, defectively finished, or tool-marked components and
replace with new.
3.3.3
Refinish shop-applied finishes in field only with approval of Consultant.
3.3.4
Clean off dirt on surfaces resulting from installation work.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 05510
STEEL STAIRS, HANDRAILS, GUARDS AND RAILINGS
Page 05510 - 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
here.
1.2
LEED Requirements
1.2.1
1.2.2
.1
1.3
1.3.1
ASTM A53/A53M-06
Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel Black and
Hot Dipped, Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless
1.3.2
ASTM A143-01
Standard Practice for Safeguarding
Against
Embrittlement of Hot-Dip Galvanized Structural
Steel Products and Procedure for Detecting
Embrittlement
1.3.3
ASTM A167-99 (2004)
Standard Practice for Stainless Steel and HeatResisting Chromium Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet,
and Strip
1.3.4
ASTM A307-00
Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and
Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength
1.3.5
ASTM A325M-03
Standard Specification for High Strength Bolts for
Structural Steel Joints (Metric)
1.3.6
ASTM A519-03
Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon and
Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing
1.3.7
ASTM A563M-04
Standard Specification for Carbon And Alloy
Steel Nuts
1.3.8
CAN/CSA-S16.1-01
Limit States Design of Steel Structures
1.3.9
CSA W47.1-03
Certification of Companies for the Fusion
Welding of Steel
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 05510
Page 05510 - 2
1.3.10
CSA W55.3-1965 (R1998)
Resistance Welding Qualification Code for
Fabricators of Structural Members Used In
Buildings
1.3.11
CSA W59-03
Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding)
1.3.12
CAN/CSA-G40.20-04/G40.21-04
General Requirements for Rolled or Welded
Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steels
1.3.13
CAN/CSA-G164-M92 (R1998)
Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped
Articles
1.3.14
CISC/CPMA 2-75
Canadian Institute of Steel Construction/Canadian
Paint Manufacturers Association-A Quick Drying
Primer for Use On Structural Steel
1.4
Quality Assurance
1.4.1
Qualifications of Subcontractor: Execute work of this Section using a firm thoroughly
conversant with governing laws, bylaws, and regulations. Use workmen skilled in this
work.
1.4.2
Welding
.1
Welding of structural components shall be done only by fabricators certified by
CSA W47.1 or W55.3 as applicable, for welding of steel, and who shall perform
welding to conform to W59.
.2
Perform stainless steel welding using the Argon Arc process.
.3
Weld all connections where possible, and bolt where not possible. Provide method
to prevent loosening of nuts. Ream holes drilled for fastenings. Make welded
joints tight, flush, and in true planes with base metals. Make welds continuous at
joints where entry of water into building or into voids of members or assemblies is
possible. Grind welds in exposed locations smooth in a manner that will not leave
blemishes on exposed surfaces. Join members generally by inert metal arc welding
where practicable, using materials recommended by manufacturers of metals being
welded. Remove flux completely following welding, and grind and polish joints
smooth and clean.
.4
Where galvanized steel is to be welded, provide adequate ventilation. If adequate
ventilation is not available, provide supplementary air circulation.
.5
Touch up all uncoated weld areas.
1.5
Design
1.5.1
Design work of this section in accordance with the Ontario Building Code.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 05510
Page 05510 - 3
1.5.2
The details on the drawings show the general arrangement of components to provide the
desired appearance. The fabricator shall employ a Professional Engineer registered in the
Province of Ontario to design the details of the railings and stairs, and the connections to
the building structure, to satisfy all the requirements of the Ontario Building Code.
1.6
Submittals
1.6.1
Shop Drawings
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01001, of all this work,
including large-scale detail of members and materials, of connection and jointing
details, and of anchorage devices, dimensions, gauges, thicknesses, description of
materials, metal finishing, as well as all other pertinent data and information, for
Consultant's review before fabrication.
.2
Shop drawings for work of this section shall bear the seal and signature of a
Professional Engineer registered in the Province of Ontario.
.3
Submit sample pieces of wire mesh and trimwork.
1.6.2
Mock-Up and Samples: Construct 1 bay mock-up of balustrade of each type as detailed on
Drawings, at a location on site as directed by the Consultant. Mock-up shall be approved
by the Consultant before fabrication commences. When approved, mock-up shall be left on
the site until completion of work. Approved mock-up may become part of the completed
work.
1.7
Product Delivery, Storage and Protection
1.7.1
Provide and maintain protection for work of this Section.
1.7.2
Protect exposed surfaces of metal work with protective coatings or wrappings. Use
materials recommended by finishers or manufacturers of metals, to ensure that method is
sufficiently protective, easily removable, and harmless to the finish.
1.7.3
Raise the articles from the ground and separate with strip spacers to provide free access of
air to most parts of the surface. Incline in a manner which will give continuous drainage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
2.1.1
General
.1
Metals shall be free from defects which impair strength or durability, or which are
visible. Metals shall be new, of best quality, and free from rust, or waves, or
buckles, clean, straight, and with sharply defined profiles.
.2
Select materials for surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface
blemishes when exposed to view in finished unit. Exposed-to-view surfaces which
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 05510
Page 05510 - 4
exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, "oil-canning", stains, discolorations,
dents or other imperfections on finished units will not be acceptable.
2.1.2
Structural Steel: Hot rolled to meet requirements of CAN3-G40.21, Grade 300W or better.
Sheet: cold-rolled furniture steel, double annealed, mill stretched and levelled, and fully
pickled. Otherwise, steel shall be hot-rolled or cold-rolled of alloy to suit needs of
fabrication, use, and appearance.
2.1.3
Stainless Steel Wire, Sheets and Plates: AISI Type 304, austenitic grade, '18-8'
composition, No. 4 finish. For handrails use minimum 42 ksi yield strength stainless steel.
2.1.4
Primers and Coatings
2.1.5
.1
Interior Steel in Dry Areas: Quick drying oil alkyd conforming to CISC/CPMA
2.75.
.2
Exterior Steel, Interior Steel in Unheated Areas, Steel Embedded in Concrete: Hot
dip galvanized conforming to CSA G164, minimum Z275 coating.
.3
Galvanized Coating Touch-Up: W.R. Meadows "Galvafroid" or Kerry Industries
"Z.R.C." zinc rich coating or similar manufacturer containing minimum 90% zinc
by weight.
Fastenings: Nuts and bolts shall conform to ASTM A307, A325, and A563 as applicable.
.1
For interior work: cadmium-plated fastenings where other protection is not
specified.
.2
For stainless steel: Type 400 stainless steel.
2.1.6
Anchors and Shims: For exposed anchorage of stainless steel, use stainless steel and
otherwise to match metal anchored. For non-exposed work, anchors and shims may be
galvanized steel.
2.1.7
Pipe and Tube
2.1.8
.1
Ferrous steel pipe: to ASTM A53, Type S- Seamless, Grades A and B.
.2
Stainless steel pipe: ASTM A167 Type 304, austenitic grade, '18-8' composition,
No. 4 finish. For handrails use minimum 42 ksi yield strength stainless steel.
.3
Ferrous steel square tube: to ASTM A519, cold drawn, seamless and welded.
Non-Shrinking Grout: "In-Pakt" by C.C. Chemicals, "V-3" by W.R. Meadows or "M-Bed"
by Sika Canada Inc.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 05510
2.2
Design and Fabrication Requirements
2.2.1
Generally
2.2.2
Page 05510 - 5
.1
Fabricate this work with machinery and tools specifically designed for the
intended manufacturing processes, and with skilled tradesmen.
.2
Fit and assemble work in the shop. When this is not possible, make a trial shop
assembly.
.3
Materials, component sizes, gauges of metals, anchorage and fastenings shall be of
adequate strength to withstand the intended use within allowable design factors, as
required by the Ontario Building Code, to ensure that all work is free of warping,
buckling, opening of joints and seams, distortion and permanent deformation.
Stairs, ladders and handrails shall support applicable live loads specified in the
Ontario Building Code.
.4
The details on the drawings show the general arrangement of components to
provide the desired appearance. The fabricator shall employ an Ontario
Professional Structural Engineer to design the details of the railings and stairs, and
the connections to the building structure, to satisfy all the requirements of the
Ontario Building Code.
.5
Ensure that work will remain free of warping, buckling, opening of joints and
seams, distortion, and permanent deformation.
Stainless Steel Work
.1
Take all necessary precautions to safeguard against latent surface discolouration
due to disturbance of the natural protective oxide coating of the material or to
contamination from other sources. The fabrication process shall include proper and
adequate cleaning.
.2
Workmanship shall be the best standard practice for this type of work.
.3
Do all stainless steel fabrication in clean shops, located away from areas where
carbon steel is burnt, ground, or cut with abrasive wheels to ensure that carbon
steel dust will not be embedded into the stainless steel.
.4
Prior to fabrication of stainless steel, clean tools and dies which have been used on
carbon steels.
.5
Discolouration of welded surfaces will not be accepted.
.6
Ensure tools and dies use for forming and cutting stainless steel are free of nicks
and other damage.
.7
Grind smooth and polish joints crevice free, flush, without seams, and to match
base metal in all respects.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 05510
2.2.3
2.2.4
Page 05510 - 6
Assembly
.1
Accurately cut, machine, and fit joints, corners, copes and mitres so that junctions
between components fit together tightly, and in true planes.
.2
Fasten work with concealed methods, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
.3
Weld all connections where possible, and bolt where not possible, and cut off bolts
flush with nuts. Countersink bolt heads and provide method to prevent loosening
of nuts. Ream holes drilled for fastenings. Weld pins to stair pans and landings
where stone is the finished surface.
.4
Make welded joints tight, flush, and in true planes with base metals, and
continuous at joints where entry of water into building or into voids of members or
assemblies is possible. Continuously grind and make smooth welds in exposed
locations.
.5
Provide for differential movements within assemblies and at junctions of
assemblies with surrounding work.
.6
Fabricate shims of galvanized steel of sizes required.
Finish Work
.1
Provide holes and connections for work installed under other Sections of this
Specification.
.2
Cleanly and smoothly finish exposed edges of materials, including holes.
.3
Cap open ends of sections exposed to view, such as pipes, channels, angles, and
other similar work.
2.2.5
Prime Painting of Ferrous Steel: Clean all loose mill scale, rust, dirt, weld flux, and spatter
from work after fabrication. Grind smooth sharp projections. Prepare for prime painting by
blast cleaning to SSPC-SP6 standard. Apply a shop prime coat of paint. Work paint into
corners, and onto open areas smoothly. Deliver work to site with primer undamaged. Paint
all surfaces except those to be welded in the field, or those encased in concrete. Give
surfaces that are inaccessible to finish field painting two coats of primer.
2.2.6
Galvanized Steel
.1
Galvanize all exterior ferrous items: Use minimum Z275 coating.
.2
Pre-clean steel work in accordance with accepted methods to produce an
acceptable surface for quality hot dip galvanizing.
.3
Galvanize steel members, fabrications, and assemblies after fabrication by the hot
dip process in accordance with CSA G164.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 05510
Page 05510 - 7
.4
Galvanize bolts, nuts and washers and iron and steel hardware components in
accordance with CSA G164.
.5
Safeguard products against steel embrittlement in conformance with ASTM A143.
.6
Design features which may lead to difficulties during galvanizing shall be pointed
out prior to dipping.
2.3
Steel Railings, Handrails, Guardrails
2.3.1
Provide steel handrails, railings, guardrails, wire mesh balustrade and clips, rod pickets,
flanges and brackets to details shown. Min. wall thickness 12 ga.
2.3.2
Fabricate wood handrail brackets from stainless steel for mounting to existing concrete as
indicated on drawings.
2.3.3
Provide welded wire mesh balustrade panels where indicated. Fabricate panels of wire
mesh secured into channel frame. Weld framed panel to uprights, with connecting plates.
2.3.4
Form rail-to-end post connections and all changes in rail direction by mitred joints or
radius bends as applicable.
2.3.5
Remove burrs from all exposed cut edges.
2.3.6
Form bends and wall returns to uniform radius, free from buckles and twists, with smooth
finished surfaces, or use prefabricated bends.
2.3.7
Close exposed ends of pipe and tube by welding metal closure in place or by use of
prefabricated fittings.
2.3.8
For posts set in concrete, furnish matching sleeves.
2.3.9
Work shall be one piece or in as long lengths as possible. Join pipe sections using
concealed connectors.
2.3.10
Weld all field joints, grind and polish smooth to match base metal.
2.4
Stairs
2.4.1
The method of stair construction shall conform to the Consultant's drawings and reviewed
shop drawings. Framing shall not restrict required width or headroom. Weld all
connections where possible; where not possible, bolted connections will be permitted, but
bolts shall be cut off flush with nuts and made as inconspicuous as possible.
2.4.2
Fabricate stairs to facilitate erection as building is ready to receive them.
2.4.3
Extend handrails horizontally at sides of stairs and ramps in accordance with O.B.C.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 05510
Page 05510 - 8
3.1
Inspection of Site
3.1.1
Take site measurements to ensure that work is fabricated to fit surrounding construction
around obstructions and projections in place, or yet to be put in place to suit service
locations, and inaccuracies of construction.
3.2
Installation
3.2.1
Install work plumb, true, square, straight, level, and accurately and tightly fitted together
and to surrounding work.
3.2.2
Work includes anchor bolts, bolts, washers and nuts, lag screws, expansion shields,
toggles, straps, sleeve brackets, clips, shims and other items necessary for secure
installation, as required to support and/or resist loads and forces, and as required by
Jurisdictional Authorities.
3.2.3
Hand to appropriate trades, items over for casting into concrete or building into structure
together with setting templates.
3.2.4
Insulate between dissimilar metals, or between metals and masonry or concrete with
bituminous paint to prevent electrolysis.
3.2.5
In concrete construction cast vertical pipes into sleeves set into concrete at least 150 mm.
Fill with non-shrinking grout. In steel construction weld to plates, stringers or other
structural member.
3.2.6
Provide temporary supports and bracing required to position stair assemblies.
3.2.7
Caulk between components installed under this work. Caulking materials as specified in
Section 07900. Caulking between miscellaneous metal work and adjacent work of others is
included in the work of Section 07900.
3.2.8
Wood handrails to be installed under the Work of Section 06100.
3.3
Patching and Refinishing
3.3.1
After erection, touch up prime paint, and shop applied coatings and finishes (prefinishes)
damaged or removed during installation.
3.3.2
Remove damaged, dented, defaced, defectively finished, or tool-marked components and
replace with new.
3.3.3
Clean off dirt on surfaces resulting from installation work.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Page 06100 - 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
here.
1.2
LEED Requirements
1.2.1
1.2.2
.1
1.3
1.3.1
CSA-B111-1974 (R1998)
Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples
1.3.2
CSA-0121-M1978 (R1998)
Douglas Fir Plywood
1.3.3
CSA-0141-05
Softwood Lumber
1.3.4
CSA-0151-04
Canadian Softwood Plywood
1.3.5
CAN/CSA 080 Series-00
Wood Preservation
1.3.6
CAN/ULC-S102-M88 (R2000)
Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning
Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies
1.3.7
CAN/CSA G164-M92
Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Objects
1.3.8
CAN/CSA-080.27-M89
Fire Retardant Treatment of Plywood by Pressure
Processes
1.3.9
CAN/CSA 086-01
Engineering Design in Wood
1.3.10
NFPA 80-1999
Fire Doors and Windows.
1.4
Submittals
1.4.1
LEED Submittals: Submit schedules and supporting documentation in accordance with
Section 01611 for approval by LEED Consultant prior to ordering of materials.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Page 06100 - 2
1.5
Quality Assurance
1.5.1
N.L.G.A. 1991 National Lumber Grades Authority, Standard Grading Rules for Canadian
Lumber.
1.5.2
Identify lumber by grade stamp of an agency certified by Canadian Lumber Standards
Administration Board.
1.5.3
Plywood identification: by grade mark in accordance with applicable CSA Standards.
1.5.4
Each panel of plywood required to be fire retardant treated to bear ULC label indicating
Flame Spread Classification (FSC), and smoke developed.
1.6
1.6.1
When it is required that wood maintain dimensional stability and tolerances, to ensure
accurate installation of later work, store and install it only in dry areas and when no further
installation of moist materials is contemplated.
1.6.2
Accept delivery of pressed steel door frames. Be responsible for any damage to frames
from time of delivery until accepted by the Consultant after installation.
1.6.3
Provide dry storage areas for rough carpentry materials. Stack lumber 150 mm clear of
floor.
1.6.4
Protect fire-retardant materials against high humidity and moisture.
1.6.5
Install temporary wood protection strips at door jambs and similar locations vulnerable to
damage.
1.6.6
Cover materials stored on site with tarpaulins or polyethylene sheets to prevent moisture,
absorption and impairment of structural and aesthetic-properties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
2.1.1
LEED Requirements
.1
LEED Requirements for FSC Wood: All wood materials and assemblies are to be
FSC Certified as defined in Section 01611 LEED Product Requirements.
.2
LEED Requirements for Composite Wood: All composite wood products and
agrifiber products (including core materials) installed within the building weather
proofing system must be free of added Urea Formaldahyde as specified in Section
01359 – IAQ Management.
Project No. 0701-BS
2.1.2
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Page 06100 - 3
Except as indicated or specified otherwise lumber shall be softwood S4S, SPF species
moisture content (MC) not greater than 19% at time of installation in accordance with the
following standards;
.1
CSA 0141
.2
NLGA Standard grading rules for Canadian Lumber.
2.1.3
Machine stress - rated lumber is acceptable for all purposes.
2.1.4
Lumber
.1
S-DRY, graded and stamped to National Lumber Grades Authority, Standard
Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber.
.1
Studs: spruce, pine or fir (SPF), 121c. "STUD".
.2
Blocking, furring, strapping, curbs, battens, nailers, bracing, bridging, and cants:
spruce, pine or fir (SPF), standard or better grade.
.3
Cedar: NLGA, Select Cedar, Clear or better, Western Red Cedar, surfaced, kiln
dried.
2.1.5
Pressure Applied Wood Preservative: Pressure applied CCA preservative with 6.5 kg/m³
average retention for roof woodwork and wood in contact with floor slabs or walls in areas
to be waterproofed, and 4 kg/m³ elsewhere; "Outdoor Wood" by Hickson Building
Products or "Green Pentox" by Osmose Wood Preserving Company, or "C50" by Timber
Specialties Limited. Apply preservative in accordance with CAN3-080 Series.
2.1.6
Surface Applied Wood Preservative: Copper napthenate of 10% pentachlorophenol
solution, water repellant preservative.
2.1.7
Fire Retardant Treatment of Lumber and Plywood : "Dricon" by J.A. Biewer or equivalent,
conforming to CAN2-080.20 and CAN2-080.27 to provide a flame spread rating of 25 or
less, in accordance with ULC test method CAN4/ULC-S102.
2.1.8
Plywood: Conforming to CSA 0121, "G1S" Douglas Fir.
2.1.9
Glue Laminated Wood: Glue laminated wood is not acceptable at Handrails.
2.1.10
Nails, Spikes, Staples and Other Connectors: to CSA B111, galvanized for exterior work,
interior highly humid areas and for treated lumber; plain finish elsewhere. Use spiral thread
nails except where specified otherwise.
2.1.11
Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Screws and Pin Type Fasteners: Hot dip galvanized to CAN/CSA
G164 for exterior work and for pressure preservative treated lumber. Stainless steel for Ipe.
Elsewhere for sight exposed surfaces, prime paint. Use surface fastenings of following
types, except where specified type is indicated:
.1
To hollow masonry, gypsum board and panel surfaces use toggle bolts.
Project No. 0701-BS
.2
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Page 06100 - 4
To solid masonry and concrete use expansion shield with lag screw, or lead plug
with wood screw.
2.2
Fabrication
2.2.1
Comply with CAN3-086 or CAN3-086.1 for all fabrication and assembly of structural
components off site, or on site.
2.2.2
Design construction details for expansion and contraction of materials.
2.2.3
Machine sand surfaces exposed in the finished work. Hand sand to an even smooth surface
free from scratches.
2.2.4
Pressure fire retardant treat lumber prior to final milling. Each piece shall bear the mark of
Underwriters Laboratories of Canada indicating conformance to CAN4/ULC-S102.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Generally
3.1.1
Lay out work carefully and to accommodate work of others. Cut and fit accurately. Erect in
position indicated on drawings. Align, level, square, plumb and secure work permanently
in place. Join work only over solid backing.
3.1.2
Bore holes true to line, and to same size as bolts. Drive bolts into place for snug fit, and use
plates or washers for boltheads and nut bearings. Turn up bolts and lag screws tightly when
installed, and again just before being concealed by other work or at completion of work.
3.1.3
Cooperate with work of other Sections to ensure that unity of actions will ensure orderly
progress to meet construction schedule.
3.1.4
Provide anchors, bolts and inserts required for attachment of the work of this Section to
those performing the work of other Sections, and who are responsible for their installation.
3.1.5
Work shall include such rough hardware as nails, bolts, nuts, washers, screws, clips,
hangers, connectors, and strap iron required for installation of work, and all operating
hardware required on work of this Section for temporary work.
3.2
Grounds, Blocking, Strapping, Furring, Sleepers and Nailers
3.2.1
Do not regard grounds, blocking, furring, and such other fastening provisions as shown on
drawings as exact or complete. Provide required provisions for fastenings, located and
secured to suit site conditions and adequate for intended support.
3.2.2
Cut fastening work into lengths as long as practicable, and with square ends. Erect work
plumb, in true planes, and fastened rigidly in place.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Page 06100 - 5
3.2.3
Rough bucks for openings jambs, heads, and sills shall be minimum 50 mm thick, and of
width of casings, or as otherwise indicated. Set bucks plumb, level, and anchored securely
in place.
3.2.4
For mirrors installed over concrete block without separating gypsum board layer, install
wood blocking at 450 mm o.c. behind mirrors.
3.2.5
Provide wood furring and strapping for applied facings, caseworks, pilaster strips, etc. In
drywall construction build in before gypsum board is applied to studs.
3.2.6
Except where steel is specifically shown, provide wood blocking and supports in metal
stud partitions for fastening of items anchored to stud partitions. Provide wood blocking
and supplementary supports in metal studs supporting counters, lockers, washroom
accessories, and similar items.
3.2.7
Provide 16 mm thick fire retardant treated plywood fastened to metal stud framing, at
mirrors in gypsum board partitions.
3.2.8
Coordinate with Section 09250, for the installation of wood blocking for fastening of wall
mounted accessories and casework.
3.2.9
Provide plywood blocking to receive window blinds.
3.3
Wood Preservative
3.3.1
Use pressure impregnated material for lumber and plywood used in roofing work and for
items previously specified in "Materials". Treat all bolt holes and freshly cut surfaces with
a minimum of 2 coats of 10% CCA concentrate.
3.3.2
For material cut or bored after pressure treatment, treat surfaces of material with surface
applied wood preservative, before installation.
3.3.3
Apply preservative by dipping, or by brush to completely saturate and maintain wet film on
surface for minimum 3 minute soak on lumber and one minute soak on plywood.
3.3.4
Re-treat surfaces exposed by cutting, trimming or boring with liberal brush application of
preservative before installation.
3.4
Curbs, Bases, Supports, Blocking and Parapets
3.4.1
Install plywood, and blocking at roofs as indicated on drawings, secure permanently to
structure with galvanized 9 mm bolts. Locate fastenings within 300 mm from ends and
uniformly spaced between. Space bolts at 1.2 m and nails at 600 mm centres except where
indicated otherwise. Trim and level to accommodate cambers, falls and thickness of
insulation, and to receive flashings and applied roofing.
3.5
Installation of Hollow Metal Steel Frames
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Page 06100 - 6
3.5.1
Set frames plumb and square in their exact location. Firmly block and brace to prevent
shifting. Shim up where required to ensure proper alignment dimensions from finished
floor to head of frame. Install temporary wood spreaders at mid-height.
3.5.2
Where pressed steel frames are installed in concrete walls, secure frames to concrete using
lead expansion shields and anchor bolts through pipe sleeves. Perform drilling of concrete
as required. Fill recessed bolt heads flush to frame face with approved metal filler and sand
smooth.
3.5.3
Install fire rated door frames in accordance with Chapters 2 and 3 of NFPA 80 as specified
in OBC.
3.6
Fire Retardant Treated Furring and Plywood Backing
3.6.1
Blocking and framing in ceiling spaces, partitions and bulkheads and plywood backboards
supporting electrical panels, disconnects, splitters and other electrical devices shall be fire
retardant treated.
3.6.2
Do not expose treated material to dampness between the time the material is treated and the
time the painter's finish is applied. Carefully sand surfaces which show evidence of salt
deposits to remove such evidence before finish is applied. Provide identification that these
specifications have been complied with on large items, and bundles of small items. This
requirement also applies to all fire retardant treated materials.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 06210
INSTALLATION OF DOORS
AND FINISH HARDWARE
Page 06210 - 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
here.
1.2
LEED Requirements
1.2.1
1.2.2
.1
1.3
Work Included In This Section
1.3.1
Installation of hollow metal doors.
1.3.2
Installation of finish hardware for hollow metal doors, and aluminum doors.
1.3.3
Installation of door grilles.
1.4
1.4.1
Accept delivery of doors and finish hardware.
1.4.2
Inspect doors for damage, upon delivery to the site. Hollow metal doors which cannot be
readily corrected by sanding, shall be promptly returned to the manufacturer.
1.4.3
Store doors in a dry and clean location. Store in a temperature and humidity controlled
area. Stack 150 mm off the floor.
1.4.4
Be responsible for any damage to doors and hardware from time of delivery until accepted
by Owner after installation.
1.5
Jobsite Control and Distribution of Hardware
1.5.1
Provide locked room for the storage of hardware at the job and a person responsible for the
control and distribution of hardware.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 06210
AND FINISH HARDWARE
Page 06210 - 2
1.6
Single Source Responsibility
1.6.1
It is the intent of this section to establish a single, competent source to be responsible for
the installation of finish hardware listed in Section 08710. Faulty installation of electronic
hardware shall therefore be traced back to this section, not to Division 16.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOT APPLICABLE
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
3.1.1
Finish Hardware
.1
The installers shall obtain a copy of ANSI/DHI A115.1G-94, "Installation Guide
for Doors and Hardware". It is the intent of this document to be used as a reference
guide in the proper handling, storage, and installation of finishing hardware, and
doors and frames. This document can be obtained through the Door and Hardware
Institute.
.2
Other trades installing hardware must follow all manufacturers instructions
including door closer adjustment, handing of locksets as required, and degree of
door swing. Advise the Consultants if door frames are not square and plumb and
prevent proper door installation.
.3
Mount hardware to suit door elevations. Unless otherwise directed by the
Consultant, install hardware at the following mounting heights:
Locksets
Exit Device
Push/Pull
Deadlock
1015mm
1015mm
1065mm
1200mm
.4
When requested, the hardware supplier will instruct the installer as to how various
newer or unusual items that are required to be installed for proper performance.
.5
Set, fit and adjust hardware according to manufacturer's directions. Hardware shall
operate freely. After initial installation, adjust door closers for closing and latching
speed and panic devices for proper latching and again following the completion of
the building HVAC balancing and commissioning. Protect installed hardware from
damage and paint spotting.
.6
Predrill kickplates and doors before attachment of plates. Apply with waterresistant adhesive and countersunk stainless steel screws.
Project No. 0701-BS
3.1.3
Page 06210 - 3
.7
Locate hardware in accordance with requirements specified in Section 08710.
.8
Thresholds: Site measure openings before cutting. Set thresholds on two
continuous beads of caulking conforming to Section 07900.
.9
Door Closers and Holders: Install door closers in such a manner that door opening
is unaffected, and that maximum swing is permitted.
.10
Weatherstripping of Doors
.11
3.1.2
SECTION 06210
AND FINISH HARDWARE
.1
Install weatherstripping effectively to tightly seal entire perimeter of
doors. Secure in place with non-ferrous screws, in accurate alignment.
.2
Maintain integrity of weatherseal at head of doors fitted with closers.
Adapt weatherstripping as required to achieve specified performance and
provide any necessary accessories.
Electronic Hardware
.1
Install all electronic handicap operator components, security components
such as magnetic locks, door status switches, card readers, processors,
transformers, and other electric devices.
.2
All wiring will be supplied and installed by Electrical Division 16
including conduit, boxes and other electrical appurtenances, including
connections and terminations. Be responsible for ensuring that all wiring
work is done in accordance with the suppliers wiring diagrams and
directions.
.3
Arrange for testing and commissioning of system by the distributor of the
system. Submit a copy of reports to the Consultant.
.4
Note: When installing electric strikes, it is imperative that doors are
perfectly aligned to enable the bolt to properly close. Also ensure that
rubber silencers do not impair the proper strike action required. Adjust or
remove silencers as necessary.
Hollow Metal and Aluminum Swing Doors
.1
Hang doors to swing easily and freely on their hinges, to remain stationary in any
position, and to close tightly and evenly on frames without binding.
.2
Provide 2 mm clearance at head and jambs, 3mm clearance between pairs of doors,
or panels and no more than 10 mm at floor. Provide clearance for intended finish
flooring.
Door Grilles: Install grilles in interior doors. Screw securely in position using stainless
steel screws.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 06210
AND FINISH HARDWARE
Page 06210 - 4
3.2
Adjusting and Cleaning of Finish Hardware
3.2.1
Check and adjust each operating hardware item to ensure proper operation and function of
unit.
3.2.2
Lubricate moving parts as recommended by hardware manufacturer. Use graphite type
lubricant if no other is recommended.
3.2.3
Repair or replace defective materials and units which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to
operate freely and smoothly. Re-install items found improperly installed.
3.2.4
Prior to date of Substantial Performance, re-adjust and re-lubricate as necessary.
3.2.5
Instruct Owner's designated personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of
hardware and finishes at time of final hardware adjustment.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 07131
RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING
Page 07131 - 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
here.
1.2
Toronto Parking Authority (TPA) Requirements
1.2.1
Alterations to the waterproofing system over the existing parking structure must adhere to
the Toronto Parking Authority’s (TPA) specifications. Refer to Volume 3 Specifications,
Reference Reports “07120 Asphalt Waterproofing Paving TPA”
1.3
LEED Requirements
1.3.1
1.3.2
.1
1.4
1.4.1
CAN/CGSB-37.50-M89
Hot Applied, Rubberized Asphalt for Roofing and
Waterproofing
1.4.2
CAN/CGSB-37.51-M90
Application Rubberized Asphalt, Hot Applied, for
Roofing and Waterproofing
1.4.3
CGSB-37-GP-9Ma
Primer Asphalt, Unfilled, for Asphalt Roofing,
Dampproofing and Waterproofing.
1.4.4
Work of this Section shall be done by a franchised applicator approved by the
manufacturer of the waterproof membrane.
1.5
Delivery and Storage
1.5.1
Deliver materials to the site undamaged, in original sealed containers, clearly indicating the
name of the manufacturer and product.
1.5.2
Store solvent-base liquids and primer away from excessive heat and open flame.
1.5.3
Store primer at temperature above 5C.
1.6
Protection
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 07131
Page 07131 - 2
1.6.1
Take extreme care not to damage waterproof membrane once it is applied. Cover
membrane completely with protection board unless specified otherwise. Protective
covering shall be approved by manufacturer of waterproof membrane. Do not allow
construction traffic on membrane without first applying protection.
1.7
Extended Warranty
1.7.1
Submit a warranty in accordance with Section 01001, covering the repair or replacement of
defective work for a period of 4 years from the expiration of the one-year warranty stated
in the General Conditions.
1.7.2
Total warranty period shall be 5 years.
1.8
Pre-Construction Meeting
1.8.1
Well in advance of field work, arrange for a project site meeting of all parties associated
with work of this Section. Meeting shall include the Contractor, waterproof membrane
supplier and Consultant.
1.8.2
Meeting shall review specifications for work included under this Section and determine a
complete understanding of requirements and responsibilities relative to work included,
storage and handling of materials, materials to be used, installation of materials, sequence
and quality control, project staffing, project restrictions, and other matters affecting the
construction, so as to permit compliance with the intent of this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
2.1.1
The following is a full protection system for application at horizontal and vertical surfaces.
2.1.2
Rubberized Asphalt Membrane
.1
General: "6125" by Hydrotech Membrane Corp., "790-11" by Bakor, “Tremproof
6100” by Tremco, or Carlisle “CCW-500R”.
.2
Air Shafts: Use rubberized asphalt in bottoms; on walls, use Bakor "770-06",
lapped into rubberized asphalt.
2.1.3
Primer: Cut back, unfilled asphalt, conforming to CGSB 37-GP-9Ma.
2.1.4
Flexible Sheet: Supplied by membrane manufacturer as part of system; standard or heavy
duty membrane depending on joint condition.
2.1.5
Torchable Base Sheet Flashing: Smooth surface, SBS modified bitumen membrane
reinforced with 180 gm/m2 non-woven polyester, "Sopralene Flam 180" by Soprema Inc. or
the equivalent manufactured by Bakor distributed by Lexsuco Limited, or Carlisle.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 07131
Page 07131 - 3
2.1.6
Protection Board: "Hydro-Shield" by Hydrotech Membrane Corp., "990-31" by Bakor,
"Tremco 2450" by Tremco, or equivalent by W.R. Meadows.
2.1.7
Joint Rubber Sheet Covering: Elastomeric material consisting of laminated butyl and
EPDM rubber, not less than 47 mil total thickness, as supplied by manufacturer of
membrane material.
2.1.8
Rubber Sheet Adhesive: As recommended by the rubber sheet manufacturer.
2.1.9
Drainage Composite (Horizontal and Vertical): "Miradrain 9800" (with woven geotextile
fabric on one side) by Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing or approved alternative by
W.R. Meadows.
2.1.10
Joint Filler: "Rodofoam PR grade" by Sternson Construction Products, "Sealtight Rescor"
by W.R. Meadows of Canada Ltd., or other approved manufacture. Filler thickness shall be
twice the width of the opening to be filled.
2.1.11
Fabric Reinforcing: Spunbonded polyester, style 2017, by Dupont.
2.1.12
Metal Reglets: Continuous, non-corrosive metal reglets of size and profile as recommended
by the membrane material manufacturer and having the opening sealed with a temporary
waterproof tape.
2.1.13
Securement Bars: Continuous 3 mm x 25 mm galvanized steel bar, drilled 200 mm o.c. for
screw attachment.
2.1.14
Fibre Cants: Bevelled, laminated layers of asphalt fibreboard, 75 x 75 mm.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Examination
3.1.1
Verify before starting work that conditions and surfaces are satisfactory to proceed.
3.2
Preparation
3.2.1
Clean all surfaces free of moisture, frost, contaminants, such as dust, dirt, oil, grease, loose
particles, laitence, paint, form oil, or other foreign matter. Power sweep and brush, remove
dirt and dust with an industrial type vacuum cleaner. Remove curing agents that may limit
adhesion.
3.2.2
Ensure that indentions, rock pockets, tile holes, voids, cracks, holes, honeycombing, and
other damaged surfaces have been repaired by others at least 48 hours and cured before
application of membrane.
3.2.3
Supply metal reglets to other Sections for building in where required to receive membrane
edges and instruct as to proper location and position.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 07131
Page 07131 - 4
3.2.4
Surfaces to receive the waterproofing materials must be free from cavities and/or shutter
marks which will damage the membrane. Grind edges and corners to a smooth, even
surface.
3.2.5
Before applying deck materials, inspect the preceding work of other trades for defects
detrimental to the performance of the membrane waterproofing. Report defects to the
Consultant in writing for correction before work progresses. Commencement of work shall
imply acceptance of all conditions.
3.2.6
Ambient and surface temperatures shall be at least 10C for a minimum period of 48 hours
before, during and after waterproofing application except with the written approval of the
Consultant.
3.2.7
Ensure that substrates slope properly.
3.2.8
Cut out cracks 1.6 mm and over in width to 13 mm wide and 9 mm deep. Seal cracks and
control joints with joint sealant. Use primer in conjunction with sealant compound.
3.3
Membrane Application - Exterior
3.3.1
Apply rubberized asphalt membrane waterproofing in accordance with the applicable
clauses of CAN/CGSB 37.51. Apply two plies on horizontal surfaces and one ply on
verticals. Reinforce two ply applications only.
3.3.2
Store materials in protected locations.
3.3.3
Apply primer at coverage rate recommended by manufacturer for the particular surface
porosity, at the rate of 4.5 litres per 19m². Do not permit primer to collect in pools. Prevent
seepage through joints. Allow to dry thoroughly. Reprime surfaces not covered by
waterproofing the same day as primer.
3.3.4
Build up a 25 mm fillet of liquid membrane material at the junctions of horizontal and
vertical surfaces, including columns, pipes, curbs and walls. Extend a 100 mil thickness of
material, minimum 150 mm onto substrate horizontally and vertically from the fillet or
greater as required to form a watertight vessel.
3.3.5
Do not exceed temperature of 205C in melting kettle; use an approved kettle.
3.3.6
Apply compound between 180C and 205C to a thickness of 3 to 4 mm to form a
continuous membrane. Install joint rubber sheet in 300 mm wide strips centred over cracks,
control and construction joints in the substrate, and junctions of horizontal and vertical
surfaces and embedded in a 3 mm thick coating of membrane material. Carry membrane
over strips as specified above extending membrane 150 mm minimum at strip edges. Fill
reglets with membrane at membrane edges.
3.3.7
For two coat applications, after first coat, firmly press fabric reinforcing into hot
membrane, overlapping edges minimum of 50 mm.
3.3.8
After membrane on horizontal surfaces has cured, apply second coat of membrane material
to a uniform thickness of 3 to 4 mm.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 07131
Page 07131 - 5
3.3.9
Seal membrane around vent pipes, drains and other protrusions.
3.3.10
Turn membrane up vertical surfaces at least 150 mm wherever possible, and apply a layer
of SBS membrane set in hot rubberized monolithic membrane waterproofing. Apply a
second coat of hot rubber over the SBS. Turn both membranes into reglets and counter
flash with metal provided by Section 07400.
3.3.11
Bar completed areas from traffic until membrane has cured.
3.3.12
Cover areas to be waterproofed in uniform thickness with waterproofing membrane so as to
make the areas covered completely waterproof.
3.3.13
Apply air shaft wall waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
3.4
Membrane Protection
3.4.1
While membrane is still tacky, install one layer of protective board over the entire surface
of the completed membrane except where drainage board is placed immediately after
membrane application. Cut and fit board as required, butt joints tightly.
3.4.2
Where membrane is to be exposed in the finished work, sprinkle Type 10 Portland cement
powder in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
3.5
Drainage Board
3.5.1
Place drainage composite sheets to serve as drainage filter over waterproofing where
shown. Install with built-in filter fabric up, or against backfill, in accordance with
manufacturer's directions. Cut drain around penetrations. Provide a separate filter cloth to
match that in drainage composite material, at cut areas and at joints as required to maintain
continuity of filter system.
3.6
3.6.1
Manufacturer's technical representative to visit the site prior to waterproofing application
and comment on surface preparation. Provide a written report to Consultant for review.
3.6.2
Supervise the work of other Sections where work of such other sections is associated with
the membrane waterproofing system including the placement, finishing and curing of the
concrete substrate, the placement and compaction of backfilling, the laying of heating
cables for snow melting, the setting of pavers and the sealing of finished traffic surfaces
occurring over membrane waterproofing. Bear full responsibility for damages caused to the
membrane waterproofing system by these operations.
3.6.3
On completion of the membrane installation, provide temporary dike around horizontal
waterproofed areas. Test fill with at least 13 mm head of water in the presence of the
Consultant. Let stand for 24 hours. Examine for leaks and water escape. Drain areas and
repair deficiencies.
3.7
Testing and Inspection
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 07131
Page 07131 - 6
3.7.1
The Owner may engage the services of an inspection company approved by the Consultant
to carry out inspection and testing of materials. Payment will be made from a Cash
Allowance.
3.7.2
Inspection and testing for rubberized asphalt membrane waterproofing shall include the
following:
.1
Examination of existing conditions prior to commencement of work and reporting
of inconsistencies or defects to the Consultant.
.2
Verifying the standard and quantities of materials pertaining to rubberized asphalt
membrane, delivered to site prior to application. Verifying moisture absorbency of
deck and walls prior to membrane application. Verifying thickness of membrane.
Verifying compatibility of materials.
.3
Perform cut and adhesion tests.
.4
Ascertaining that all work is being executed in full compliance with the
Consultant's specification and requirements.
.5
The Contractor shall maintain its own quality control program to ensure that its
work conforms to the drawings and specifications.
.6
Liquid Applied Membranes
.1
Provide test cuts and a wet-mil thickness check for each 9m².
.2
The Contractor shall maintain an inventory to ensure materials are
installed at the specified rate.
.3
Test cuts will be made across the seams.
.4
Seam probes will be used.
3.8
Cleaning
3.8.1
On completion of the building, check area drains in waterproofed areas and ensure they are
unclogged and are draining properly.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 07180
THIN DECK COATING
Page 07180 - 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
here.
1.2
LEED Requirements
1.2.1
1.2.2
.1
1.3
Submittals
1.3.1
General
1.3.2
.1
Submit to the Consultant details of the waterproofing system not indicated in these
documents including material specifications, thicknesses, details at joints, cracks,
upstands, walls, drains, and termination points for review prior to starting work.
.2
Contractor is to submit installation procedure to the Construction Manager for
review prior to starting work including slab preparation requirements.
Certificates: Submit certificates confirming the following:
.1
The Applicator is presently a licensed Applicator of the coating system.
.2
The Applicator has a minimum of three (3) years of directly applicable deck
coating installation experience, or has installed a minimum of 5,000 m² of the
specified deck coating system.
.3
That a minimum of 7,500 m² of the system has been installed on parking structures
of similar exposure and has performed satisfactorily.
.4
The system will meet the warranty requirements as specified in this section.
.5
Surfaces to receive waterproofing systems were acceptable and found to be
satisfactory to receive the waterproofing system, as per the manufacturer's
requirements and these specifications. Application of coating shall imply
acceptance of surfaces.
.6
Deck coating was applied in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and
these specifications.
Project No. 0701-BS
.7
1.3.3
SECTION 07180
THIN DECK COATING
Page 07180 - 2
Completed waterproofing system conforms with system described herein.
Warranty
.1
Submit a warranty in accordance with Section 01001, covering the repair or
replacement of all defects in both workmanship and materials in the coatings, for a
period of 4 years from the expiration of the one-year warranty under the General
Conditions.
.2
Total warranty period: 5 years.
1.3.4
Samples: Submit a 215 mm x 280 mm product sample indicating proposed finish and
material thicknesses to be obtained for each specific application under the Contract with
Bid. These samples will represent the quality of finish of completed installation.
1.4
Performance Requirements
1.4.1
The deck coating system shall comply with the following requirements:
.1
Be totally waterproof, flexible and thermally compatible with the substrate under
applicable service conditions.
.2
Not allow moisture penetration including at termination details, expansion joints,
drains, upturns or splices.
.3
Remain skid resistant under its intended use in wet or dry conditions including
snow at applicable locations.
.4
Exhibit zero chloride permeability when tested in accordance with AASHTO T227 test procedure for the rapid determination of the chloride permeability of
concrete.
.5
Withstand active cyclical crack movements to a maximum of 1.5 mm and remain
waterproof.
.6
Exceed 1.0 MPa adhesion of the coating, primer, or surface patching to the
concrete substrate.
.7
Meet or exceed 1.0 MPa adhesion of all layers of the system to each other.
.8
Not debond, crack or wear excessively. Loss of aggregate in any area will
constitute failure.
.9
Not support combustion.
1.5
Environmental Requirements
1.5.1
Do not install coating when ambient air temperature or substrate temperature is less than 10
degrees C. If this temperature is not reached, installation of temporary heaters ventilated to
exterior is required.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 07180
THIN DECK COATING
Page 07180 - 3
1.5.2
Maintain air temperatures and substrate base temperature of installation area above 10
degrees C for 12 hours before, during and 72 hours after installation, or until materials have
adequately cured.
1.5.3
Protect materials from moisture damage or dust contamination until adequately cured.
1.5.4
All working conditions shall meet the requirements of the Occupational Health and Safety
Act of the Province of Ontario.
1.5.5
Provide forced air circulation during period for enclosed applications.
1.5.6
During application of waterproofing system garage must be well ventilated such that
odours from the waterproofing system do not disturb users of the garage or building above.
1.6
Delivery and Storage
1.6.1
Deliver and store materials at the site in their original containers or packages and clearly
labelled as to manufacturer's name and quality.
1.6.2
Keep materials dry and protected from damage, weather and deterioration at all times.
Store materials in warm and dry areas.
1.7
Quality Control
1.7.1
The Owner will retain the services of an inspection and testing company, approved by the
Consultant and paid for by the Owner.
1.7.2
Contractor shall inform Consultant and testing agency 24 hours in advance of work to be
performed under this section.
1.7.3
The inspection and testing company may take cut tests to check thickness of wearing
course and waterproof membrane. Repair cut tests to the satisfaction of the Consultant.
1.7.4
The Owner will have the inspection and testing company submit reports directly to the
Owner, the Consultant and the Contractor.
1.8
Protection
1.8.1
Protect adjacent surfaces from damage resulting from work of this Section. If necessary,
mask or cover adjacent surfaces, fixtures, equipment, etc., by suitable means. Correct any
damage at own expense to Consultant's satisfaction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
Project No. 0701-BS
2.1.1
SECTION 07180
THIN DECK COATING
Page 07180 - 4
The following is for application at concrete islands, pads, sidewalks and curbs in existing
parking garage, floors P1 (sublevel 1) through P4 (sublevel 4). Coating system shall be
one of the following:
.1
Vulkem 350/345/346 as manufactured by Tremco. Urethane coating with graded
aggregate, liquid applied, colour to be selected.
.2
Duodeck I / II Kelmar totally, Macnoughton Brooks Ltd.
.3
Auto-Gard 3/2 as manufactured by Neogard Corporation. Two part polyurethane,
liquid applied. Graded aggregate. Grey in colour.
.4
Isoflex 7500.
2.2
Surface Patch Materials
2.2.1
Products used to patch rough surfaces shall be 100% solids epoxy and shall contain no
additives or fillers. Coating material may be used to fill rough areas if approved by
manufacturer.
2.2.2
No extras for surface preparation or additional coating material will be entertained after bid
closing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Preparation
3.1.1
Remove all guards, bollards, etc., as required for application of coatings to slab surfaces
unless otherwise noted on drawings. Reinstall at completion.
3.1.2
Preparation of slab and vertical surfaces is to be in strict accordance with the requirements
of the system manufacturer's recommendations and these Contract Documents including
the following: preparation and smoothing of rough surfaces, detailing of slab cracks, joints
and voids as required.
3.1.3
At ceremonial ramp strip existing asphalt and roofing membrane down to existing concrete
topping.
3.1.4
Minimum standard of slab cleaning shall be shot blast or equivalent, leaving slab surfaces
free of all laitance and removing a minimum of 0.20 mm of concrete surface.
3.1.5
Minimum standard of vertical surface cleaning shall be dry sandblast for all systems.
3.1.6
Clean surfaces of all grease and oil with an emulsifier where required which will not affect
performance of coating.
3.1.7
Allow new concrete surfaces to air dry a minimum of 14 days after moist curing and not
exhibit any condensation under plastic sheet test prior to the placement of the waterproof
membrane.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 07180
THIN DECK COATING
Page 07180 - 5
3.1.8
Grind and/or fill all rough surfaces, vertical amplitude exceeding 40 mils (1.0 mm) to
provide a smooth surface.
3.1.9
Sawcut cracks or joints straight sided and follow the extent of crack. Locations of crack
sealing shall be as directed by Consultant. Do not overcut beyond actual extent of crack.
Sandblast sawcut surfaces.
3.1.10
Fill sawcut cracks and joints with approved sealant materials flush with slab surface.
Application to be in strict conformance to the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.1.11
Install a continuous 20 mm fillet bead of compatible caulking at the base of vertical
surfaces receiving coating prior to application of coating basecoat.
3.1.12
Provide double application of membrane at all vertical surfaces and at cracks and joints up
to 1.6 mm wide.
.1
Joints greater than 1.6 mm wide to be specially detailed. Submit details to
Consultant for review.
3.1.13
Hand patch voids or depressions in concrete surfaces and re-point masonry block wall
joints as required. No extras shall be entertained for this item after the award of Contract.
This applies to all walls, columns and curbs.
3.1.14
Do not apply primer or first coat until the surface preparation has been reviewed by
Consultant and inspected and accepted in writing by a representative of the system
manufacturer.
3.1.15
Commencement of work shall imply Contractor's acceptance of the previously prepared
concrete surfaces and assumption of full responsibility for the surfaces prepared to receive
the primer and membrane.
3.1.16
Application procedures that result in toxic fumes or flammable solvent collecting or
endangering workmen or building occupants are not permitted.
3.1.17
Repair paint and finishes damaged by Contractor to match existing.
3.1.18
Ensure that expansion joints are installed prior to coating installation.
3.2
Installation
3.2.1
System applications shall be in strict accordance with the more stringent requirements of
the manufacturer's specifications and these Contract Documents.
3.2.2
Material quantities and placement procedures are to be strictly monitored. Areas to receive
a typical material batch or container volume shall have their perimeters clearly marked
prior to application to ensure uniform thickness of materials.
3.2.3
Finished surfaces shall be of uniform appearance, with no variations in light reflection,
surface roughness, or ridges in sloped areas. Profiles shall be such that flow to drains is not
impeded.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 07180
THIN DECK COATING
Page 07180 - 6
3.2.4
Turn system up vertical surfaces a minimum of 100 mm. Mask top of upturn to ensure a
neat and straight finish to coating. Patch substrate irregularities prior to coating application.
3.2.5
Ensure environmental and site condition requirements as recommended by the membrane
manufacturer and these Contract Documents are suitable for installation of work of this
Section.
3.2.6
Wearcourse aggregate type, size and distribution to be in strict conformance with
manufacturer's requirements.
3.3
Testing
3.3.1
Prior to application of membrane, test of moisture content of concrete mass will be made
by taping down a 450 mm x 450 mm polyethylene sheet for a period of 16 hours minimum
to detect evaporation from slab surface. Number of tests and locations shall be designated
by the testing agency.
3.3.2
To confirm base coat thickness, Testing Agency will perform wet film thickness tests and
dry-film cut tests.
3.3.3
To confirm wearcourse thickness, Testing Agency will perform wet film thickness tests
and dry-film cut tests.
3.3.4
Testing shall be direct tensile test performed a minimum of 7 days after installation or as
recommended by manufacturer.
3.3.5
To evaluate bonding of membrane to substrate, and/or basecoat to wearcourse, adhesion
tests will be performed by the Testing Agency. Adhesion of the membrane layers to each
other and to the concrete substrate shall exceed 1.0 MPa. The average of all tests must
exceed 1.0 MPa, with no test less than 0.90 MPa.
3.3.6
Additional tests may be performed at the discretion of the Testing Agency to confirm insitu
material thickness and bond.
3.3.7
Contractor to repair waterproofing system at test locations at no extra cost.
3.3.8
Finished system to be flood tested by Contractor at the Contractor's expense under
direction of the Testing Agency, prior to Substantial Performance of the Contract.
3.3.9
Plug drains on horizontal surfaces and restrict run-off.
3.3.10
Maintain surfaces continuously wet for at least one hour.
3.3.11
Repair leaks and re-test.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 07860
FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKE SEALS
Page 07860 - 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
here.
1.2
LEED Requirements
1.2.1
1.2.2
.1
1.3
Work Specified Elsewhere
1.3.1
Firestopping and smoke seals within mechanical (i.e. inside ducts, dampers) and electrical
assemblies (i.e. inside bus ducts) are specified in Divisions 15 and 16 respectively. All
other firestopping and smoke seals are the responsibility of this Section.
1.4
1.4.1
CAN/ULC-S101-04
Standard Methods of Fire Endurance Tests of Building
Construction and Materials
1.4.2
CAN4-S115-05
Standard Method of Fire Tests for Firestop Systems
1.4.3
ASTM E119-05a
Standard Test Methods for Fire
Construction and Materials
1.4.4
ASTM E814-02
Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration
Firestop Stops.
1.5
Samples
1.5.1
Submit samples for Consultant's review, in accordance with Section 01001.
1.6
Shop Drawings
1.6.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01001.
1.6.2
Show proposed material, reinforcement, anchorage, fastenings and method of installation.
Construction details should accurately reflect actual job conditions.
Tests
of
Building
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 07860
Page 07860 - 2
1.6.3
Submit manufacturer's product data for materials and prefabricated devices, providing
descriptions are sufficient for identification at job site. Include manufacturer's printed
instructions for installation.
1.7
Single Source Responsibility
1.7.1
It is the intent of this section of the specifications to establish a single, competent source to
be responsible for providing firestopping and smoke sealing work for the entire project as
clarified above.
1.7.2
Subcontractor shall be a specialist with accredited experience of not less than 5 years, and
as recommended by firestopping/smoke seal manufacturers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
2.1.1
Firestopping and Smoke Seal Systems: In accordance with CAN4-S115, CAN/ULC-S101,
ASTM E119, and ASTM E-814. Unless noted otherwise ‘F’ and ‘T’ ratings 2 hours.
.1
Asbestos-free materials and systems capable of maintaining an effective barrier
against flame, smoke and gases in compliance with requirements of CAN4-S115
and not to exceed opening sizes for which they are intended.
.2
Tests shall be performed by an accredited testing agency acceptable to local
Jurisdictional Authority.
2.1.2
Service Penetration Assemblies: Certified by ULC in accordance with CAN4-S115 and
listed in ULC Guide No. 40 U19.
2.1.3
Service Penetration Firestop Components: Certified by ULC in accordance with CAN4S115 and listed in ULC Guide No. 40 U19.13 and ULC Guide No. 40 U19.15 under the
Label Service of ULC.
2.1.4
Fire resistance rating of installed firestopping assembly not to be less than the fire
resistance rating of surrounding floor and wall assembly as indicated.
2.1.5
For firestopping and smoke seals at openings intended for ease of re-entry such as cables,
use elastomeric seal; do not use cementitious or rigid seal at such locations.
2.1.6
For firestopping and smoke seals at openings around penetrations for pipes, ductwork and
other mechanical items requiring sound and vibration control use elastomeric seal; do not
use a cementitious or rigid seal at such locations.
2.1.7
Primers: To manufacture's recommendation for specific material, substrate, and end use.
2.1.8
Water (If Applicable): Potable, clean and free from injurious amounts of deleterious
substances.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 07860
Page 07860 - 3
2.1.9
Damming and Backup Materials, Supports and Anchoring Devices: To manufacturer's
recommendations, and in accordance with tested assembly being installed as acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
2.1.10
Sealants for Vertical Joints: Non-sagging.
2.1.11
Mineral Wool: As listed in tested assembly.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Preparation
3.1.1
Examine sizes and conditions of voids to be filled to establish correct thicknesses and
installation of materials. Ensure that substrates and surfaces are dry and frost free.
3.1.2
Prepare surfaces in contact with firestopping materials and smoke seals to manufacturer's
instructions.
3.1.3
Maintain insulation around pipes and ducts penetrating fire separation.
3.1.4
Mask where necessary to avoid spillage and over coating onto adjoining surfaces; remove
stains on adjacent surfaces.
3.2
Installation
3.2.1
Install firestopping and smoke seal material and components in accordance with ULC
certification and manufacturer's instructions.
3.2.2
Seal holes or voids made by through penetrations, poke-through termination devices and
unpenetrated openings or joints to ensure continuity and integrity of fire separation are
maintained.
3.2.3
Provide temporary forming as required and remove forming only after materials have
gained sufficient strength and after initial curing.
3.2.4
Tool or trowel exposed surfaces to a neat finish.
3.2.5
Remove excess compound promptly as work progresses and upon completion.
3.3
Inspection
3.3.1
Notify Consultant when ready for inspection and prior to concealing or enclosing
firestopping materials and service penetration assemblies.
3.4
Schedule
3.4.1
Work of firestopping and smoke seals shall include but not limited to the following:
.1
Top of fire resistance rated masonry and gypsum board work.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 07860
Page 07860 - 4
.2
Intersection of fire resistance rated masonry and gypsum board work.
.3
Control joints in fire resistant rated masonry and gypsum board work.
.4
At edge of floor slabs at juncture with wall envelope.
.5
Penetrations through fire resistant rated floor slabs, ceilings and similar members.
.6
Openings and sleeves installed for future use through fire resistant rated
separations.
.7
For ‘0’ hour fire rated separations (to prevent smoke movement) pack void space
at all service penetrations and other openings with either tightly packed Mineral
Wool insulation, and covered with sealant. Sealant with backing rod is also
acceptable. The sealant need not be rated.
3.5
Clean-Up
3.5.1
Remove excess materials and debris and clean adjacent surfaces immediately.
3.5.2
Remove temporary dams after initial set of firestopping and smoke seal materials.
3.5.3
Remove firestopping from materials and surfaces not specifically required to be sealed.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 07900
SEALANTS
Page 07900 - 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
here.
1.1.2
Coordinate with Section 04200 Masonry and 04400 Building Stone.
1.1.3
Refer to section 07200 Building Insulation, AVB and Misc Flashings
1.2
LEED Requirements
1.2.1
1.2.2
.1
1.3
1.3.1
CAN/CGSB-19.13-M87
Sealing Compound, One Component, Elastomeric,
Chemical Curing
1.3.2
Sealant and Waterproofers Institute
Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification.
1.4
Quality Assurance
1.4.1
Have work performed by a recognized established caulking and sealing contractor having
at least ten years experience and with skilled workers thoroughly trained and competent in
the use of caulking and sealing equipment and the specified materials.
1.4.2
In order that recommendations may be made, arrange with sealant manufacturers for one of
their technical representatives to visit the site, prior to application of this work, to discuss
with the Contractor, in the presence of the Consultant, the procedures to be adopted and to
review site conditions, and surfaces and joints to be sealed.
1.4.3
Discuss the following items:
.1
Weather conditions under which work will be done.
.2
Anticipated frequency and extent of joint movement.
.3
Joint design.
.4
Suitability of durometer hardness and other properties of material specified.
Project No. 0701-BS
1.5
Submittals
1.5.1
Samples
SECTION 07900
SEALANTS
Page 07900 - 2
.1
Prepare sample joints at site of each type of caulking and sealant for each joint
condition. Do not proceed with work until each sample joint has been approved by
Consultant.
.2
Approved joints shall represent minimum acceptable for work.
.3
Submit manufacturer's name for each compound which will be used on project
before commencing work.
1.5.2
Product Data: Submit product data of sealants and caulking proposed in accordance with
Section 01001.
1.5.3
Extended Warranty
.1
Submit a warranty in accordance with Section 01001, covering the repair or
replacement of defective work for a period of 4 years from the expiration of the
one-year warranty, under the General Conditions.
.2
Warranty shall provide for repair or replacement of damaged work resulting from
leakage, gassing, wrinkling, ridging, sagging, shrinkage, running, loss of adhesion,
cohesive failure, or staining of adjoining surfaces.
.3
1.6
Job Conditions
1.6.1
Apply materials only to completely dry surfaces, and at air and material temperatures
above minimum established by manufacturer's specifications.
1.6.2
The applicator is responsible for ensuring the sealants are applied under acceptable
conditions. Substrate temperatures of less than 4C require special considerations, to
ensure a clean, dry substrate and proper sealant wet-out.
.1
The substrate to which sealant is to be applied should be dry. This is particularly
crucial where the substrate is porous and subject to water absorption. Although the
joint interface may appear to be dry, the substrate below the immediate joint
surface may still be moist. This moisture can migrate rapidly to the joint surface
thereby contaminating any preparation.
.2
Use a quick flashing solvent such as MEK or Tremco 200 Cleaner to clean the
substrates.
NOTE: Ensure the substrate and/or any coating on the substrate is compatible with MEK
or Tremco Cleaner 200.
.3
After solvent cleaning, wipe the joint interfaces dry with a second clean rag.
Project No. 0701-BS
.4
SECTION 07900
SEALANTS
Page 07900 - 3
Immediately following cleaning, install the sealant and tool it.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
2.1.1
Generally: Labels indicating conformance to specified reference specifications will be
acceptable as verification that contents meet specified requirements. Colour will be
selected by Consultant from manufacturer's standard range. Colours shall match surface on
which it occurs unless noted otherwise.
2.1.2
Sealants: Non-bleeding and capable of supporting their own weight. Caulking, sealants,
cleaning solvents, fillers and primers shall be compatible with each other.
.1
Interior Non-Traffic Bearing: one component elastomeric material conforming to
CAN/CGSB-19.13, Class 1 or 2, depending on application. Colour as selected by
the Consultant.
.2
Exterior Non-Traffic Bearing, Weather Side of Construction: use one of the
following:
.1
"Dymeric 240", "Vulkem 922" or “Dymonic” or “Spectrem 3” by
Tremco.
.2
"Sikaflex 15LM” by Sika Construction.
.3
"Silpruf NB" by General Electric Canada
.4
"795" by Dow Corning.
.5
"Sonolastic 150" by Sonneborn.
.6
“Sikaflex 2C SL/NS”.
.3
Traffic Bearing: Tremco "THC 900", "Vulkem 45", Sonneborn "SL1", or Sika
“Sikaflex 1C SL”.
.4
Note: Coordinate Sections 02785, 07900 and 08900 and ensure that only one brand
of sealant shall be used on the building/component exterior to ensure consistency
and integrity of exterior seals and to preclude incompatibility problems. Each of
the aforementioned sections shall be closely coordinated to ensure compliance to
this mandatory requirement.
.5
Sanitary Caulking: Dow Corning "786" mildew resistant silicone, General Electric
"1700 Sanitary Sealant", "Rhodorsil 8S", Sonneborn "Omniplus", or “Tremsil
200”.
.6
Expanding Foam: Refer to section 07200 Building Insulation, AVB and Misc
Flashings, item 2.2.4 Foamed in Place Insulation.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 07900
SEALANTS
Page 07900 - 4
2.1.3
Sealant for Stone: refer to Section 04400 Building Stone.
2.1.4
Primer: Specifically designed for use with compounds on surfaces encountered, and as
specified by the compound manufacturer, to assure adhesion of compound and to prevent
staining of substrate material.
2.1.5
Sealant Backing: Extruded, polyethylene round foam rod, 25% wider than joint width, and
manufactured especially for caulking purpose. Ensure that sealant backing is not cut nor
punctured during installation. Use closed cell rod for horizontal traffic bearing joints, and
open cell rod for vertical joints.
2.1.6
Bond Breaker: Tape of type supplied or recommended by sealant or caulking manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Preparation
3.1.1
Remove moisture, loose mortar, dust, oil, grease, oxidation, mill scale, coatings, and all
other materials affecting bond of compounds by brushing, scrubbing, scraping, or grinding,
from surfaces to which caulking compounds must adhere.
3.1.2
Ensure that releasing agents, coatings, or other treatments have either not been applied to
joint surfaces, or that they are entirely removed.
3.1.3
Ensure joints are suitable to accept sealant and caulking.
3.1.4
Before any work is commenced, test the materials for indications of staining or poor
adhesion.
3.1.5
Do not apply material to masonry until mortar has cured.
3.1.6
Do not exceed shelf life, and pot life of the materials and installation times, as stated by the
manufacturers.
3.1.7
Become familiar with the work life of the material to be used. Do not mix two part
materials until required for use.
3.1.8
Mix sealants thoroughly with a mechanical mixer capable of mixing at 80-100 rpm without
mixing air into the materials. Continue mixing until the material is a uniform colour and
free from streaks of unmixed material.
3.1.9
Mask areas adjacent to the joints as required. Prevent contamination of adjacent surfaces.
Remove masking promptly after the joint has been completed.
3.2
Application
3.2.1
Work of this Section shall include all sealing and caulking, except where specified under
the work of other Sections, to make the building weather and air tight, as indicated
typically on drawings, and as otherwise specified.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 07900
SEALANTS
Page 07900 - 5
3.2.2
Apply materials in accordance with the recommendation of the material manufacturer, in
particular, backer rod, priming and depth-to-width ratio.
3.2.3
Pack joints tightly with sealant backing, set at sealant depth.
3.2.4
Apply primer with a brush which will permit all joint surfaces to be primed. Perform
priming immediately before installation of caulking or sealant.
3.2.5
Caulking and sealants shall be of gun or knife grade consistency to suit the joint condition.
Use gun nozzles of the proper sized to suit the joints and the caulking and sealing material.
3.2.6
Apply with manually operated or air pressure operated guns.
3.2.7
Use sufficient pressure to fill all voids and joints. Caulking sealants shall bond to both
sides of joint but not backing material.
3.2.8
Ensure that the correct compound depth is maintained. Superficial painting with a skin
bead will not be accepted.
3.2.9
Finished applications shall be a full bead free from air pockets and embedded impurities
and having smooth surfaces, free from ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets and imbedded
impurities.
3.2.10
After joints have been completely filled, tool them neatly to a slight concave surface.
3.2.11
Caulk joints in site painted materials after adjacent surfaces have been painted.
3.2.12
The work shall include, but not limited to the following:
.1
Exterior and interior hollow metal steel door frames; interior screens (both sides of
frames).
.2
Exposed control joints in masonry walls; masonry wall corners; masonry-tocolumn junctures; joints in front of steel lintels bearing on exterior brick jambs,
masonry to precast, precast to precast, and precast to adjacent materials.
.3
Raked joints in junction of walls running at different angles, and at junction of
walls to columns.
.4
Joints between washroom vanities, and other counters, urinals, and adjacent
surfaces (use sanitary caulking).
.5
Wall to floor junctions and joints in floor, where typically indicated on drawings.
.6
Joints between masonry and concrete surfaces.
.7
Joints between gypsum board and masonry, or other materials.
.8
Joints between louvres and other surfaces.
.9
Penetrations through roofs, floors and walls other than firestopping.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 07900
SEALANTS
Page 07900 - 6
.10
Joints between precast concrete bands and sills installed by masonry trade and
other materials, and between precast pieces.
.11
Provide joint caulking only at precast concrete. No full surface sealant is required.
.12
At other locations shown on drawings.
3.3
Cleaning
3.3.1
Do not use chemicals, scrapers, or other tools which would damage surfaces of caulked or
sealed materials when excess compounds or droppings are removed. Work damaged by
cleaning shall be made good under work of this Section.
3.4
Repair
3.4.1
Cut out damaged caulking and sealing, re-prepare and prime joints and install new material
as specified to the Consultant's satisfaction.
3.5
Protection of Completed Work
3.5.1
Provide wood planks or other approved, non-staining means of protection for the
completed caulking and sealants installations where required to protect the work from
mechanical, thermal, chemical and other damage by other construction operations and
traffic.
3.5.2
Maintain protection securely in place until project completion. Remove protection when so
directed by the Consultant.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 08 10 00
HOLLOW METAL DOORS, FRAMES,
PANELS AND SCREENS
Page 08 10 00 - 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
here.
1.2
LEED Requirements
1.2.1
1.2.2
.1
1.3
1.3.1
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
.1
ASTM A568/A568M-05
Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet,
Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, HotRolled
and
Cold-Rolled,
General
Requirements For
.2
ASTM A653/A653M-05
Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc
Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-
Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC):
.1
CAN4-S104M-M80 (1985)
Standard Method of Fire Tests of Door
Assemblies
.2
CAN4-S105M-M85
Standard Specification for Fire Door Frames
Canadian Steel Door and Frame Manufacturer's Association:
.1
CSDMA
Specifications for Commercial Steel Doors
and Frames, 2009
.2
CSDMA
Recommended Selection and Usage Guide for
Commercial Steel Doors, 2009.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 08 10 00
PANELS AND SCREENS
Page 08 10 00 - 2
.1
NFPA 80-2007
Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening
Protectives
.2
NFPA 252
Standard Methods of Fire Rests of Door
Assemblies, 2003 Edition.
1.4
Requirements of Regulatory Agencies
1.4.1
Steel Fire Rated Doors and Frames: Labelled and listed by an organization accredited by
Standards Council of Canada in conformance with CAN4 S104M and CAN4 S105M for
ratings specified or indicated.
1.4.2
Install labelled steel fire rated doors and frames to NFPA 80 except where specified
otherwise.
1.5
Quality Assurance
1.5.1
Unless specified otherwise, fabricate doors and frames in accordance with the Canadian
Steel Door and Frame Manufacturer's Association Standard.
1.5.2
Coordinate with Hardware Consultant as required to ensure work of this section will
accept all required hardware including electric hardware plug-in’s and exit devices.
1.6
Submittals
1.6.1
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01001, for Consultant's
review before fabrication.
1.6.2
Acoustic Rating Test: Submit results of acoustic tests in accordance with Section 01001 for
Consultant's review.
1.7
Product Delivery, Storage, and Handling
1.7.1
Brace frame units to prevent distortion in shipment, and protect finished surfaces by sturdy
protective wrappings.
1.7.2
Store doors in protective wrappings in a secure dry location, to ensure that they are not
damaged until hung. Install them only when work has progressed to a stage when no
damage will occur to them in place.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
2.1.1
Steel: Commercial grade steel to ASTM A568 , Class 1, wiped coat galvanized to ASTM
A653, coating designation ASTM A653, ZF75.
2.1.2
Doors and Panels
Project No. 0701-BS
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
SECTION 08 10 00
PANELS AND SCREENS
Page 08 10 00 - 3
.1
Facings, rails, stiles: 1.2 mm (18 ga.) base steel thickness.
.2
Interior Stiffeners: .914 mm base steel thickness.
.3
Hardware Reinforcement: 3 mm base steel thickness.
.4
Sound Deadening and Insulating Material: Semi-rigid fibreglass 24 kg/m³
minimum density, to fill core space.
.5
Glazing Stops: 1.5 mm base steel thickness, formed, drilled and countersunk for
fasteners.
Frames
.1
Steel: 1.5 mm (16 ga.) base thickness.
.2
Hardware Reinforcement: 3 mm base steel thickness.
.3
Mortar Guards: .762 mm base steel thickness.
.4
Rubber Bumpers: Glynn-Johnson GJ64 or approved equivalent.
Anchors
.1
Frames in Masonry: Adjustable "T" strap anchors, Wire Anchors Acceptable.
.2
Frames in Precast: Galvanized expansion bolts.
.3
Labelled Frames: To conform to ULC/WHI requirements.
.4
Frames in Gypsum Board Partitions: Steel anchor clips and floor anchors of
suitable design securely welded inside each jamb.
.5
Anchorage to Floor: Minimum 3 mm thick clip angles with 2 holes for expansion
bolting to floor.
Galvanizing
.1
Interior Units: Steel sheet wipe coated with zinc-iron alloy to a total mass coating
both sides of 75 g/m² to conform to ASTM A653/A653M, ZF75 coating
designation.
.2
Exterior Units, and Interior Units in Unheated Areas: Steel sheet coated with zinc
to a total mass coating both sides of 275 g/m² to conform to ASTM A653/A653M,
Z275 coating designation. Mill phosphatize to provide for good paint adhesion.
Acoustic Doors and Frames: As manufactured by Ambico Limited or Fleming Door
Products, or approved alternate, complete with acoustic seals, automatic door bottom and
door hinges. Minimum 45 STC rating required.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 08 10 00
PANELS AND SCREENS
Page 08 10 00 - 4
2.2
Fabrication - Generally
2.2.1
Fit and assemble work in the shop, where possible. Make trial assembly in shop when not
possible.
2.2.2
Fabricate, reinforce and anchor component parts and assemblies to support loads that usage
will impose without deflection detrimental to function, appearance or safety. For interior
doors either the use of metal stiffeners with the spaces between stiffeners filled with
insulation. For exterior doors the core is to be completely filled with insulation.
2.2.3
Reinforce components to resist in-use stresses imposed by finishing and security hardware.
2.2.4
Prepare frames and doors for finish hardware with mortises and reinforcement. Drill and
tap to template information. Reinforce for surface-mounted hardware and for door closer
brackets. Provide for concealed door closers where specified. Install mortar guards at cutouts and reinforcing plates in frame. For cylindrical locks install reinforcing units to lock
manufacturer's specification. For mortise locks provide a suitable internal bracket to hold
the lock case rigidly in the centre of the door.
2.2.5
Provide for anticipated expansion and contraction of frames and supports.
2.2.6
Fit elements at intersections and joints accurately together in true planes, plumb and level.
2.2.7
Weld frame and door assemblies unless honeycombing or plastic insulation is used for
core. Weld continuously at joints through which air or water could penetrate from the
exterior of the building to the interior. Fill joints flush to make them inconspicuous.
2.2.8
Where welding is impossible, connections may be bolted. Ream drilled holes and leave
exposed edges clean and smooth.
2.2.9
Isolate from each other dissimilar metals and metal from concrete or masonry, to prevent
electrolysis.
2.2.10
Ensure that exterior doors and frames are tightly fitted, and that entry of water is prevented
by drip caps on head of frames of outswinging doors exposed to weather.
2.2.11
Make allowance in frames and doors to receive electrical conduits for security strikes and
contactors which may be installed in doors and frames. Provide electrical conduit
protection mortar boxes to receive conduit for electric strikes, locks, door closers, and
hinges as detailed.
2.3
Door and Screen Frames
2.3.1
Fabricate frames to details shown on Drawings using welded construction.
2.3.2
Fabricate steel frames in minimum base steel thickness specified. Minimum frame material
thickness applies only to work which does not otherwise require heavier gauges to meet
specified fire-rated construction.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 08 10 00
PANELS AND SCREENS
Page 08 10 00 - 5
2.3.3
Supply standard frames to suit construction conditions and dimensions as indicated on
Drawings.
2.3.4
Touch up frames in the factory where coating has been removed.
2.3.5
Where members join at corners, cut mitres and weld continuously along inside of frame
throat. welding.
2.3.6
Where tubular transoms or mullions meet frame members, join by butt welding.
2.3.7
Attach two channel shipping bars at bottom of door frames to maintain square alignment.
Provide removable attachment for shipping bars on frames that do not extend below
finished floor, and remove them after frames are built in.
2.3.8
Incorporate structural stiffeners for frame members where required to withstand loadings.
Securely anchor them at bottom and top. Where they extend above ceiling, anchor them to
concrete or structural framing to suit site conditions and in such a way that load from the
concrete is not transferred to the frames.
2.3.9
Install three rubber bumpers in latch side stops of each interior door frame. Locate lowest
bumper 225 mm above bottom of door.
2.3.10
Backpaint exterior frames and frames to unheated areas where in contact with masonry or
concrete or other dissimilar materials.
2.3.11
Fabricate glass stops for non-rated screens the same as specified for glass stops for doors.
Fabricate glass stops for fire rated screens 20 mm wide and of 1.35 mm thick sheet steel.
2.3.12
Note all exterior doors designated with a 'X' prefix on the Door Schedule shall have
thermally broken frames. Fill these frames with fibreglass insulation.
2.4
Doors and Panels
2.4.1
Fabricate interior and exterior doors and panels with sheet steel in specified base steel
thickness.
2.4.2
Minimum panel thickness applies only to doors not otherwise requiring heavier gauges to
meet specified fire-rated construction.
2.4.3
Fabricate doors with faces true and smooth, and with no dimples or welds visible.
2.4.4
Bevel edges of stiles to suit door swing.
2.4.5
Maximum space between hinged side panels and doors shall be 3 mm in their closed
position.
2.4.6
Locate hardware to Canadian Steel Door & Frame Manufacturer's Association Standard,
unless shown otherwise on Drawings or Door Schedule.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 08 10 00
PANELS AND SCREENS
Page 08 10 00 - 6
2.4.7
Fill solid all voids within doors and panels with insulation, or honeycomb core. For
exterior doors and panels, fill voids with insulation.
2.4.8
Fabricate muntins, removable stops, and glass mouldings of minimum 1.2 mm steel.
2.4.9
Prepare doors to receive glass and grilles. Install grilles. Secure removable stops with
countersunk Phillips oval head screws symmetrically spaced on stop lengths.
2.4.10
Close top and bottom edges of exterior doors to make a weathertight seal, and doors to
which the tops can be seen from stair landings or other high elevations, so that they are
flush with face edges.
2.5
Anchors
2.5.1
Provide frames for installation in masonry walls with the following number of anchors:
2.5.2
.1
Frames up to 2296 mm height, 3 anchors
.2
Frames 2296 mm to 2438 mm, 4 anchors
.3
Frames over 2438 mm, 1 anchor for each 600 mm or fraction thereof in height.
Provide frames for installation in stud partitions with the following number of anchors:
.1
Frames up to 2296 mm height, 4 anchors
.2
Frames 2296 mm to 2438 mm, 5 anchors
.3
Frames over 2438 mm, 5 anchors, plus 1 additional for each 600 mm or fraction
thereof over 2438 mm.
2.5.3
Provide frames to be anchored to previously-placed concrete, masonry, or structural steel,
with anchors of suitable design. Show on shop drawings.
2.5.4
Securely weld adjustable floor anchors to inside of each jamb profile, with two holes
provided at each jamb for floor anchorage.
2.5.5
Anchors shall have minimum gauges: "T" strap type, 1.6 mm "L" type, 1.2 mm; wire type,
3.9 mm diameter; stirrup type, 1.6 mm; stud type, 1.2 mm; jamb spreaders; 1.2 mm.
2.6
Finishing
2.6.1
Carbon Steel: Clean and smooth work at welds which has been ground. Fill if necessary,
and prime all areas from which zinc has been removed.
2.6.2
Stainless Steel: Refinish exposed edges of formed sheets after fabrication or forming.
Similarly refinish welds to the same finish as base metal. Direction of grain shall be
horizontal.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 08 10 00
PANELS AND SCREENS
Page 08 10 00 - 7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
3.1.1
Installation of the work of this Section is specified in Sections 04200, 06100 and 06210.
* * *
END OF SECTION
BIKE STORAGE FACILITY
08 71 00
FINISHING HARDWARE
JUNE 27, 2014
PAGE 1
1
General
.1 SECTION INCLUDES
1. The work in this section includes furnishing all items of finish hardware as hereinafter
specified or obviously necessary for all swinging, sliding, folding and other doors, except
items, which are specifically excluded from this section.
.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1. Related documents, drawings, and general provisions of contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
.3 RELATED SECTIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
06200 – Finish Carpentry
08100 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
08900 – Glazed Aluminum Curtainwall
Division 16 – Access Control System
Division 16 – Security Products
Division 16 – Electrical, Conduit, Backboxes
.4 REFERENCES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
ANSI A156.1 – Butts and Hinges
ANSI A156.2 – Bored Locks and Latches
ANSI A156.3 – Exit Devices
ANSI A156.4 – Door Controls – Door Closers
ANSI A156.5 – Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products
ANSI A156.6 – Architectural Door Trim
ANSI A156.7 – Template Hinge Dimensions
ANSI A156.8 – Door Controls – Overhead Holders
ANSI A156.13 – Mortise Locks and Latches
ANSI A156.15 – Closer Holder Release Devices
ANSI A156.16 – Auxiliary Hardware
ANSI A156.18 – Material and Finishes
ANSI A156.26 – Continuous Hinges
ANSI A156.31 – Electric Strike
NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code
ANSI-A250.4 – Steel Doors and Frames Physical Endurance
ANSI A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities (Re-order)
ADA – Americans with Disabilities Act
.5 SUBMITTALS
1. Submit copies of finish hardware schedule in accordance with Division 1, General
Requirements.
2. Schedules and Product Data
1
Prior to hardware schedule submittal, the successful bidder shall review all drawings and
related documents to ensure compatibility and completeness. Hardware schedule to be in
08 71 00
FINISHING HARDWARE
JUNE 27, 2014
PAGE 2
vertical format, listing each door opening, and detailed door by door, indicating complete
designations of every item required for each door opening to function as intended.
Hardware schedule shall be submitted within two (2) weeks from date the purchase order
is received by the finish hardware supplier. Note any special mounting instructions or
requirements within the hardware schedule. Schedules to include the following
information:
1) Each opening shall reference the door number and location relating to the floor plans
and door and frame schedule.
2) Handing and degree of swing of each door.
3) Door and frame sizes and materials.
4) Keying information, if available.
5) Quantity, type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item.
6) Elevation drawings and operational descriptions for all electronic openings.
7) Name and manufacturer of each hardware item.
8) Fastenings and other pertinent information.
9) Explanation of all abbreviations contained in schedule.
10) Mounting locations for hardware if different from standard.
11) Provide complete point to point wiring diagrams for each opening requiring electronic
hardware.
12) Provide complete methods of operation for all openings containing electronic
components. Operational descriptions to detail how each electrical component
functions within the opening incorporating all conditions of ingress and egress.
13) Provide elevation drawings of electronic hardware and systems identifying locations
of the system components with respect to their placement in the door opening.
2
Submit catalog cuts and/or product data sheets for all scheduled finish hardware.
3
Submit separate detailed keying schedule for approval indicating clearly how the Owner’s
final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled.
4
It is the responsibility of the hardware supplier to update and keep current the hardware
schedule. All approved hardware changes shall be noted in the hardware schedule and
kept current throughout the duration of the project. Update pages as necessary to the
contractor for furtherance to the architect. Provide the end user with the original tendered
hardware schedule and a copy of the updated hardware schedule incorporating all
changes upon completion of the project. Where changes occur to electrical products and
functions the hardware supplier shall be responsible to produce new elevations and
methods of operation both for submittal with changes and update the hardware schedule.
08 71 00
FINISHING HARDWARE
JUNE 27, 2014
PAGE 3
3. Samples
1
Submit samples of each type of hardware in finish indicated. Samples are to remain
undamaged and in working condition through submittal and review process. Items will be
returned to the supplier or incorporated into this scope of work.
4. Templates
1
Upon receipt of reviewed Hardware Schedule furnish a complete set of applicable
templates, together with the approved hardware schedule to the contractor. The
contractor shall distribute to the related trades.
5. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
1
Upon completion of construction and building turnover, furnish two (2) complete
maintenance manuals to the Owner. Manuals to include the following items:
1) Tendered hardware, Issued for Construction Schedule and updated Hardware
Schedule, including all approved changes.
2) Catalogue cuts and keying schedule.
3) Hardware installation, adjustment instructions and maintenance manuals.
4) Manufacturer’s written warranty information.
5) Wiring diagrams, elevation drawings and operational descriptions for all electronic
openings.
.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Substitutions
1
All requests for approved alternates must be submitted in writing 10 working days prior to
closing date. Approval of products is at the discretion of the Architect, Owner and
hardware sub-consultant.
2. Supplier Qualifications
1
A recognized architectural hardware supplier who has maintained an office and has been
furnishing architectural hardware for a minimum of 5 years.
2
Hardware supplier shall have in his employment at least one (1) Architectural Hardware
Consultant (AHC) accredited in the Continuing Education Program (CEP) administered
by The Door and Hardware Institute, Chantilly, VA.
3
It shall be clearly understood that within the terms of this Subcontract, the Hardware
Supplier is bound not just as a supplier but also is responsible for the supply of hardware
services relative to the project co-ordination, supervision and inspection.
4
Hardware Subcontractor shall meet with the Owner, Architect, Electrical Subcontractor,
Security Consultant, and Access Control Subcontractor to review, coordinate and
implement all details relating to the proper operation of all electronic hardware including
locations of power supplies, back boxes, junction boxes and conduit details prior to start
of construction.
5
08 71 00
FINISHING HARDWARE
JUNE 27, 2014
PAGE 4
Hardware supplier shall provide all-inclusive consultation and solutions to the Architect
and related trades and shall be fully responsible for coordinating, managing, and
assisting in the design of full system integration of security access control (i.e. proximity
card reader, CCTV, and other electrified security hardware components not specified in
the hardware schedule) and electronic hardware.
.7 FIRE-RATED OPENINGS
1. Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that comply with NFPA 80 and requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed by
Underwriter’s Laboratories (cUL) or Warnock Hersey (WH) for use on types and sizes of
doors indicated.
.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1. Securely package and mark items according to the reviewed hardware schedule, detailing
item number and the door number, complete with necessary screws and accessories,
instructions and installation templates.
2. The supplier shall deliver all hardware to the project site and shall coordinate delivery times
and schedules with the contractor.
3. Construction keys are to be delivered to the contractor directly. Do not ship construction keys
with locksets.
4. At time of hardware delivery, hardware supplier, in conjunction with the contractor, shall
check in all hardware.
5. The Contractor shall set up a clean, dry & secure hardware storage room with adequate
shelving to layout each item of hardware by door number and hardware schedule item
number. It is the responsibility of the hardware supplier/installer to coordinate the room size
with the Contractor to ensure proper layout of products. Hardware is to be shipped to site
floor specific, if required.
.9 WARRANTY
1. All items, except as noted below, shall be warranted in writing by the manufacturer against
failure due to defective materials and workmanship for a minimum period of one (1) year
commencing on the date of final completion and building turnover. In the event of product
failure, promptly repair or replace item with no additional cost to the Owner.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Hinges: Lifetime
Electrified hinges: One (1) year
Mortise locksets: Seven (7) years
Electrified Locksets: Two (2) years
Exit Devices: Five (5) years
Electric Strikes: Five (5) years
Door closers: Ten (10) years
Door Operators, Swinging Door: One (1)
08 71 00
FINISHING HARDWARE
JUNE 27, 2014
PAGE 5
2
Products
.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Manufacturers as listed below have been determined as the acceptable standard.
.2 MATERIALS
1. Screws and Fasteners: All required screws shall be supplied as necessary for securing finish
hardware in the appropriate manner.
2. Hinges: to conform to ANSI A156.1 and have the number of knuckles as specified, oilimpregnated bearings as specified with NRP (non-removable pin) feature, at all exterior or
reverse bevel doors. Unless otherwise scheduled, 2 hinges for doors up to 60”(1520mm) in
height supply one (1) additional hinge for every 30”(760mm) of door height or part thereof.
1 Specified Manufacturer: McKinney TA/T4A series
3. Electric Hinges: to conform to ANSI A156.1 provided with Molex standardized plug
connectors to accommodate up to twelve (12) wires. Plug connectors shall plug directly into
Molex through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices. Provide
sufficient number of concealed wires to accommodate electric function of specified hardware.
Provide a mortar guard for each electric hinge specified, supply to hollow metal frame
manufacturer, Division 08 11 13 prior to frame manufacture.
1 Not used in this project.
4. Continuous Stainless Steel Hinges: non-handed and of slim barrel design. Hinges are to be
made of type 304 stainless steel and shall have a concealed Teflon-coated stainless steel pin
with twin self-lubricated nylon bearings at each knuckle. Hinges shall be UL listed up to and
including 3 hours and shall be available as power transfer units when specified. For power
transfer continuous hinges provide only stainless steel concealed wire type with Molex
connectors.
1 Specified Manufacturer: McKinney MCK-FM300
2 Specified Manufacturer: McKinney FM300 QC Series Electrified
5. Flush Bolts and Accessories: Manual and Automatic Flush Bolts.
1 Manual flush bolts for Hollow metal doors
Manual flush bolts: shall conform to ANSI A156.16-L04251. Flush bolts are to be on Cast
Brass material, with different types of finishes (confirm with manufacturer). ¾” bolt throw,
¾”backset, 12”rod length, ½” adjustable bolt head. (cUL) Listed 3 hours fire rated. Flush bolts
are fitted top and bottom in the leading edge of the inactive leaf of a pair of doors.
1) Specified Manufacturer: Rockwood 555
2 Automatic Flush Bolts for Hollow metal doors (Self latching):
Automatic Flush Bolts: shall conform to ANSI A156.3. Flush bolts are to be made of Brass or
Stainless Steel with different types of finishes (confirm with manufacturer). Automatically
engages when the inactive door closes. When the active door is opened, the inactive door
stays latched at the top until the top bolt is released by pressing the plunger button on the
bolt face.(cUL) Listed, with a closing force (5 lbs. maximum), bolt head rods are adjustable up
to 1½”.
1) Not used in this project.
08 71 00
FINISHING HARDWARE
JUNE 27, 2014
PAGE 6
3 Dust Proof Strike
Dust Proof Strike: shall conform to ANSI A156.16. - L04021 Dust proof strike is to be made of
Brass. Designed for use with the bottom bolt of all flush bolts. Spring loaded plunger returns
to floor or threshold level anytime flush bolt is retracted.
1) Specified Manufacturer: Rockwood 570
6. Cylinders: Permanent cylinders are to be MEDECO by City of Toronto. Temporary, keyed
alike cylinders are to be provided for use during the construction phase.
7. Key Cabinet: provide a 2 tag key control system complete with locking cabinet. Key control
cabinet shall have expansion capacity of 50% of the number of locks required for the project.
Hardware supplier shall assist Owner in loading of the keying cabinet.
1 Specified Manufacturer: Telkee Regent T1530
8. Mortise Locksets: to ANSI 156.13 Series 1000, Grade 1 Certified. All functions shall be
manufactured in a single sized case formed from 12 gauge steel minimum. The lockset shall
have a field-adjustable, beveled armored front, with a 3/32” minimum thickness and shall be
reversible without opening the lock body. Where scheduled provide locksets with
interchangeable functions to permit field function change. The lockset shall be 2 3/4” backset
with a two-piece 3/4” anti-friction mechanical latchbolt. The deadbolt shall be a full 1” throw
made of stainless steel and have 2 hardened steel roller inserts. All strikes shall be non-handed
with a curved lip. To insure proper alignment, all trim, shall be thru-bolted and fully
interchangeable between rose and escutcheon designs and shall be the product of one
manufacturer.
1
Specified Manufacturer: Corbin ML2000 LWA 626 Series (No alternate)
9. Lockset Strikes: to be non-handed and available with curved lip, full lip or ASA type strikes as
required. Provide strikes with lip-length required to accommodate jamb and/or trim detail and
projection.
10. Electric Strikes must conform to UL10C for fire rated frames. Designed for two (2”) frame
face. Strike shall feature keeper designed with locking pin and capable of use with up to three
quarter inch (¾”) throw latch bolts. Door and frame manufacturers are to coordinate exact
centre line of latch bolt in frame corresponding to door.
1 Specified Manufacturer: HES 1006F LBM
2 Specified Manufacturer: HES 4500 LBM
11. All closers for both interior and exterior doors shall be the product of one manufacturer and
be matched in style. Surface closers shall be adjustable to provide sizes 1 through 6 and
comply with ADA. Full rack and pinion construction. Closing speed, latching speed and
backcheck shall be controlled by key operated valves. Captivated valves. Delayed action
feature shall be available and controlled by a separate valve. The high performance one
piece closer body shall be of die cast aluminum alloy. An increase of 15% in closing power
shall be provided by means of adjustment of the arm leverage at the foot connection.
(Standard Arm) All arms shall be finely finished with heavy duty forged steel main arm. Two
08 71 00
FINISHING HARDWARE
JUNE 27, 2014
PAGE 7
mounting positions of the closer shall meet all requirements. Standard mountings shall
provide 120° door opening and alternate mounting 180° door opening. All closers shall be
suitable for standard, top jamb, parallel arm and track type applications when provided with
proper brackets and arms. Closer covers shall be of high impact plastic material of flame
retardant grade. Secured by machine screws. Projection of closer body from door shall not
exceed 2-1/4" (56mm). Closers shall be non-handed to meet a variety of door conditions and
design requirements. The spindle shaft shall be sealed hydraulically with an “O” ring. Special
finish (SRI) Special Rust Inhibitor Process shall be available. All closer bodies have a 10
year limited warranty. Closers should comply with UL 10C and UBC 7-2(1997) Positive
Pressure Fire Test. Closers to be Grade 1 of ANSI/BHMA A156.4.
1 Specified Manufacturer: Sargent 351 Series High traffic
2 Specified Manufacturer: Sargent 1431 Series Standard traffic.
Automatic Door Operators – Operator shall be certified to ANSI 156.19, Grade 1. Units shall
have adjustments for door closing force and backcheck, motor assist from 0 to 30 seconds,
motor start up delay, vestibule interface delay, electric lock delay, door hold open delay up to
30 seconds and suitable to operate a door up to 700 lbs in weight. Operator units shall
provide conventional door closer opening and closing forces unless the power operator motor
is activated by an initiating device with door closer assembly having adjustable spring size,
backcheck valve, sweep valve, latch valve, speed control valve, and pressure adjustment
valve to control door closing. Operators shall have an automatic latch retry and automatic
learn controller to calculate optimal operation based on: door weight/hold open location and
closing speeds. Operator shall have automatic stack or windload compensation. Units shall
have a presence detector input to prevent a closed door from opening or a door that is fully
opened from closing and shall have a hold open toggle input to allow remote activation for
indefinite hold open; door shall close the second time the input is activated. Operators shall
have a SPDT relay for interfacing with latching or locking devices. All controlling operator
switches shall be of radio-frequency design and not hard-wired, 2 Year warranty. Confirm
operator suitability for use with the weight of doors it is scheduled to operate.
1. Specified Manufacturer: Besam SW200i
12. Automatic Door Operators – Standard Duty: to ANSI A117.1, ANSI A156.19 and be UL listed
for automatic closing door requirements. Units shall have independent adjustment valves for
back check, sweep and latching speeds. Door operator shall provide conventional door closer
opening forces unless the power operator motor is activated. Opening force and speed shall
be adjustable by independent electronic adjustment to ensure adequate opening control per
accessibility codes. Unit shall have adjustment for closing force. Maximum door opening shall
be adjustable and capable to 180 degrees, conditions permitting. The unit shall have
adjustable hold opening time from 5 to 30 seconds. Door operator shall have input line rating
of 120VAC at .6A and have relay contacts for interfacing product having a rating of 30VDC at
1A or 125VAC at .5A. External on/off switch to defeat powered opening when desired.
Adjustable Obstruction detection on powered opening cycle shall shut motor down and allows
door to close under normal spring power.
1 Specified Interior Manufacturer: Besam SW100
13. Door Pulls/Push/Kick/Armour Plates: to be .050 gauges and 1.5 inches less full width of door,
or as specified. Furnish all push/kick and armour plates with ‘B4E’ beveled edges. Where
door pulls and push plates are specified countersink door pull throughbolts in door for flush fit
and apply push plates over top of throughbolts. Follow specific mounting instructions where
push plate, door pull and deadlock applications occur. Fasteners for push plates, pull plates,
door pulls and miscellaneous door trim shall be as shown in the hardware schedule. Where
08 71 00
FINISHING HARDWARE
JUNE 27, 2014
PAGE 8
full height door pulls are specified supply units less 150mm from the top of door and 300mm
from bottom of door,. Submit shop drawing of pulls for review.
1 Specified Manufacturer: Rockwood
14. Wall Mounted Door Stop: Provide convex or concave design as specified. Contractor to
provide necessary wall blocking were required.
1 Specified Manufacturers: Rockwood
15. Overhead Stops / Holders: track, arm and jamb bracket shall be constructed of extruded
bronze. Slide block manufactured of nylon for noise free operation and shock absorber spring
shall be of heavy tempered steel. Overhead stops shall be of non-handed design.
1 Specified Manufacturers: Rixson 1 Series
16. Weatherseals and Gaskets: On exterior doors and smoke, light, or sound seals on interior
doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide seals as required to meet UL10C. Provide only
those units where silicon seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available from stocks
maintained by manufacturer. Provide head seal as solid aluminum extrusion suitable for stop
applied hardware ie P/A closers or surface overhead door stops.
1) Specified Manufacturers: Pemko Model S773
2) Door Sweeps: House nylon brush seal in extruded aluminum case. Surface applied
and adjusted to suit gap at bottom of door, complete with snap cover.
a) Specified Manufacturers: Pemko Model 29326
17. Thresholds: less than 4” wide, formed to accommodate change in floor elevation where
indicated, fabricated to accommodate door hardware and to fit door frames. All threshold
units shall comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
1 Specified Manufacturers: Pemko Model 253 Series Thresholds
18. Silencers: rubber door silencers at all hollow metal frames; two (2) per pair and three (3) per
single door frame.
19. Concealed Door Position Switch. Door Position Switches shall be a concealed 3 wire unit
consisting of magnet and switch.
1
2
Barrier Free Washrooms: Sargent 3287
Doors monitored by COT Security: Sentrol 1076D (By Security)
20. Power Supplies: shall furnish regulated 24VDC and shall be UL class 2 listed. LED’s shall
monitor zone status (voltage/no voltage) and slide switches shall be provided to connect or
disconnect the load from power; 1, 4 or 8 separate output circuit breakers shall be provided to
divide the load. Power supplies shall have the internal capability of charging optional
12/24VDC sealed lead acid batteries in addition to operating the DC load. Power supplies
shall be supplied complete requiring only 120VAC to the fused input and shall be supplied in
an enclosure. Power supplies shall be provided with emergency release terminals that allow
the release of all devices upon activation of the fire alarm system.
1 Specified Manufacturer: Securitron BPS
08 71 00
FINISHING HARDWARE
JUNE 27, 2014
PAGE 9
21. Elynx Cables: All power transfer hinges, electrified locksets, electric exit device trim and
electric exit devices are to be equipped with Molex plug connectors. Door and Frame Elynx
cables have been specified at a provisional length at each of these locations. It is the
responsibility of the finishing hardware supplier to supply these cables, prior to door/frame
manufacture, in appropriate lengths required by the various manufacturers. The hardware
supplier is responsible to contact the door manufacturers to determine the cabling route and
supply the correct length. Where the door manufacturer requires flying ends on Elynx cables
the hardware installer will be responsible to map and pin Molex connectors.
.3 FINISHES
1. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are those
listed in ANSI/BHMA A156.18 or traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for
their products.
2. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition,
hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturers’ standards, but in no case less
than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.
3
Execution
.1 EXAMINATION
1. Contractor shall ensure that the building is secured and free from weather elements prior to
installing interior door hardware. Examine hardware before installation to ensure it is free of
defects.
2. It is the responsibility of the Hardware Supplier to provide a written inspection report prior to
Substantial Completion. Subsequently the deficiencies will be corrected by the contractor and
reported in writing.
3. After the deficiencies have been corrected, the Hardware Consultant will provide the final
inspection report. Any deficiencies not performed and corrected during this final inspection
and requiring additional labor or product, will be withdrawn from the contractor’s final billing.
.2 INSTALLATION
1. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in the following applicable publications, except as
specifically indicated or required to comply with the governing regulations.
1 “Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames”
by the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI.)
2 NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1.7, “Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors.”
2. The hardware supplier is responsible to brief all related trades of the installation requirements
for both the electronic and mechanical items specified.
3. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into
surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage,
and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the
Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed
by sub trades involved.
08 71 00
FINISHING HARDWARE
JUNE 27, 2014
PAGE 10
4. Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control
the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be
delayed by hardware losses before and after installation.
5. Electronic Hardware Systems
1 Install all electronic hardware as per elevation and point to point drawings furnished
under Submittals.
2 Prior to installation of electronic hardware, arrange meeting on site between supplier,
installers and related trades to review materials, procedures and coordinating related
work.
3 For each item of electrified hardware specified, provide standardized Molex plug
connectors to accommodate up to twelve (12) wires. Molex plug connectors shall plug
directly into through-door wiring harnesses and electric locking devices. The finishing
hardware installer is responsible to attach the Elynx plug connector with flying leads to
the frame portion of the hinge for hook up by the security system provider. The finishing
hardware supplier will brief the installer of this requirement.
.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
1. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means,
methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures for coordinating all portions of the work
under the Contract, unless the contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning
these matters.
2. The hardware consultant shall attend site meetings to make certain of proper execution of the
guidelines set in this document. The Contractor will do periodic inspection of door frames,
prior to door and hardware installation to ensure frames have been installed plumb and true.
3. The installer will verify all frames to be plumb and true, prior to hardware installation.
.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATION
1. Prior to acceptance or occupancy, adjust and check each operating item of hardware and
each door to ensure proper operation and function. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to
operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application.
2. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating
equipment.
3. Clean operating items as necessary to restore to proper finish.
4. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and
hardware finishes and usage of any electronic devices.
.5 PROTECTION
1. Contractor shall protect all hardware, stored on the construction site, in a covered, dry, and
secure place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase.
Install all hardware at the latest possible time frame.
.6 SEPARATE PRICE
08 71 00
FINISHING HARDWARE
JUNE 27, 2014
PAGE 11
1. Provide a separate cost to supply the following for possible inclusion at Doors: TH015,
TH018, TH019 and TH030. 4 each HES 4500 LBM 630 x 2005M3. Existing locksets to be
changed in function to storeroom function on site.
.7 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
1. The following schedule is furnished for whatever assistance it may afford the Contractor; do
not consider it as entirely inclusive. Prior to tender closing, it is the responsibility of the
hardware supplier, to bring to the attention of the Contractor any errors or omissions. Crossreference hardware schedule with architectural drawings and door schedule. Provide door or
item with hardware the same as required for similar purposes. Hardware supplier is
responsible for handing and sizing all products as listed in the hardware heading.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 08800
MISCELLANEOUS GLASS AND GLAZING
Page 08800 - 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
here.
1.2
LEED Requirements
1.2.1
1.2.2
.1
1.3
Work Included in This Section
1.3.1
Work includes, but not limited to: glazing of hollow metal doors, standard wood doors,
screens in hollow metal frames, and glazing around elevator shafts.
1.4
1.4.1
CAN/CGSB-12.1-M90
Tempered or Laminated Safety Glass
1.4.2
CAN/CGSB-12.3-M91
Flat, Clear Float Glass
1.4.3
CAN/CGSB-12.11-M90
Wired Safety Glass
1.4.4
NFPA 80
National Fire Protection Association, Fire Doors and
Windows
1.4.5
ANSI Z97.1-1984 (R1994)
Glazing Materials Used in Buildings Safety
Performance Specifications and Methods of Test.
1.4.6
Flat Glass Manufacturers Association (FGMA) Glazing Manual.
1.4.7
ULC CAN4 S104-M
Standard Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
1.4.8
ULC CAN4 S106-M
Standard Method for Fire Tests of Window and Glass
Block Assemblies.
1.5
Submittals
1.5.1
Samples: On request, submit samples of glass in accordance with Section 01001 for
Consultant's approval.
Project No. 0701-BS
1.5.2
SECTION 08800
Page 08800 - 2
Extended Warranty
.1
Submit a warranty for mirrors in accordance with Section 01001, covering the
repair or replacement of defective work for a period of 4 years from the expiration
of the one-year warranty stated in the General Conditions.
.2
Warranty shall apply against defects in workmanship and materials and, against
silver deterioration and loosening of fastenings.
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
2.1.1
General: Factory label every sheet of glass and keep in place until final cleaning.
2.1.2
Tempered Glass: Conforming to CAN/CGSB-12.1.
2.1.3
Float Glass: Conforming to CAN/CGSB-12.3.
2.1.4
Shims, Spacers and Setting Blocks: Neoprene with Durometer hardness of 70-90, Shore
‘A’ for setting blocks; Durometer 40-60, Shore ‘A’ for shims and spacers. Use ULC
approved materials for fire rated assemblies.
2.1.5
Glazing Gaskets: Extruded neoprene or PVC channel gaskets with lock strip.
2.1.6
Glazing Tape: For unrated glazing preformed butyl with continuous spacer, Shore "A" 1015 durometer hardness paper release, black colour, 3 x 9.5 mm. For fire rated glazing tape
shall be fire rated for positive pressure as supplied by Pemko Canada.
2.1.7
Safety Decals: Pressure sensitive tape by 3M in design selected by Consultant.
2.1.8
Sliding Glass Partition Panels: Operable glass partition at Reception Room [BSP-02]
service counter, Modernfold Glass Wall Model FSW-G or approved alternate. Manually
operated and top-supported series of individual glass panels. Opening dimensions
1,925mm wide over stepped counter area. One panel 1,150mm wide x 1,250mm tall.
Second panel 775mm wide x 1,500mm tall. Top and bottom rails w/ bottom rail locking
system. ½” thick tempered clear glass. Satin stainless steel clad fittings. Refer to drawing
A4/BR-A-900.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Preparation
3.1.1
Take critical site dimensions to ensure that adjustments in fabrication or installation are
provided for, and that clearances to other constructions have been maintained.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 08800
Page 08800 - 3
3.1.2
Ensure that anchors and inserts installed by others are adequate to meet specified
requirements, and make adaptations before installation.
3.1.3
Accurately measure openings and calculate light size based on manufacturer's installation
tables, allowing for proper minimum edge engagement, rabbet width, rabbet depth, and
expansion.
3.1.4
Free rabbets, stops and glass edges of dust, dirt, moisture, oil and other foreign matter
detrimental to or obstructing the glazing material.
3.1.5
Follow manufacturer's recommendations for preparation.
3.2
Installation
3.2.1
Unless otherwise specified, dry glaze all interior glass using glazing tape or glazing
gaskets.
3.2.2
Remove and replace glazing stops in original locations using original fasteners, securely set
and undamaged.
3.2.3
For screens, use setting blocks and spacers as required to properly support the glass,
centred in place in glazing space independent of the materials and to uniformly distribute
its load.
3.2.4
Use a minimum of 2 setting blocks, locate at quarter points. Locate spacers at jamb edges
of glass, uniformly spaced at 600 mm o.c. maximum, and 300 mm maximum from top and
bottom.
3.2.5
Prior to setting glass, install channel gasket around entire perimeter of glass. Make tight
butt joint at corners of lights. Place on neoprene setting blocks at sill and spacers at both
jambs or sides of opening as required to centre the unit in the frame. Fit the unit into the
frames and apply the stops against the gaskets. Tighten the screws or clips to obtain
positive uniform pressure avoiding excessive pressure.
3.2.6
Ensure rattle-free cushioning.
3.2.7
For fire rated assemblies, Place setting blocks located at quarter points of glass with edge
block no more than 150 mm from corners. Cut glazing tape to length and set against
permanent stops, flush with sight lines to fit openings exactly, with stretch allowance
during installation. Glaze vertically into labeled fire-rated metal frames or partition walls
with same fire rating as glass and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or
unit. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above.
Install removable stop and secure without displacement of tape. Install so that appropriate
ULC markings remain permanently visible.
3.2.8
Provide labels on glass indicating reference standard, leave until it has been inspected.
Leave glass without cracks or other defects and with settings in perfect condition at
completion. Remove rejected, broken or damaged glass due to defective materials or
improper setting and replace with perfect materials. Units producing distorted vision shall
be rejected and replaced at the reasonable discretion of the Consultant.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 08800
Page 08800 - 4
3.2.9
Apply safety decals to one surface of glass at 200 mm o.c. at mounting height as directed.
Be sure glass is completely clean before applying decal. Do not incorporate air under
decals. Remove and replace any decal which is defective or not fully bonded to glass.
3.3
Cleaning
3.3.1
Remove deposits which affect appearance of units on completion of installation.
3.3.2
Clean surfaces by washing with clear water, or with water and soap or detergent, followed
by a clear water rinse.
3.3.3
Clean and restore stained metal surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Replace if cleaning is impossible.
3.3.4
Clean glazing with methods and materials recommended by glazing material manufacturer.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 09365
DETECTABLE WARNING SURFACES
Page 09365 - 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Section Includes
1.1.1
Division One, General Reqts is part of this Section and shall apply as if repeated here.
1.2
Accessibility for Ontarions with Disabilities (AODA) Act:
1.2.1
Detectable Warning Surfaces are required at all stair and ramp landings as outlined in the
AODA standards.
1.3
LEED Requirements
1.3.1
1.3.2
.1
1.4
1.4.1
ASTM C1028, Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of
Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method.
1.5
Submittals
1.5.1
Samples: Submit 300 x 300 mm sample of detectable warning surfaces for Consultant's
approval, in accordance with Section 01001.
1.5.2
Extended Warranty:
.1
Submit a warranty of the work of this Section in accordance with Section 01300,
covering the period of one (1) year beyond the expiration of the standard one year
warranty included in the General Conditions.
.2
Total warranty period shall be two (2) years.
.3
Defective work shall include, but not be limited to loss of bond, loosening,
leaking, cracking, and chipping, or other deformations.
1.5.3
Maintenance: Submit requirements for maintenance, including cleaning in accordance with
Section 01300, for incorporation into Manufacturer's Data Book.
1.5.4
LEED VOC Submittals: Provide LEED submittals including Material Safety Data Sheets
(MSDS) cut sheets or other official literature from manufacturers clearly identifying VOC
contents as per Section 01611.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 09365
Page 09365 - 2
1.6
Delivery, Storage And Handling
1.6.1
Deliver materials in adequate crates or containers with manufacturer’s name and product
description clearly marked.
1.6.2
Handle and store tiles in a manner to avoid chipping or breakage. Take precautions to
protect the adhesives from freezing or from excessive heat.
1.7
Site Conditions
1.7.1
Do not install Work of this Section outside of the following environmental ranges without
the Consultant's and Product manufacturer's written acceptance:
.1
Ambient air and surface temperature: Minimum 400F.
.2
Precipitation: None.
1.7.2
Install temporary protection and facilities to maintain the Product manufacturer's, and
specified, environmental requirements for 7 Days before, during, and 7 Days after
installation.
1.8
Maintenance
1.8.1
Submit extra tile amounting to 3% of gross area covered, allowing proportionately for
each pattern and type specified and which are part of the same Production run as installed
Products. Store maintenance Products as directed by the Consultant.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
2.1.1
LEED Requirements: All adhesives, sealants, paints, coatings and primers for those
products shall have a VOC content that is less than the content limits defined in Section
01611.
2.1.2
Detectable Warning Tile (DWS): Refer to Schedule of Finishes for types, sizes, styles,
colours and manufacturers. Locations as indicated on Room Finish Schedule. Provide
DWS stainless steel domes at all exterior areas with precast concrete and poured concrete
finish. Provide DWS plastic dome plates at the interior Rabbit Stair landings from Plaza
down to P1 Level.
2.1.3
Fasteners: Colour matched, corrosion resistant, flat head drive anchor as recommended by
tile Manufacturer.
2.1.4
Adhesive: Bonding adhesive ‘Armor-Bond’ by Engineered Plastics Inc.
2.1.5
Sealant: ‘Armor-Seal’ by Engineered Plastics Inc.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 09365
Page 09365 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Preparation
3.1.1
Prepare substrate using steel aggregate blast method and vacuum substrate free of debris
and dust.
3.1.2
Fill minor cracks and voids and prime surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.1.3
Project adjacent surfaces from damage resulting from this Work. Mask and/or cover
adjacent surfaces, fixtures, and equipment as necessary.
3.1.4
Clean, prime and seal surfaces as recommended by detectable tile manufacturer.
3.2
Cast-In-Place Installation
3.2.1
Install cast-in-place tile in accordance with manufacturers written instructions and in
coordination with Division 3.
3.2.2
Ensure concrete has been poured and finished true and smooth to required dimensions and
slope prior to tile placement.
3.2.3
Place tile into fresh concrete and tamp to ensure that top of domes are level to adjacent
concrete. Do not step on tiles.
3.2.4
Provide a 9.5 mm radius edge around tile perimeter flush to field level while concrete is
still workable.
3.2.5
Do not allow walking, leaning or external forces be placed on tile. Provide two suitable
weights of 25 lb each placed on each tile as necessary to ensure solid contact of underside
of tile to concrete.
3.2.6
Remove protective plastic wrap from tile following concrete curing stage, using a sharp
knife, tight to concrete/tile interface. Concrete bleed under plastic can be removed with a
soft brass wire brush without damage to the tile surface.
3.3
Surface Applied Installation
3.3.1
Apply adhesive to backside of tile, following perimeter and internal cross pattern
established by tile manufacturer. Ensure sufficient adhesive has been placed on prescribed
areas to have full coverage across width of adhesive locator and shall be applied to within 6
mm continuously around perimeter edge of tile.
3.3.2
Set tile true and square to areas as detailed on drawings.
3.3.3
Working from centre of tile outwards, proceed to drill and install all fasteners in tile’s
moulded recesses.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 09365
Page 09365 - 4
3.3.4
Drill hole while standing with both feet applying pressure around moulded recess in tile,
drill through tile without hammer option until tile has been penetrated, then with hammer
option to drill into concrete. Maintain foot pressure on both sides of hole while drilling to
prevent concrete dust from accumulating between tile and concrete.
3.3.5
Immediately after drilling each hole, mechanically fasten tile to concrete substrate while
still applying foot pressure. Ensure fastener has been placed to full depth in dome, straight,
and flush to the top of dome and drive pin of fastener with mallet.
3.3.6
Apply perimeter caulking sealant
recommendations and Section 07900.
3.4
Cleaning And Protection
3.4.1
Clean tiles in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
3.4.2
Prevent traffic over new installed detectable tiles, and protect from weather, freezing, and
water immersion, for 24 hours minimum, after final installation.
3.4.3
Cover work temporarily with plywood until work has been approved by Consultant.
in
accordance
* * *
END OF SECTION
with
sealant
manufacturer’s
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 09756
CONCRETE FLOOR SEALING
Page 09756 - 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
here.
1.2
LEED Requirements
1.2.1
1.2.2
.1
1.3
Submittals
1.3.1
Maintenance Instructions: Submit two copies of maintenance instructions to Consultant in
accordance with Section 01001, for incorporation into Manufacturer's Data book.
1.4
Special Precautions
1.4.1
Immediately after using, immerse and store used wiping cloths in water and remove from
site each night after operation. Take every precaution to prevent spontaneous combustion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
General:
2.1.1
For application at all Rabbit Stair Concrete Floors, including new Rabbit Stair, Storage
Room and Custodial Room.
2.2
Materials
2.2.1
Floor Sealer: "Hard-Cure" by CPD, "Prothane" by Proseal, "PQ 5114" by Permaquik
Corporation, L & M “Sealhard” or “Sikafloor 3S” by Sika Canada Inc. Use for areas with
the abbreviation "Conc/Sealed"on the Room Schedule. Apply these products in the later
stages of construction as a sealer only, not as a curing-sealing compound. Unless noted
otherwise all sealers to be clear.
2.2.2
Polished Concrete Floor Sealer: Magnesium fluorosilicate concrete hardener and
dustproofer; 'Lapidolith' by BASF Building Systems or approved alternative.
2.2.3
Cleaner, Thinners and Accessories: Type recommended by sealant manufacturer, to suit
each specific condition encountered on this project.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 09756
CONCRETE FLOOR SEALING
Page 09756 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Examination
3.1.1
Before commencing with the work examine floors to be sealed, and verify compatibility
between curing sealing agent if one was used to seal floors and final concrete sealer applied
under work of this Section. Sandblast, acid etch, lightly grind, whichever is required to
prepare floors to ensure bonding if curing-sealing agent has been used to cure concrete.
3.2
Floor Sealer Application
3.2.1
Commence sealing as soon as concrete surfaces have cured for the minimum period
recommended by the sealant manufacturer, and after tests indicate moisture and chemical
conditions are satisfactory for application.
3.2.2
Prepare concrete surfaces in accordance with sealer manufacturer's recommendations. Do
not use wheelabrator method. For silane sealer prepare concrete by minimum 20 MPa
water blast. Clean concrete of any dirt, dust, oil, grease, stains, paint, laitence, or other
contamination detrimental the bond of sealer and final appearance.
3.2.3
Apply sealer in dust-free conditions suitable for achieving good results. Apply sealer in 2
coats in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed directions. In the case of urethane
sealer, cut first coat 25% with thinner. Apply sealer to present uniformly-coloured surfaces,
free from runs, bubbles, brush marks, crawls, dirt or dust particles, or other defects
detrimental to appearance or performance.
3.3
Polished Floor Sealer Application
3.3.1
Apply minimum three coatings of sealer to entire surface in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions. Diluted ratio as recommended by manufacturer.
3.3.2
After first application, allow floor to dry until no longer visibly wet. If crystals develop
during second application, flush surface liberally with clean water. At same time, rapidly
brush floor with a stiff bristle broom. Mop up excess water and allow surface to dry.
3.3.3
As last application is drying, wait for uniform appearance of white crystals. Flood floor
with water and lightly buff floor with a commercial floor buffer and non-aggressive pad to
bring up required sheen.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 09900
PAINTING AND FINISHING
Page 09900 - 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
here.
1.2
Toronto Parking Authority Requirements
1.2.1
All areas within Toronto Parking Authority 4-storey underground Parking Garage (Carpark
36) requiring Painting and Finish shall conform to TPA Outline Specifications appended in
Volume 3, Reports & Schedules.
1.2.2
Refer to Allowances for “Painting & Finishing Allowance related to Toronto Parking
Authority (TPA). This refers to all areas affected by new construction related to this
project, on P1 through P4 Parking Floor Levels. This includes but is not limited to: new
traffic lines and directional arrows; new Mechanical & Electrical services; interior of
Rabbit Stair from Plaza Level down to P1 Parking Level.
1.3
LEED Requirements
1.3.1
1.3.2
.1
1.4
1.4.1
CAN/CGSB-85.100-M93
Painting
1.4.2
SSPC-SP6
Steel Structures Painting Council, Commercial Blast
Cleaning Standard
1.5
Submittals
1.5.1
Samples
.1
Submit 2 sample chips of every colour required in accordance with Section 01001.
Include a complete list of paint and finish materials to be used, showing the name
of the manufacturer, the catalogue number, grade and quality of the materials
proposed for use.
.2
Colours shall match those specified in the Material and Colour Schedule.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 09900
Page 09900 - 2
.3
Apply samples of finishes in a testing area in the building in the presence of the
Consultant. Apply samples with the correct material, number of coats, colour,
texture and degree of gloss required. Refinish if required, until approval of the
Consultant is obtained. Location of testing area shall be as approved by the
Consultant.
.4
Leave test areas undisturbed until completion of the work. Approved work in the
test area shall serve as a standard for similar work throughout the project. Work
which does not match the approved finishes shall be corrected and refinished at no
expense to the Owner.
1.5.2
List of Materials: Submit a list of materials proposed for use on the work, for review at
least thirty (30) days before the materials are required. The list shall bear the
manufacturer's official certification that the materials listed thereon are the best quality
made by the company.
1.5.3
Extra Materials: Supply Owner with one clearly identified sealed 3.78 litre can of each
colour and type of paint, stain, and varnish for this work for future maintenance. Take such
materials to designated storage area in the building.
1.6
Product Delivery, Storage, and Handling
1.6.1
Storage and Safety Precautions: Store containers of paint, varnish, thinner, and other
volatile materials in well-ventilated designated room under lock and key, where they will
not be exposed to excessive heat or direct rays of the sun. Keep containers tightly closed
when not in actual use. Remove used cloths from building every night, and when not in
use. Take precautions against spontaneous combustion by burning, drenching in water, or
placing in air-tight covered metal containers. Provide CO2 fire extinguisher of 9 kg.
capacity in this room while area is used for paint storage.
1.6.2
Protection: Protect the work of other trades from damage. Post signs at freshly-painted
surfaces immediately following their completion. Any soiling of concrete pavement
attributable to this section due to spillage, mixing of material, or any other cause
whatsoever, to be entirely reinstated under this Section at no expense to the Owner.
1.7
Job Conditions
1.7.1
Environmental Conditions and Temperatures: Do not paint or finish in dusty, or moist air
conditions, unclean or improperly ventilated areas. Maintain at least 10 degrees C ambient
and substrate temperatures and humidity conditions within acceptable limits as
recommended by paint manufacturer during application and drying period.
1.7.2
On exterior work, paint shall not be applied during rainy, foggy or very humid weather nor
in direct sunlight. Paint shall be applied in temperatures between 10 deg. C and 30 deg. C.
Varnishes lacquers and enamels shall be applied at a temperature of about 20 deg. C but in
no case shall the temperature be less than 15 deg. C, nor more than 30 deg. F.
1.7.3
Protection
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 09900
Page 09900 - 3
.1
Provide metal pans or adequate tarpaulins to protect floors in areas assigned for the
storage and mixing of paints.
.2
Use sufficient drop cloths and protective coverings for the full protection of floors,
furnishings, and work not being painted. Protect mechanical, electrical, and special
equipment hardware, all other components of the building which do not require
painting from paint spotting and other soiling during the painting process.
.3
Leave above areas clean and free from evidence of occupancy upon completion of
painting.
.4
Protect paint materials from fire and freezing.
.5
Keep waste rags in metal drums containing water, and remove from building at
end of each working shift.
1.7.4
Lighting: Provide a minimum of 761 lux (75 footcandles) lighting on surfaces to be
painted.
1.7.5
Epoxy Paint: In occupied buildings do not apply epoxy paint during business hours (7:00
a.m. to 6:00 p.m.). Give Owner 48 hours notice in writing before application work begins.
Cease operations a minimum of 3 hours before business day begins.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
2.1.1
Paint
.1
Highest grade, first line quality product of the manufacturer. Painting and
finishing materials shall comply with or exceed CAN2-85-100 for Premium Grade
Work and comply with the specified generic formula guide in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
.2
Refer to Material and Colour Schedule for colours. Additional colours will be
issued at a later date after closing of tenders. Make allowance for 25% of
paint to be deep accent colours, 25% pale accents and remainder 2 base
colours for interior painting and all deep colours for exterior painting. The
following manufacturers are acceptable:
.1
Benjamin Moore Paints
.2
ICI Paints Canada
.3
Pratt and Lambert Inc.
.4
PPG Canada Inc.
.5
Sherwin-Williams Company of Canada Limited
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 09900
.6
Para Paints.
.7
International Protective Coatings.
.8
Sico Inc.
Page 09900 - 4
.3
The Consultant reserves the right to refuse any paint or finishing material if in his
opinion it is incapable of matching specified colours or is not suitable or adequate
for the use which it is proposed.
.4
One brand of paint shall be used for each formula.
.5
Benjamin Moore paint shall be used for all Toronto Parking Authority Parking
Garage (Carpark 36) areas as outlined in TPA Outline Specifications appended in
Volume 3, Reports & Schedules.
2.1.2
Stain: Pigmented type conforming to CAN/CGSB-1.145-M90, Solvent-Based, pigmented
stain.
2.1.3
Polyurethane Varnish: Interior grade, oil modified conforming to CAN/CGSB-1.175-M89.
2.1.4
Galvanized Metal Primer: Alkyd/Calcium plumate, #52 Galvaprime by Para Paints
Limited, Galvanized Metal Primer #150-00 by Benjamin Moore and Company Ltd.,
Galvanized Iron Primer (Rustmaster) #52-29 by Glidden Co. Canada Ltd. or equivalent by
Valspar.
2.1.5
Luminescent Paint: Two-part, 100% solids epoxy paint, glow in the dark system applied to
25 mils thick. ‘Niteglow NG-100' with ‘Primer 114' by Wooster or approved alternative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Inspection
3.1.1
Verify all surfaces with electric moisture meter and do not proceed if reading is higher than
12-15, without written permission from Consultant.
3.1.2
Proceed with work only when surfaces and conditions are satisfactory for production of a
first-class job.
3.1.3
Remove dust, grease, rust, and extraneous matter from all surfaces, except that rust
occurring on items specified to be primed under other Sections shall be removed and work
reprimed under those Sections.
3.2
Preparation
3.2.1
Concrete and Masonry
.1
Test surfaces for alkalinity with pink litmus paper or other standard industry
method.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 09900
Page 09900 - 5
.2
Where extreme alkalinity occurs, wash surface with 4% solution tetrapotassium
pyrophosphate where latex base paint is to be used, and with zinc sulphate solution
where other paint bases are to be used.
.3
Etch normal concrete surface to receive alkyd paint with commercial muriatic acid
solution (1 part to 20 parts water by volume). Follow with complete rinsing with
clean water.
.4
Rub down surfaces of different textures and remove mortar spots and sharp edges
with a scraper. Patch where required. Fill masonry and concrete surfaces with
block filler to fill all holes and pores.
3.2.2
Gypsum and Cement Board: Inspect to ensure properly filled joints, sand smooth. Fill
small nicks or holes with patching compound and sand smooth.
3.2.3
Unprimed Ferrous Metal Surfaces: clean with power tools to SSPC-SP3 specifications
before application of the primer coat.
3.2.4
Galvanized and Pre Primed Surfaces
3.2.5
3.2.6
.1
New Metal With Wipe Coated Galvanizing: Thoroughly clean to remove all
grease, oil, dirt and all other contaminants which may be present on the surface.
Mineral Spirits or Xylol are acceptable solvents to use for this purpose - that is, to
remove grease, oil, dirt and similar contaminants. Remove scale by wirebrushing.
.2
Weathered Metal and Wipe Coated Galvanizing: For old and weathered
galvanized, wipe coat galvanized surfaces and preprimed metal, thorough surface
preparation is essential - to ensure that all contaminants have been removed from
the surface and pretreat as for New Metal.
.3
Spangled Type Galvanizing: Treat with vinyl wash primer to provide proper bond
for paint finish.
Woodwork
.1
For woodwork not called for to be factory finished, but to be painted on site,
inspect casework and millwork to assure surfaces are smooth, free from machine
marks, and that nailheads have been countersunk. Seal all knots and sapwood in
surfaces to receive paint with a sealer compatible with finish specified.
.2
Sand smooth all woodwork which is to be finished and clean surfaces free of dust
before applying first coat. In the case of painted woodwork, fill nail and screw
holes, splits and scratches with non-shrinking filler after first coat is dry. When
these occur on a surface to receive a transparent finish, use putty tinted to match
local grain condition. Between coats, sand lightly with #120 grit sandpaper and
remove dust.
Hardware: Remove finish hardware, switch plates and accessories, removable trim, grilles,
etc; mask any that are not removable. Re-install these when paint is thoroughly dry and
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 09900
Page 09900 - 6
clean them. Do not clean hardware with solvent. Prime-painted hardware items shall be
painted to match the surface on which they are installed.
3.2.7
Preprimed Pumps, Motors, and Similar Equipment: Prior to painting preprimed pumps,
motors, and similar equipment, remove paint protective coating such as silicone, to ensure
good paint adhesion.
3.2.8
Mask and cover all surrounding surfaces to provide neat, clean, true juncture lines, and to
keep paint from adjacent surfaces. Protect floor finishes from splashings.
3.2.9
Mask labels and specification plates occurring on equipment to be painted and ULC labels
on doors and frames.
3.2.10
Re-seal all cut edges of wood doors, if the material was cut subsequent to initial sealing.
Seal or prime the tops and bottoms of wood doors.
3.2.11
Existing Surfaces Preparation: To CAN/CGSB-85.100-93, CPCA Manual Chapter 3 and as
follows:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Gypsum Wallboard
.1
Remove dirt, dust, sand and other foreign matter. Limit methods to CS-1
Hand cleaning methods in accordance with requirements of CPCA.
.2
Repair holes, cracks or undulations in the wallboard. Inspect and make
necessary repairs after the first coat of paint is applied.
Steel - Recoat: To CGSB-85-GP-15M-Apr-1978, and as follows:
.1
Severely deteriorated: Completely remove existing coating.
.2
Moderately damaged areas: Spot clean and patch priming prior to new
finishing. At exterior, all touch up to be with zinc rich paint.
.3
Generally: Clean surface of contaminants. Test patch new primer and/or
finish when changing the generic type of coating or existing coating
system cannot be identified.
Steel and Copper (Interior)
.1
Provide surfaces after cleaning that are free of oxidation, oil, grease, soil,
salts, drawing and cutting compounds and other foreign matter.
.2
Use hand cleaning system as described for interior concrete.
.3
Use solvent-cleaning as required.
.4
Test patch new primer and/or finish when changing the generic type of
coating or existing coating system cannot be identified.
Interior Concrete – Sound Paint Surfaces
Project No. 0701-BS
.5
.6
SECTION 09900
Page 09900 - 7
.1
Wash area to be painted with water; use a mild detergent solution if
necessary and rinse thoroughly until all detergent has been removed, and
allow to dry.
.2
Use hand cleaning system exclusively.
.3
Acceptable hand-tools are scrapers, wire brushes, sandpaper, steel wool,
and dusters.
Wood
.1
Mildew removal: Scrub the affected areas with a solution of: 1 L
household bleach, 3 L water and 1 Tbsp of household detergent.
Thoroughly rinse the scrubbed areas with plenty of clean water and allow
the surface to dry completely before proceeding with any further
preparation for painting.
.2
Seal knots and resinous areas with a clear vinyl sealer conforming to
CAN/CGSB-1.26. Do not seal the knots or resinous areas of wood
substrates which are being finished with clear finishes, transparent and
semi-transparent stains.
.3
After the first prime coat has been applied, fill all joints, cracks, knot
holes and nail holes with a suitable filling material. Spot prime the filled
areas. Where stains are used, match the colour of the filler to the stain.
Apply filler compatible with substrate to holes and cracks.
3.3
Workmanship
3.3.1
Apply work using skilled tradesmen working under direction of a capable foreman, and
according to manufacturer's specifications; in a workmanlike manner; with suitable clean
equipment in good condition; in dust-free and under adequate illumination and suitable
conditions for production of best results; evenly, uniform in sheen, colour and texture, free
from brush marks, sags, crawls, runs, or other defects detrimental to appearance or
performance; and in a manner to prevent spattering or spilling over finished surfaces.
3.3.2
Mix paint on site and use unadulterated, except where specified otherwise in
manufacturer's directions.
3.3.3
Use same brand of paint for primer, intermediate, and finish coats.
3.3.4
Do not apply succeeding coats until preceding coat is dry and hard.
3.3.5
Lighten preceding coats 25% white (tint white coats) from the colour called for in the
Colour and Material Schedule.
3.3.6
It is generally intended that material be applied by brush or roller. Spray painting will be
permitted in areas where advantageous, but Consultant shall be consulted and shall approve
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 09900
Page 09900 - 8
each area before spray painting commences. Consultant may at any time prohibit the use of
spray painting for such reasons during application as carelessness, poor masking, or
protective measures, paint fogs drifting into prepainted surfaces or other finishes,
disturbance to other trades, or failure to obtain a dense, even, opaque finish.
3.3.7
Sand lightly between coats with #120 grit sandpaper.
3.3.8
Do not apply last coat of varnish on stained wood surfaces until all gloss varnish
applications have been inspected and approved by the Consultant.
3.3.9
Finish exposed edges of doors to match face of door. Seal hidden edges of wood core doors
with two coats of gloss varnish or two coats of paint. Paint exposed raw edges of plywood
doors to match faces. Fill all open end grain of wood doors and plywood with filler after
first coat application.
3.4
Application
3.4.1
Follow manufacturer's preparation and application instructions.
3.4.2
Paint all exposed surfaces where specifically noted on Room, Material and Finish
Schedule.
3.4.3
Unless specifically noted, do not paint stainless steel, chrome, baked enamel, plastic
laminate, glass, tile, porcelain enamel, ceramic surfaces, equipment name or specification
plates, fire resistance labels, washroom fixtures, manhole and catch basin covers, floors or
sprinkler heads. Make good paint finish on items where painted surfaces have become
marred or defaced.
3.4.4
Any sprinkler heads rendered inoperable by painting and/or new construction will require
replacement at Contractor's expense.
3.4.5
Examine the Drawings and Specifications for the work of other sections regarding the
provisions for prime and finish coats. Paint or finish all materials installed throughout the
project which are required to be painted and which are left unfinished or unpainted by other
sections. The only exception to this requirement is where the Drawings, specifications or
schedules state positively and explicitly that a surface is not to be finish painted.
3.4.6
In areas where painting is not called for, painting is not required, with the following
exceptions, which require paint: plywood backboards, all other exposed wood, all exposed
ferrous metals (even if galvanized), and mechanical and electrical services, equipment and
hangers (including exterior rooftop mechanical and electrical units) and interior of coat
closets. Colours selected by Consultant.
3.4.7
Paint interior of all pipe and duct spaces, visible through grilles, black matte finish. Paint
interior of lighting coves and valances including interior of angles supporting louvres,
white.
3.4.8
Paint glazing rebates and stops of hollow-metal sections before glass is installed.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 09900
Page 09900 - 9
3.4.9
Paint convectors, grilles, conduit, pipes, ducts, hangers, brackets, panels, access panels,
exposed steel, concrete inserts, fire hose cabinets, bus ducts, and other articles on or near
finished surface shall to match the colour of the surface on which the article appears,
except where noted otherwise on Schedules.
3.4.10
Paint piping, conduits, ductwork and other unfinished equipment in boiler room,
mechanical rooms, and electrical rooms. In other unfinished areas leave equipment, piping,
conduits, hangers, etc., in original finish and touch up scratches and marks.
3.4.11
Identification paint schedule as follows:
.1
Fire protection system: red, alkyd enamel.
.2
Systems posing safety hazards such as gas piping: yellow, alkyd enamel.
.3
Safe systems: green, alkyd enamel.
3.4.12
Do not paint circuit breakers, switches, and receptacles, or similar electrical components.
3.4.13
Paint surfaces where mirrors will be directly applied to prevent moisture bleed through
wall.
3.4.14
For finished interior wood that is to be painted, apply one coat of approved best grade
white interior trim primer, reduced with thinners in accordance with manufacturer's printed
directions, to ALL surfaces of wood as soon as material is delivered and before it is built
in. Use brushes for applying material to interior wood.
3.4.15
Repaint the entire plane of areas showing incomplete coverage.
3.4.16
Do not paint over ULC labels on doors and frames and over identification labels on
mechanical and electrical equipment.
3.4.17
"Cut in" at corners and or wall ceiling junctions.
3.5
Traffic Lines and Barrier Free Symbols
3.5.1
Apply 100 mm wide traffic line paint in accordance with manufacturer's specifications.
Make edges of line sharp, well defined and free of splatters. Include handicapped symbols
in parking stalls designated for the disabled. Line painting and stall marking shall match
existing.
3.5.2
Have traffic lines work performed by an experienced company which specializes in this
type of work.
3.5.3
On concrete parking slabs on grade to have sealer finish, apply line painting prior to
Garage sealer application.
3.5.4
Walkway and Directional arrows: Provide 3M adhesive-backed directional arrows on
driving lanes.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 09900
Page 09900 - 10
3.5.5
All Toronto Parking Authority Parking Garage (Carpark 36) areas requiring traffic lines
and walkway and directional arrows shall conform to TPA Outline Specifications appended
in Volume 3, Reports & Schedules.
3.6
Formulae
3.6.1
The following Formulae are intended to provide completely opaque surfaces. If surfaces
are not completely opaque and uniform, apply additional coats at no additional cost to the
Owner.
3.6.2
Consult Consultant before painting any surface not included in the formulae as listed.
3.6.3
Unless noted otherwise use the following sheens:
3.6.4
.1
Painted doors, frames, trim - semi-gloss.
.2
Gypsum board for ceilings and walls - eggshell.
.3
Janitors rooms, kitchens, garbage rooms, basement corridors, and basement
washrooms - semi-gloss.
.4
For masonry - semi-gloss.
Formula "A"
FOR:
APPLY:
3.6.5
Formula “B”
FOR:
APPLY:
Note:
3.6.6
100 mm wide parking and traffic lines and handicapped symbols.
Two coats of Ibis Products Limited Traffic Paint or approved alternative, to
CGSB 1-GP-74.
Painted masonry or concrete.
One coat of masonry block filler. (Apply by brush at package consistency.
Verify moisture content before application).
One coat of primer
Two coats of alkyd enamel eggshell.
Colour of paint for columns at vehicle driving areas shall be black from 150
mm above paving surface to a height of 750 mm. Paint above this line with
500 mm wide yellow stripe.
Formula “C”
FOR:
APPLY:
Note:
Exposed gypsum board ceilings, bulkheads and areas not subjected to dirt
marking.
One coat of sealer-primer.
Two coats of acrylic latex enamel eggshell.
Painting of exposed gypsum board ceilings and exposed gypsum board walls
in Shower Areas and adjoining areas is specified in Section 09810 - High
Build Glazed Coating.
Project No. 0701-BS
FOR:
APPLY:
3.6.7
APPLY:
Note:
Note:
Painted concrete floors.
One coat recommended primer.
Two coats of "Epoxal 100 Solvent Free" epoxy coating manufactured by
Niagara Protective Coatings, minimum 20 mils per coat.
Painted wood.
One coat primer.
Two coats interior alkyd enamel.
Formula "H"
FOR:
APPLY:
3.6.12
Ferrous metal surfaces.
If not shop primed: One coat of rust inhibitive enamel primer. For galvanized
surfaces use galvanized metal primer.
If shop primed: Touch-up only with same paint as that applied in the shop.
Two coats of alkyd enamel. Use exterior grade for exterior work and interior
grade for interior work.
Prime caulking compound as required.
Undercoating is not required where surfaces are wipe-coated galvanized.
Formula "G"
FOR:
APPLY:
3.6.11
Gypsum board to receive vinyl or other wall coverings or sprayed texture
coating.
One coat of alkyd sealer as recommended by manufacturer to suit the
application of wall covering.
Formula “F”
FOR:
APPLY:
3.6.10
Gypsum board surfaces subjected to dirt marks, and areas that receive
scrubbing.
One coat of primer.
Two coats of alkyd enamel eggshell.
Formula “E”
FOR:
APPLY:
3.6.9
Page 09900 - 11
Formula “D”
FOR:
3.6.8
SECTION 09900
Insulation on hot water tank, and exposed insulated hot and cold water
plumbing lines throughout the building.
One coat of sealer. (Apply by brush at package consistency).
One coat of acrylic latex enamel.
Formula "I"
FOR:
Interior of all pipe spaces and ducts visible through grilles, and all surfaces
visible through louvres occurring in ceilings.
Project No. 0701-BS
APPLY:
Note:
3.6.13
SECTION 09900
Page 09900 - 12
One coat of acrylic latex paint, colour matte black, unless indicated
otherwise.
Prepare surfaces as required by applying proper primers on the surface to
which paint is applied. For surfaces above ceilings, paint surfaces after all
services have been installed and prior to ceiling installation.
Formula "J"
FOR:
APPLY:
Note:
Roof-mounted equipment, pipes, conduit, ducts and other miscellaneous
items.
If unprimed, apply one coat of rust inhibitive alkyd enamel primer.
Two coats of exterior grade alkyd enamel.
If prefinished, repaint in colour selected by Consultant.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 10430
EXTERIOR SIGNAGE
Page 10430 - 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
here.
1.1.2
Refer to Cash Allowances.
1.2
LEED Requirements
1.2.1
1.2.2
.1
1.3
Work Included in This Section
1.3.1
Refer to Signage Schedule for complete scope of Work. Work shall include, but not be
limited to, the following:
.1
Bicycle Storage Facility
.2
Stair signage.
.3
Traffic signs.
.4
Parking area (Reserved) signs.
.5
Handicapped signs.
.6
Fire route signs.
1.4
Submittals
1.4.1
Shop Drawings: Submit for Consultant's review in accordance with Section 01001 before
fabrication. Indicate all component parts and fixings, materials, thicknesses, size, locations,
adjacent construction, anchorage, finish and installation details.
1.4.2
Maintenance Instructions: Submit maintenance instructions in accordance with Section
01001 for incorporation into manufacturer's data book.
1.4.3
Samples: Submit the following samples in accordance with Section 01001 for Consultant's
review. Samples shall be representative of specified colours:
Project No. 0701-BS
.1
SECTION 10430
EXTERIOR SIGNAGE
Page 10430 - 2
Polyvinylidene (baked) coating on 200 mm long aluminum extrusion.
1.5
Design Criteria
1.5.1
Design exterior posts, panels and fasteners to support a wind load of 0.9 kN/m².
1.6
Submittals
1.6.1
Submit the following with the Bid:
.1
Sketch detail of proposed signs.
.2
Photographs or clear catalogue cuts of the signs.
1.7
Coordination
1.7.1
Coordinate work of other sections to receive signs. For instance, the top 200 mm of
footings shall be formed with circular fibre forms, and shall be stripped after concrete has
cured (not left in place).
1.7.2
Examine and be responsible for clearing potential interference of services before
undertaking the excavation work.
1.8
Extended Warranty
1.8.1
Submit a warranty in accordance with Section 01001, covering the repair and replacement
of defective work for a period of 2 years from the expiration of the 1 year warranty
included in the Contract as defined in the General Conditions.
1.8.2
Defects shall include, without being limited to:
.1
Loosening of units.
.2
Fading or discolouration of units.
1.8.3
Upon written notice from the Owner, promptly repair and or replace defective units.
1.8.4
Total warranty period: 3 years.
1.9
Extra Materials For Maintenance
1.9.1
Submit the following extra posts for Owner's future maintenance:
.1
2 - stop sign posts
.2
2 - fire route sign posts
.3
1 - handicapped sign post.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 10430
EXTERIOR SIGNAGE
Page 10430 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
2.1.1
Stainless Steel: ASTM A167, Type 304 with No. 4 finish.
2.1.2
Aluminum Extrusions: AA 6063-T5 alloy and temper in nominal 3 mm thickness.
2.1.3
Aluminum Plate: AA 1100-H14 alloy and temper in nominal 3 mm thickness.
2.1.4
Pipe Posts: Hot dipped galvanized, conforming to ASTM A53.
2.1.5
Fastenings: 300 or 400 series stainless steel.
2.1.6
Anchor Bolts: Hot dipped galvanized steel, including nuts and washers.
2.1.7
Polyvinylidene Coating for Aluminum: "Kynar" based baked non-metallic coating by PPG
Industries or Valspar, in specified colours. Finishes shall be satin matte, maximum gloss
15 smooth, free of scratches, gouges, air bubbles, and free of foreign matter or other
imperfections.
2.1.8
Urethane Coating for Steel: 2-component exterior grade flat polyurethane suitable for
galvanized metals, as manufactured by Valspar, Glidden, PPG or Benjamin Moore.
2.1.9
Bituminous Coating: Conforming to CAN/CGSB-1.108-M89.
2.2
Fabrication Requirements
2.2.1
Verify all dimensions on the site before preparing drawings or proceeding with shop work.
Fit and shop assemble insofar as possible the various sections of the work and deliver to
the project site in the largest practical sections.
2.2.2
Fabricate the work true to dimensions and square. Accurately fit members with hairline
joints, and join using adequate fastening.
2.2.3
Fabricate finished work free from distortion and defects detrimental to appearance and
performance.
2.2.4
Welding of steel and aluminum shall be undertaken only by a fabricator fully approved by
the Canadian Welding Bureau to the requirements of CSA W47, CSA W55.3, and CSA
W47.2 as may be applicable. File or grind exposed welds smooth and flush. Do not leave
grinding, marks. Construct internal and external corners with sharp lines. Make all welds
continuous.
2.2.5
Design and fabricate sign and supports to withstand loads which will be applied to it
including vandalism and to accommodate expansion and contraction due to thermal change
and deflection of structure.
2.2.6
Fabricate metal work complete with all components required for anchoring in a safe and
secure manner.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 10430
EXTERIOR SIGNAGE
Page 10430 - 4
2.2.7
Countersink exposed fastening, where such are approved in writing, and make as
inconspicuous as possible with bolts cut off flush with nuts. Construct fastenings of the
same material and finish as the base material on which they occur.
2.2.8
Insulate contact surfaces to prevent electrolysis due to metal to metal contact or contact
between metal and masonry or concrete. Use bituminous paint, butyl tape, building paper
or other approved means.
2.3
Description of Components - Directional Signs
2.3.1
Sign Panels and Finish
.1
.2
2.3.2
Of specified aluminum extruded/moulded in one piece, with integral returns and a
3 mm radius on all edges and corners, and in the following types:
.1
Removable panels: two sided, removable in sections to allow sign changes
as required.
.2
Fixed panels: one sided.
Pre-finish exposed parts of aluminum panels with baked coating. Colour of
aluminum shall match building exterior panels.
Lettering (Logos and Graphics)
.1
Computer cut, surface applied Scotchlike white reflective vinyl Series #580 by
3M, protected with a clear matte polyurethane coating containing ultraviolet
inhibitors. Use Helvetica medium typeface for letters.
.2
All work shall be executed in such a manner that all edges and corners are true,
clean, correctly spaced, and photographically precise. All lettering must accurately
reproduce the letterform.
.3
Text justified left and directional arrows justified right unless otherwise indicated.
All text in a single line unless otherwise indicated, with text and symbols level and
spaced for visual balance.
2.4
Description of Components - Traffic Signs
2.4.1
Panels for Signs: Galvanized sheet steel in 1.5 mm thickness conforming to Standard 2001
of the Ontario Provincial Standard Specification (OPSS).
2.4.2
Symbols: Conforming to the Ministry of Transportation of Ontario, Traffic Management
and Engineering Office, and as supplied by MTO approved suppliers as listed in this
Section. Material shall be protected reflective proprietary plastic which is ultraviolet
resistant, and which will not fade, chip, crack, corrode or rust.
2.4.3
Sign Posts, Frames and Finish: Same as specified for handicapped signs.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 10430
EXTERIOR SIGNAGE
Page 10430 - 5
2.5
Description of Components - Handicapped Signs
2.5.1
Sign Panels: Galvanized sheet steel in 1.5 mm thickness conforming to Standard 2001 of
the Ontario Provincial Standard Specification (OPSS). Sign to incorporate City of Toronto
By-Law requirements.
2.5.2
Lettering and Painting: As indicated on Detail Sheets. Use screen printed flat and finished
with baked enamel, non-reflective grade.
2.5.3
Sign Posts: Single post type, using hot dipped galvanized pipe in 75 mm diameter set in
pipe sleeve in concrete footing. Provide welded and ground post caps.
2.5.4
Post Finish: Prefinish exposed parts of posts with urethane coating in colour to match sign
background colour.
2.6
Description of Components - Fire Route Signs
2.6.1
Signs: Conforming to City of Toronto By-Laws, of specific types as shown on Detail
Sheets. Source signs from City approved suppliers.
2.6.2
Sign Posts: Same as specified for handicapped signs.
2.6.3
Post Finish: Same as specified for handicapped signs.
2.7
Description of Components - Parking Area (Reserved) Signs
2.7.1
Sign Panels and Finish: Aluminum plate as specified, prefinished in fluoropolymer coating
in colour to match building exterior panels.
2.7.2
Lettering (Logos and Graphics): Same as specified for directional signs.
2.7.3
Sign Posts: Hot dipped galvanized pipe in 50 mm diameter set in pipe sleeve in concrete
footing. Provide welded and ground post caps.
2.7.4
Post Finish: Prefinish exposed parts of posts with baked coating in colour to match sign
background colour.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
3.1.1
Excavate, provide concrete base and footings, and backfill in accordance with Sections
02200 and 03300.
3.1.2
Install sign work in the correct locations and positions, plumb, level, structurally sound,
securely fastened, free from defects detrimental to finished appearance and to the approval
of the Consultant.
Project No. 0701-BS
SECTION 10430
EXTERIOR SIGNAGE
Page 10430 - 6
3.1.3
Install the work of this section using skilled tradesmen and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations where applicable. Apply 2 coats of bituminous paint on
surfaces of aluminum in contact with concrete. Allow to dry and cure prior to aluminum
installation in concrete.
3.1.4
Perform drilling of steel and/or concrete necessary to fasten the work of this section.
3.1.5
Install wall hung signs with galvanized stove bolts with heads field painted to match sign.
Install in expansion sleeves.
3.1.6
Touch up disturbed coating in the field.
* * *
END OF SECTION

specifications - Struct

Transkrypt

Podobne dokumenty

permanent fall protection systems

The bainitic transformation in steels has been extensive

AUTUMN 2008 - Peddinghaus Corporation

Template for CUAPs to BMTRADA - Złącza ciesielskie SIMPSON

The New GeNeraTioN.